Syllabus 2017

PSG INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND APPLIED RESEARCH
(Approved by AICTE, Affiliated to Anna University Chennai)

Neelambur, Coimbatore -641062
Regulations 2017
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

PSG INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND APPLIED RESEARCH
Neelambur, Coimbatore -641062
VISION
To achieve excellence in education and research, and nurture engineers with

ethics, who will face global challenges to serve industry and society.
MISSION
 To facilitate active learning and vocational training.
 To encourage and promote questioning spirit and 'can-do'

entrepreneurial attitude.
 To foster industry - institute collaboration.
 To ignite passion for creative work and selfless service towards a

sustainable world.
 To provide intellectually stimulating environment, conducive for

research.
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
VISION
To produce globally competent and socially responsible Electronics and Communication

Engineers who will contribute towards the technological advancements in industry, research
and academia.
MISSION
 To provide the students of ECE high quality learning facilities comparable to world
class standards
 To prepare students to assimilate the theoretical concepts by providing experiential

learning, leveraging the fundamentals of basic science, and relevant packages
 To promote innovative research in cutting edge technologies and indigenous

product/process development through multidisciplinary approach
 To collaborate and establish Industry-Institute-Interactions and equip the students to

apply engineering principles to societal development
 To provide a learning ambience that imparts good communication skills, qualities of

teamwork, leadership and entrepreneurial skills
 To instil the spirit of positive attitude, ethical practices, service to society and life-
long learning
PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

Graduates will excel to emerge as a globally competent team player or leader in
PEO1
the allied fields of Electronics and Communication Engineering.
Graduates will have core technical competency that will enable them to engage in
PEO2
life-long learning and research.
Graduates will provide innovative solutions and services to solve industrial and
PEO3
societal problems adhering to ethical practices and social concern.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs) and PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

The Electronics and Communication engineering professionals graduating from our
department will be able to:
Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,

PO1 engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution
of complex engineering problems.
Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze
PO2 complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first
principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering
problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified
PO3
needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the
cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based
knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis
PO4
and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
conclusions.
Modern tool usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques,
resources and modern engineering and IT tools, including prediction and
PO5
modelling to complex engineering activities, with an understanding of the
limitations.
The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual
PO6 knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the
consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice
Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional
PO7 engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and
demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.
Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
PO8
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a
PO9
member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings
Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities
with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able
PO10
to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make
effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply
PO11
these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage
projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and
PO12 ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context
of technological change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)
After the completion of the programme, the Electronics and Communication
engineering professionals of our department will have the ability to:
PSO1 Analyze, design, simulate and develop Electronic Circuits and Systems.
Apply their knowledge to provide feasible solutions for complex problems
PSO2
related to Communication system design.
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI
Regulations 2017
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.NO. CONTENTS PAGE NUMBER
1. Regulations 1
2. Curriculum 19
3. Detailed Syllabi with CO/PO/PSO Mapping 27
4. Professional Electives – Detailed Syllabi 129
5. Open Electives – Detailed Syllabi 169
ANNA UNIVERSITY: : CHENNAI - 600 025
REGULATIONS 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
Common to all B.E. / B.Tech. Full-Time Programmes
(For the students admitted to B.E. / B.Tech. Programme at various
Affiliated Institutions)
DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING / BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY
This Regulations is applicable to the students admitted to B.E/B.Tech. Programmes at all

Engineering Colleges affiliated to Anna University, Chennai (other than Autonomous Colleges)
and to all the University Colleges of Engineering of Anna University, Chennai from the
academic year 2017-2018 onwards.
1. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE
In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:

(i) “Programme” means Degree Programme, that is B.E./B.Tech. Degree
Programme.
(ii) “Discipline” means specialization or branch of B.E./B.Tech. Degree
Programme, like Civil Engineering, Textile Technology, etc.
(iii) “Course” means a theory or practical subject that is normally studied in a
semester, like Mathematics, Physics, etc.
(iv) “Director, Academic Courses” means the authority of the University who is
responsible for all academic activities of the Academic Programmes for
implementation of relevant rules of this Regulations pertaining to the
Academic Programmes.
(v) “Chairman” means the Head of the Faculty.
(vi) “Head of the Institution” means the Principal of the College.
(vii) “Head of the Department” means head of the Department concerned.
(viii) “Controller of Examinations” means the authority of the University who is
responsible for all activities of the University Examinations.
(ix) “University” means ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI.
2 ADMISSION
2.1 Candidates seeking admission to the first semester of the eight semester B.E. /
B.Tech. Degree Programme:
Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examinations of (10+2) Curriculum

(Academic Stream) prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu with Mathematics,
Physics and Chemistry as three of the four subjects of study under Part-III or any
examination of any other University or authority accepted by the Syndicate of Anna
Electronics and Communication Engineering 1

University as equivalent thereto.
(OR)
Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational stream
(Vocational groups in Engineering / Technology) as prescribed by the Government of
Tamil Nadu.
2.2 Lateral entry admission
(i) The candidates who possess the Diploma in Engineering / Technology

awarded by the State Board of Technical Education, Tamilnadu or its
equivalent are eligible to apply for Lateral entry admission to the third
semester of B.E. / B.Tech. in the branch corresponding to the branch of
study.
(OR)
(ii) The candidates who possess the Degree in Science (B.Sc.,) (10+2+3 stream)
with Mathematics as a subject at the B.Sc. Level are eligible to apply for
Lateral entry admission to the third semester of B.E. / B.Tech.
Such candidates shall undergo two additional Engineering subject(s) in the third and
fourth semesters as prescribed by the University.
3 PROGRAMMES OFFERED
B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes under the Faculty of Civil Engineering, Faculty of

Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Information and
Communication Engineering and Faculty of Technology.
4 STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES
4.1 Categorization of Courses
Every B.E. / B. Tech. Programme will have a curriculum with syllabi consisting of
theory and practical courses that shall be categorized as follows:
i. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) courses include Technical English,

Engineering Ethics and Human Values, Communication skills, Environmental
Science and Engineering.
ii. Basic Sciences (BS) courses include Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry,
Biology, etc.
iii. Engineering Sciences (ES) courses include Engineering practices, Engineering
Graphics, Basics of Electrical / Electronics / Mechanical / Computer
Engineering, Instrumentation etc.
iv. Professional Core (PC) courses include the core courses relevant to the chosen
specialization/branch.
v. Professional Elective (PE) courses include the elective courses relevant to the
chosen specialization/ branch.

vi. Open Elective (OE) courses include the courses from other branches which a
student can choose from the list specified in the curriculum of the students
B.E. / B. Tech. / B. Arch. Programmes.
vii. Employability Enhancement Courses (EEC) include Project Work and/or
Internship, Seminar, Professional Practices, Case Study and
Industrial/Practical Training.
4.2 Personality and Character Development
All students shall enroll, on admission, in any one of the personality and character
development programmes (NCC/NSS/NSO/YRC) and undergo training for about 80
hours and attend a camp of about seven days. The training shall include classes on
hygiene and health awareness and also training in first-aid.
National Cadet Corps (NCC) will have about 20 parades.
National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in and around the
College / Institution.
National Sports Organization (NSO) will have sports, Games, Drills and Physical
exercises.
Youth Red Cross (YRC) will have activities related to social services in and around
College/Institutions.
While the training activities will normally be during weekends, the camp will normally
be during vacation period.
4.3 Number of courses per semester
Each semester curriculum shall normally have a blend of lecture courses not
exceeding 7 and Laboratory courses and Employability Enhancement Course(s) not
exceeding 4. Each Employability Enhancement Course may have credits assigned as
per clause 4.4. However, the total number of courses per semester shall not exceed
10.
4.4 Credit Assignment
Each course is assigned certain number of credits based on the following:
Contact period per week CREDITS
1 Lecture Period 1
2 Tutorial Periods 1
2 Laboratory Periods (also for EEC courses like /

1
Seminar / Project Work / Case study / etc.)
The Contact Periods per week for Tutorials and Practical can only be in multiples of 2.

4.5 Industrial Training / Internship
The students may undergo Industrial training for a period as specified in the
Curriculum during summer / winter vacation. In this case the training has to be
undergone continuously for the entire period.
The students may undergo Internship at Research organization / University (after due
approval from the Department Consultative Committee) for the period prescribed in
the curriculum during summer / winter vacation, in lieu of Industrial training.
4.6 Industrial Visit
Every student is required to go for at least one Industrial Visit every year starting
from the second year of the Programme. The Heads of Departments shall ensure that
necessary arrangements are made in this regard.
4.7 Value Added Courses
The Students may optionally undergo Value Added Courses and the credits earned
through the Value Added Courses shall be over and above the total credit requirement
prescribed in the curriculum for the award of the degree. One / Two credit courses
shall be offered by a Department of an institution with the prior approval from the
Head of the Institution. The details of the syllabus, time table and faculty may be sent
to the Centre for Academic Courses and the Controller of Examinations after approval
from the Head of the Institution concerned at least one month before the course is
offered. Students can take a maximum of two one credit courses / one two credit
course during the entire duration of the Programme.
4.8 Online Courses
4.8.1 Students may be permitted to credit only one online course of 3 credits with the
approval of Head of the Institution and Centre for Academic Courses.
4.8.2 Students may be permitted to credit one online course (which are provided with
certificate) subject to a maximum of three credits. The approved list of online courses
will be provided by the Centre for Academic courses from time to time. The student
needs to obtain certification or credit to become eligible for writing the End Semester
Examination to be conducted by Controller of Examinations, Anna University. The
details regarding online courses taken up by students should be sent to the Controller
of Examinations, Anna University and Centre for Academic Courses one month before
the commencement of End Semester Examination.
4.9 The students satisfying the following conditions shall be permitted to carry out their
final semester Project work for six months in industry/research organizations.
The student should not have current arrears and shall have CGPA of 7.50 and above.
The student shall undergo the eighth semester courses in the sixth and seventh
semesters. The Head of Department, in consultation with the faculty handling the
said courses shall forward the proposal recommended by the Head of Institution to
the Controller of Examinations through the Director, Centre for Academic courses for
approval at least 4 weeks before the commencement of the sixth semester of the

programme for approval.
4.10 Medium of Instruction
The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar

presentations and project / thesis / dissertation reports except for the programmes
offered in Tamil Medium.
5 DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME
5.1 A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E./ B .Tech. programme in 8

semesters (four academic years) but in any case not more than 14 Semesters for HSC
(or equivalent) candidates and not more than 12 semesters for Lateral Entry
Candidates.
5.1.1 A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. Mechanical Engineering

(Sandwich) Programme in 10 semesters (five academic years) but in any case not more
than 18 Semesters for HSC (or equivalent) candidates.
5.2 Each semester shall normally consist of 75 working days or 540 periods of 50
minutes each. The Head of the Institution shall ensure that every teacher imparts
instruction as per the number of periods specified in the syllabus and that the
teacher teaches the full content of the specified syllabus for the course being taught.
5.3 The Head of the Institution may conduct additional classes for improvement, special
coaching, conduct of model test etc., over and above the specified periods. But for the
purpose of calculation of attendance requirement for writing the end semester
examinations (as per clause 6) by the students, following method shall be used.
Percentage of Attendance
Total no. of periods attended in all the courses per semester
= × 100
(No.of periods/week as prescribed in the curriculum
taken together for all courses of the semester
)x 15
The University Examination will ordinarily follow immediately after the last working
day of the semester commencing from I semester as per the academic schedule
prescribed from time to time.
5.4 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement
of the first semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the
maximum period specified in clause 5.1 irrespective of the period of break of study
(vide clause 18) in order that he/she may be eligible for the award of the degree (vide
clause 16).
6 COURSE REGISTRATION
6.1 The Institution is responsible for registering the courses that each student is
proposing to undergo in the ensuing semester. Each student has to register for all
courses to be undergone in the curriculum of a particular semester (with the facility
to drop courses to a maximum of 6 credits (vide clause 6.2)). The student can also

register for courses for which the student has failed in the earlier semesters.
The registration details of the candidates may be approved by the Head of the
Institution and forwarded to the Controller of Examinations. This registration is for
undergoing the course as well as for writing the End Semester Examinations. No
Elective course shall be offered by any department of any institution unless a
minimum 10 students register for the course. However, if the students admitted in
the associated Branch and Semester is less than 10, this minimum will not be
applicable.
The courses that a student registers in a particular semester may include

i. Courses of the current semester.
ii. The core (Theory/Lab /EEC) courses that the student has not cleared in
the previous semesters.
iii. Elective courses which the student failed (either the same elective or a
different elective instead).
6.2 Flexibility to Drop courses
6.2.1 A student has to earn the total number of credits specified in the curriculum of the
respective Programme of study in order to be eligible to obtain the degree.
6.2.2 From the III to final semesters, the student has the option of dropping existing
courses in a semester during registration. Total number of credits of such courses
cannot exceed 6.
6.2.3 The student shall register for the project work in the final semester only.
7 ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF THE SEMESTER
7.1 A Candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have
satisfied the requirements for completion of a semester.
Ideally every student is expected to attend all classes of all the courses and secure
100% attendance. However, in order to give provision for certain unavoidable reasons
such as Medical / participation in sports, the student is expected to attend atleast
75% of the classes.
Therefore, he/she shall secure not less than 75% (after rounding off to the nearest
integer) of overall attendance as calculated as per clause 5.3.
7.2 However, a candidate who secures overall attendance between 65% and 74% in the
current semester due to medical reasons (prolonged hospitalization / accident /
specific illness) / Participation in Sports events may be permitted to appear for the
current semester examinations subject to the condition that the candidate shall
submit the medical certificate / sports participation certificate attested by the Head of
the Institution. The same shall be forwarded to the Controller of Examinations for
record purposes.
7.3 Candidates who secure less than 65% overall attendance and candidates who do
not satisfy the clause 7.1 and 7.2 shall not be permitted to write the University

examination at the end of the semester and not permitted to move to the next
semester. They are required to repeat the incomplete semester in the next academic
year, as per the norms prescribed.
8. CLASS ADVISOR
There shall be a class advisor for each class. The class advisor will be one among the
(course-instructors) of the class. He / She will be appointed by the HoD of the
department concerned. The class advisor is the ex-officio member and the Convener of
the class committee. The responsibilities for the class advisor shall be:
 To act as the channel of communication between the HoD and the students of
the respective class.
 To collect and maintain various statistical details of students.
 To help the chairperson of the class committee in planning and conduct of the
class committee meetings.
 To monitor the academic performance of the students including attendance
and to inform the class committee.
 To attend to the students’ welfare activities like awards, medals, scholarships
and industrial visits.
9 CLASS COMMITTEE
9.1 Every class shall have a class committee consisting of teachers of the class concerned,
student representatives and a chairperson who is not teaching the class. It is like the
‘Quality Circle’ (more commonly used in industries) with the overall goal of improving
the teaching-learning process. The functions of the class committee include
 Solving problems experienced by students in the class room and in the

laboratories.
 Clarifying the regulations of the degree programme and the details of
rules therein particularly (clause 5 and 7) which should be displayed on
college Notice-Board.
 Informing the student representatives, the academic schedule including the
dates of assessments and the syllabus coverage for each assessment.
 Informing the student representatives the details of Regulations regarding
weightage used for each assessment. In the case of practical courses
(laboratory / drawing / project work / seminar etc.) the breakup of marks for
each experiment / exercise / module of work, should be clearly discussed in
the class committee meeting and informed to the students.
 Analyzing the performance of the students of the class after each test and
finding the ways and means of solving problems, if any.
 Identifying the weak students, if any, and requesting the teachers concerned
to provide some additional help or guidance or coaching to such weak
students.
9.2 The class committee for a class under a particular branch is normally constituted by
the Head of the Department. However, if the students of different branches are mixed

in a class (like the first semester which is generally common to all branches), the
class committee is to be constituted by the Head of the Institution.
9.3 The class committee shall be constituted within the first week of each semester.
9.4 At least 4 student representatives (usually 2 boys and 2 girls) shall be included in the
class committee.
9.5 The Chairperson of the class committee may invite the Class adviser(s) and the Head
of the Department to the class committee meeting.
9.6 The Head of the Institution may participate in any class committee of the institution.
9.7 The chairperson is required to prepare the minutes of every meeting, submit the same
to Head of the Institution within two days of the meeting and arrange to circulate it
among the students and teachers concerned. If there are some points in the minutes
requiring action by the management, the same shall be brought to the notice of the
Management by the Head of the Institution.
9.8 The first meeting of the class committee shall be held within one week from the date
of commencement of the semester, in order to inform the students about the nature
and weightage of assessments within the framework of the Regulations. Two or three
subsequent meetings may be held in a semester at suitable intervals. The Class
Committee Chairman shall put on the Notice Board the cumulative attendance
particulars of each student at the end of every such meeting to enable the
students to know their attendance details to satisfy the clause 6 of this
Regulation. During these meetings the student members representing the entire
class, shall meaningfully interact and express the opinions and suggestions of the
other students of the class in order to improve the effectiveness of the teaching-
learning process.
10 COURSE COMMITTEE FOR COMMON COURSES
Each common theory course offered to more than one discipline or group, shall have a
“Course Committee” comprising all the teachers teaching the common course with
one of them nominated as Course Coordinator. The nomination of the Course
Coordinator shall be made by the Head of the Department / Head of the Institution
depending upon whether all the teachers teaching the common course belong to a
single department or to several departments. The ‘Course committee’ shall meet in
order to arrive at a common scheme of evaluation for the test and shall ensure a
uniform evaluation of the tests. Wherever feasible, the course committee may also
prepare a common question paper for the internal assessment test(s).
11 SYSTEM OF EXAMINATION
11.1 Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) continuous
internal assessment throughout the semester and (ii) University examination at the
end of the semester.
11.2 Each course, both theory and practical (including project work & viva voce

Examinations) shall be evaluated for a maximum of 100 marks.
For all theory and practical courses including project work, the continuous internal
assessment will carry 20 marks while the End - Semester University examination will
carry 80 marks.
11.3 Industrial training and seminar shall carry 100 marks and shall be evaluated through
internal assessment only.
11.4 The University examination (theory and practical) of 3 hours duration shall ordinarily
be conducted between October and December during the odd semesters and between
April and June during the even semesters.
11.5 The University examination for project work shall consist of evaluation of the final
report submitted by the student or students of the project group (of not exceeding 4
students) by an external examiner and an internal examiner, followed by a viva-voce
examination conducted separately for each student by a committee consisting of the
external examiner, the supervisor of the project group and an internal examiner.
11.6 For the University examination in both theory and practical courses including project
work the internal and external examiners shall be appointed by the Controller of
Examinations.
12 PROCEDURE FOR AWARDING MARKS FOR INTERNAL ASSESSMENT
For all theory and practical courses (including project work) the continuous
assessment shall be for a maximum of 20 marks. The above continuous assessment
shall be awarded as per the procedure given below:
12.1 Theory Courses
Three tests each carrying 100 marks shall be conducted during the semester by the
Department / College concerned. The total marks obtained in all tests put together
out of 300, shall be proportionately reduced for 20 marks and rounded to the nearest
integer (This also implies equal weightage to all the three tests).
12.2 Laboratory Courses
The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 20 in case of practical courses.
Every practical exercise / experiment shall be evaluated based on conduct of
experiment / exercise and records maintained. There shall be at least one test. The
criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment marks of 20 is as follows: 75 marks
shall be awarded for successful completion of all the prescribed experiments done in
the Laboratory and 25 marks for the test. The total mark shall be reduced to 20 and
rounded to the nearest integer.
12.3 Theory Courses with Laboratory Component:
If there is a theory course with Laboratory component, there shall be three tests: the
first two tests (each 100 marks) will be from theory portions and the third test
(maximum mark 100) will be for laboratory component. The sum of marks of first two

tests shall be reduced to 60 marks and the third test mark shall be reduced to 40
marks. The sum of these 100 marks may then be arrived at for 20 and rounded to the
nearest integer.
12.4 Project Work:
Project work may be allotted to a single student or to a group of students not

exceeding 4 per group.
The Head of the Institutions shall constitute a review committee for project work for
each branch of study. There shall be three reviews during the semester by the review
committee. The student shall make presentation on the progress made by him / her
before the committee. The total marks obtained in the three reviews shall be reduced
for 20 marks and rounded to the nearest integer (as per the scheme given in 12.4.1).
12.4.1 The project report shall carry a maximum 30 marks. The project report shall be
submitted as per the approved guidelines as given by Director, Academic Courses.
Same mark shall be awarded to every student within the project group for the project
report. The viva-voce examination shall carry 50 marks. Marks are awarded to each
student of the project group based on the individual performance in the viva-voce
examination.
Review Review Review End semester Examinations
Thesis submission
I II III Viva-Voce (50)
(30)
Internal External Internal External Supervisor

5 7.5 7.5
15 15 15 20 15
12.4.2 If a candidate fails to submit the project report on or before the specified deadline,
he/she is deemed to have failed in the Project Work and shall re-register for the same
in a subsequent semester.
12.5 OTHER EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES
(a) The seminar / Case study is to be considered as purely INTERNAL (with 100%
internal marks only). Every student is expected to present a minimum of 2 seminars
per semester before the evaluation committee and for each seminar, marks can be
equally apportioned. The three member committee appointed by Head of the
Institution will evaluate the seminar and at the end of the semester the marks can be
consolidated and taken as the final mark. The evaluation shall be based on the
seminar paper (40%), presentation (40%) and response to the questions asked during
presentation (20%).
(b) The Industrial / Practical Training, Summer Project, Internship, shall carry
100 marks and shall be evaluated through internal assessment only. At the end of
Industrial / Practical training / internship / Summer Project, the candidate shall
submit a certificate from the organization where he / she has undergone training and
a brief report. The evaluation will be made based on this report and a Viva-Voce

Examination, conducted internally by a three member Departmental Committee
constituted by the Head of the Institution. The certificates (issued by the organization)
submitted by the students shall be attached to the mark list sent by the Head of the
Institution to the Controller of Examinations.
12.6 ASSESSMENT FOR VALUE ADDED COURSE
The one / two credit course shall carry 100 marks and shall be evaluated through
continuous assessments only. Two Assessments shall be conducted during the
semester by the Department concerned. The total marks obtained in the tests shall be
reduced to 100 marks and rounded to the nearest integer. A committee consisting of
the Head of the Department, staff handling the course and a senior Faculty member
nominated by the Head of the Institution shall monitor the evaluation process. The list
of students along with the marks and the grades earned may be forwarded to the
Controller of Examinations for appropriate action at least one month before the
commencement of End Semester Examinations.
12.7 ASSESSMENT FOR ONLINE COURSES
Students may be permitted to credit one online course (which are provided with
certificate) subject to a maximum of three credits. The approved list of online courses
will be provided by the Centre for Academic courses from time to time. This online
course of 3 credits can be considered instead of one elective course. The student
needs to obtain certification or credit to become eligible for writing the End Semester
Examination to be conducted by Anna University. The course shall be evaluated
through the End Semester Examination only conducted by Controller of
Examinations, Anna University.
12.8 Internal marks approved by the Head of the Institution shall be displayed by the
respective HODs within 5 days from the last working day.
12.9 Attendance Record
Every teacher is required to maintain an 'ATTENDANCE AND ASSESSMENT

RECORD' which consists of attendance marked in each lecture or practical or project
work class, the test marks and the record of class work (topic covered), separately for
each course. This should be submitted to the Head of the department periodically (at
least three times in a semester) for checking the syllabus coverage and the records of
test marks and attendance. The Head of the department will put his signature and
date after due verification. At the end of the semester, the record should be verified by
the Head of the Institution who will keep this document in safe custody (for five
years). The University or any inspection team appointed by the University may verify
the records of attendance and assessment of both current and previous semesters.
13 REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS
A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for the University Examinations for
all the courses registered in the current semester (vide clause 6) if he/she has
satisfied the semester completion requirements (subject to Clause 7).
A candidate who has already appeared for any subject in a semester and passed the
examination is not entitled to reappear in the same subject for improvement of

grades.
14 PASSING REQUIREMENTS
14.1 A candidate who secures not less than 50% of total marks prescribed for the course
[Internal Assessment + End semester University Examinations] with a minimum of
45% of the marks prescribed for the end-semester University Examination, shall be
declared to have passed the course and acquired the relevant number of credits. This
is applicable for both theory and practical courses (including project work).
14.2 If a student fails to secure a pass in theory courses in the current semester
examination, he/she is allowed to write arrear examinations for the next three
consecutive semesters and their internal marks shall be carried over for the above
mentioned period of three consecutive semesters. If a student fails to secure a pass in
a course even after three consecutive arrear attempts, the student has to redo the
course in the semester in which it is offered along with regular students.
That is, the students should have successfully completed the courses of (n minus 4) th
semester to register for courses in nth semester.
Based on the above, the following prerequisites shall be followed for completing the
degree programme:
i. To enter into Semester V, the student should have no arrear in Semester I.
Failing which the student shall redo the Semester I course/courses along with
the regular students.
ii. To enter into Semester VI, the student should have no arrear in Semester II.
Failing which the student shall redo the Semester II course/courses along
with the regular students.
iii. To enter into Semester VII, the student should have no arrear in Semester III.
Failing which the student shall redo the Semester III course/courses along
iv. To enter into Semester VIII, the student should have no arrear in Semester IV.
Failing which the student shall redo the Semester IV course/courses along
In case, if he/she has not successfully completed all the courses of semester V at the
end of semester VIII, he/she shall redo the Semester V courses along with regular
students. For the subsequent semesters of VI, VII and VIII, the same procedure shall
be followed, subject to the maximum permissible period for this programme.
Note:
 The students who are admitted in 2017-2018 and 2018 – 2019 are permitted
to appear for arrears upto VI semesters and will be allowed to move to VII
semester only on completion of all the courses in the I semester.
In addition the following prerequisites shall be followed for completing the degree
programme.
i. To enter into Semester VII, the student should have no arrear in Semester I.
Failing which the student shall redo the Semester I course/courses along with
the regular students.

ii. To enter into Semester VIII, the student should have no arrear in Semester II.
Failing which the student shall redo the Semester II course/courses along
In case, if he/she has not successfully completed all the courses of semester III at the
end of semester VIII, he/she shall redo the Semester III courses along with regular
students. For the subsequent semesters of IV, V, VI, VII and VIII, the same procedure
shall be followed, subject to the maximum permissible period for this programme.
14.3 If a student fails to secure a pass in a laboratory course, the student shall register
for the course again, when offered next.
14.4 If a student fails to secure a pass in project work, the student shall register for the
course again, when offered next.
14.5 The passing requirement for the courses which are assessed only through purely
internal assessments (EEC courses except project work), is 50% of the internal
assessment (continuous assessment) marks only.
14.6 A student can apply for revaluation of the student’s semester examination answer
paper in a theory course, within 2 weeks from the declaration of results, on payment
of a prescribed fee along with prescribed application to the COE through the Head of
the Institution. The COE will arrange for the revaluation and the results will be
intimated to the student concerned through the Head of the Institution. Revaluation
is not permitted for laboratory course and project work.
15 AWARD OF LETTER GRADES
15.1 All assessments of a course will be evaluated on absolute marks basis. However, for
the purpose of reporting the performance of a candidate, letter grades, each carrying
certain number of points, will be awarded as per the range of total marks (out of 100)
obtained by the candidate in each subject as detailed below:
Letter Grade Grade Points Marks Range

O (Outstanding) 10 91 - 100
A + (Excellent) 9 81 - 90
A (Very Good) 8 71 – 80
B + (Good) 7 61 – 70
B (Average) 6 50 - 60
RA 0 <50
SA (Shortage of Attendance) 0
W 0
A student is deemed to have passed and acquired the corresponding credits in a
particular course if he/she obtains any one of the following grades: “O”, “A+”, “A”,
“B+”,“B”.
‘SA’ denotes shortage of attendance (as per clause 7.3) and hence prevention from
writing the end semester examinations. ‘SA’ will appear only in the result sheet.

“RA” denotes that the student has failed to pass in that course. “W” denotes
withdrawal from the exam for the particular course. The grades RA and W will figure
both in Marks Sheet as well as in Result Sheet). In both cases the student has to earn
Continuous Assessment marks and appear for the End Semester Examinations.
If the grade W is given to course, the attendance requirement need not be satisfied.
If the grade RA is given to a core theory course, the attendance requirement need not
be satisfied, but if the grade RA is given to a Laboratory Course/ Project work /
Seminar and any other EEC course, the attendance requirements (vide clause 7)
should be satisfied.
15.2 For the Co-curricular activities such as National Cadet Corps (NCC)/ National
Service Scheme (NSS) / NSO / YRC, a satisfactory / not satisfactory grading will
appear in the mark sheet. Every student shall put in a minimum of 75% attendance
in the training and attend the camp compulsorily. The training and camp shall be
completed during the first year of the programme. However, for valid reasons, the
Head of the Institution may permit a student to complete this requirement in the
second year. A satisfactory grade in the above co-curricular activities is
compulsory for the award of degree.
15.3 The grades O, A+, A, B+, B obtained for the one credit course shall figure in the Mark
sheet under the title ‘Value Added Courses’. The Courses for which the grades are
RA, SA will not figure in the mark sheet.
Grade sheet
After results are declared, Grade Sheets will be issued to each student which will
contain the following details:
 The college in which the candidate has studied
 The list of courses enrolled during the semester and the grade scored.
 The Grade Point Average (GPA) for the semester and
 The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of all courses enrolled from first
semester onwards.
GPA for a semester is the ratio of the sum of the products of the number of credits for
courses acquired and the corresponding points to the sum of the number of credits
for the courses acquired in the semester.
CGPA will be calculated in a similar manner, considering all the courses registered
from first semester. RA grades will be excluded for calculating GPA and CGPA.
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝐶𝑖 𝐺𝑃𝑖
𝐺𝑃𝐴/𝐶𝐺𝑃𝐴 =
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝐶𝑖
where Ci is the number of Credits assigned to the course
GPi is the point corresponding to the grade obtained for each course
n is number of all courses successfully cleared during the particular semester
in the case of GPA and during all the semesters in the case of CGPA

16 ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE
16.1 A student shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the B.E. / B.Tech. Degree
provided the student has
i. Successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the
curriculum corresponding to the student’s programme within the stipulated
time.
ii. Successfully completed the course requirements, appeared for the End-
Semester examinations and passed all the subjects prescribed in all the 8
semesters / (10 Semesters for B.E. Mechanical Engineering (Sandwich)) within
a maximum period of 7 years (9 years in case of B.E. Mechanical Engineering
(Sandwich) and 6 years in the case of Lateral Entry) reckoned from the
commencement of the first (third in the case of Lateral Entry) semester to
which the candidate was admitted.
iii. Successfully passed any additional courses prescribed by the Director,
Academic Courses whenever readmitted under regulations R-2017 (vide
clause 18.3)
iv. Successfully completed the NCC / NSS / NSO / YRC requirements.
v. No disciplinary action pending against the student.
vi. The award of Degree must have been approved by the Syndicate of the
University.
16.2 CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED
16.2.1 FIRST CLASS WITH DISTINCTION
A student who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First class with Distinction:
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all the eight
semesters (10 Semesters in case of Mechanical (Sandwich) and 6 semesters in
the case of Lateral Entry) in the student’s First Appearance within five years
(Six years in the case of Mechanical (Sandwich) and Four years in the case of
Lateral Entry). Withdrawal from examination (vide Clause 17) will not be
considered as an appearance.
 Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.50.
 One year authorized break of study (if availed of) is included in the five years
(Six years in the case of Mechanical (Sandwich) and four years in the case of
lateral entry) for award of First class with Distinction.
 Should NOT have been prevented from writing end semester examination due
to lack of attendance in any semester.
16.2.2 FIRST CLASS
A student who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First class:
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all eight semesters

(10 Semesters in case of Mechanical (Sandwich) and 6 semesters in the case
of Lateral Entry) within Six years. (Seven years in case of Mechanical
(Sandwich) and Five years in the case of Lateral Entry)
 One year authorized break of study (if availed of) or prevention from writing
the End Semester examination due to lack of attendance (if applicable) is
included in the duration of six years (Seven years in case of Mechanical
(Sandwich) and five years in the case of lateral entry) for award of First class
 Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 7.00.
16.2.3 SECOND CLASS
All other students (not covered in clauses 16.2.1 and 16.2.2) who qualify for the
award of the degree (vide Clause 16.1) shall be declared to have passed the
examination in Second Class.
16.3 A candidate who is absent in end semester examination in a course / project work
after having registered for the same shall be considered to have appeared in that
examination for the purpose of classification. (subject to clause 17 and 18)
16.4 Photocopy / Revaluation
A candidate can apply for photocopy of his/her semester examination answer paper
in a theory course, within 2 weeks from the declaration of results, on payment of a
prescribed fee through proper application to the Controller of Examinations through
the Head of Institutions. The answer script is to be valued and justified by a faculty
member, who handled the subject and recommend for revaluation with breakup of
marks for each question. Based on the recommendation, the candidate can register
for the revaluation through proper application to the Controller of Examinations. The
Controller of Examinations will arrange for the revaluation and the results will be
intimated to the candidate concerned through the Head of the Institutions.
Revaluation is not permitted for practical courses and for project work.
A candidate can apply for revaluation of answer scripts for not exceeding 5 subjects at
a time.
16.5 Review
Candidates not satisfied with Revaluation can apply for Review of his/ her
examination Answer paper in a theory course, within the prescribed date on payment
of a prescribed fee through proper application to Controller of Examination through
the Head of the Institution.
Candidates applying for Revaluation only are eligible to apply for Review.
17 PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM END-SEMESTER EXAMINATION
17.1 A student may, for valid reasons, (medically unfit / unexpected family situations /
sports approved by Chairman, sports board and HOD) be granted permission to
withdraw from appearing for the end semester examination in any course or courses
in ANY ONE of the semester examinations during the entire duration of the degree
programme. The application shall be sent to Director, Student Affairs through the

Head of the Institutions with required documents.
17.2 Withdrawal application is valid if the student is otherwise eligible to write the
examination (Clause 7) and if it is made within TEN days prior to the commencement
of the examination in that course or courses and recommended by the Head of the
Institution and approved by the Controller of Examinations.
17.2.1 Notwithstanding the requirement of mandatory 10 days notice, applications for

withdrawal for special cases under extraordinary conditions will be considered on the
merit of the case.
17.3 In case of withdrawal from a course / courses (Clause 13) the course will figure both
in Marks Sheet as well as in Result Sheet. Withdrawal essentially requires the
student to register for the course/courses The student has to register for the
course, fulfill the attendance requirements (vide clause 7), earn continuous
assessment marks and attend the end semester examination. However, withdrawal
shall not be construed as an appearance for the eligibility of a candidate for First
Class with Distinction.
17.4 Withdrawal is permitted for the end semester examinations in the final semester only
if the period of study the student concerned does not exceed 5 years as per clause
16.2.1.
18 PROVISION FOR AUTHORISED BREAK OF STUDY
18.1 A student is permitted to go on break of study for a maximum period of one year as a
single spell.
18.2 Break of Study shall be granted only once for valid reasons for a maximum of one
year during the entire period of study of the degree programme. However, in
extraordinary situation the candidate may apply for additional break of study not
exceeding another one year by paying prescribed fee for break of study. If a candidate
intends to temporarily discontinue the programme in the middle of the semester for
valid reasons, and to rejoin the programme in a subsequent year, permission may be
granted based on the merits of the case provided he / she applies to the Director,
Student Affairs in advance, but not later than the last date for registering for the end
semester examination of the semester in question, through the Head of the Institution
stating the reasons therefore and the probable date of rejoining the programme.
18.3 The candidates permitted to rejoin the programme after break of study / prevention
due to lack of attendance, shall be governed by the Curriculum and Regulations in
force at the time of rejoining. The students rejoining in new Regulations shall apply to
the Director, Academic Courses in the prescribed format through Head of the
Institution at the beginning of the readmitted semester itself for prescribing additional
courses, if any, from any semester of the regulations in-force, so as to bridge the
curriculum in-force and the old curriculum.
18.4 The authorized break of study would not be counted towards the duration specified
for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification (vide Clause 16.2).

18.5 The total period for completion of the Programme reckoned from, the commencement
of the first semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the
maximum period specified in clause 5.1 irrespective of the period of break of study in
order that he/she may be eligible for the award of the degree.
18.6 If any student is prevented for want of required attendance, the period of prevention
shall not be considered as authorized ‘Break of Study’ (Clause 18.1)
19 DISCIPLINE
19.1 Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behaviour both inside
and outside the college and not to indulge in any activity which will tend to bring
down the prestige of the University / College. The Head of Institution shall constitute
a disciplinary committee consisting of Head of Institution, Two Heads of Department
of which one should be from the faculty of the student, to enquire into acts of
indiscipline and notify the University about the disciplinary action recommended for
approval. In case of any serious disciplinary action which leads to suspension or
dismissal, then a committee shall be constituted including one representative from
Anna University, Chennai. In this regard, the member will be nominated by the
University on getting information from the Head of the Institution.
19.2 If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the University / internal examination he

/ she shall be liable for punitive action as prescribed by the University from time to
time.
20 REVISION OF REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI
The University may from time to time revise, amend or change the Regulations,
Curriculum, Syllabus and scheme of examinations through the Academic Council
with the approval of Syndicate.

CURRICULUM
Sl. Course Page

Course Name Category L T P C No.
No. Code
Semester I
Theory
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 0 0 4 29
2. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I BS 4 0 0 4 31
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 0 0 3 33
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 0 0 3 35
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and Python Programming ES 3 0 0 3 37
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 2 0 4 4 39
Practicals
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and Python Programming ES 0 0 4 2 42
Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BS 0 0 4 2 43
Total 19 0 12 25
Semester II
Theory
9. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 0 0 4 45
10. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics – II BS 4 0 0 4 47
11. PH8253 Physics for Electronics Engineering BS 3 0 0 3 49
12. BE8254 Basic Electrical and Instrumentation ES 3 0 0 3 51
Engineering
13. EC8251 Circuit Analysis PC 4 0 0 4 53
14. EC8252 Electronic Devices PC 3 0 0 3 55
Practicals
15. EC8261 Circuits and Devices Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 57
16. GE8261 Engineering Practices Laboratory ES 0 0 4 2 58
Total 21 0 8 25
Semester III
Theory
17. MA8352 Linear Algebra and Partial Differential BS 4 0 0 4 60
Equations
18. EC8393 Fundamentals of Data Structures in C ES 3 0 0 3 62
19. EC8351 Electronic Circuits- I PC 3 0 0 3 64
20. EC8352 Signals and Systems PC 4 0 0 4 66
21. EC8392 Digital Electronics PC 3 0 0 3 68

22. EC8391 Control Systems Engineering PC 3 0 0 3 70
Practicals
23. EC8381 Fundamentals of Data Structures in C ES 0 0 4 2 72
Laboratory
24. EC8361 Analog and Digital Circuits Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 73
25. HS8381 Interpersonal Skills/Listening & Speaking EES 0 0 2 1 74
Total 20 0 10 25
Semester IV
Theory
26. MA8451 Probability and Random Processes BS 4 0 0 4 76
27. EC8452 Electronic Circuits II PC 3 0 0 3 78
28. EC8491 Communication Theory PC 3 0 0 3 80
29. EC8451 Electromagnetic Fields PC 4 0 0 4 82
30. EC8453 Linear Integrated Circuits PC 3 0 0 3 84
31. GE8291 Environmental Science and Engineering HS 3 0 0 3 86
Practicals
32. EC8461 Circuits Design and Simulation Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 89
33. EC8462 Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 90
Total 20 0 8 24
Semester V
Theory
34. EC8501 Digital Communication PC 3 0 0 3 91
35. EC8553 Discrete-Time Signal Processing PC 4 0 0 4 93
36. EC8552 Computer Architecture and Organization PC 3 0 0 3 95
37. EC8551 Communication Networks PC 3 0 0 3 97
38. Professional Elective I PE 3 0 0 3 *
39. Open Elective I OE 3 0 0 3 **
Practicals
40. EC8562 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 99
41. EC8563 Communication Networks Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 100
42. EC8561 Communication Systems Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 101
Total 19 0 12 25
Semester VI
Theory
43. EC8691 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers PC 3 0 0 3 102
44. EC8095 VLSI Design PC 3 0 0 3 104
45. EC8652 Wireless Communication PC 3 0 0 3 106

46. MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 0 0 3 108
47. EC8651 Transmission Lines and RF Systems PC 3 0 0 3 110
48. Professional Elective –II PE 3 0 0 3 *
Practicals
49. EC8681 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers PC 0 0 4 2 112
Laboratory
50. EC8661 VLSI Design Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 113
51. EC8611 Technical Seminar EEC 0 0 2 1 115
52. HS8581 Professional Communication EEC 0 0 2 1 116
Total 18 0 12 24
Semester VII
Theory
53. EC8701 Antennas and Microwave Engineering PC 3 0 0 3 118
54. EC8751 Optical Communication PC 3 0 0 3 120
55. EC8791 Embedded and Real Time Systems PC 3 0 0 3 122
56. EC8702 Ad hoc and Wireless Sensor Networks PC 3 0 0 3 124
57. Professional Elective –III PE 3 0 0 3 *
58. Open Elective – II OE 3 0 0 3 **
Practicals
59. EC8711 Embedded Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 126
60. EC8761 Advanced Communication Laboratory PC 0 0 4 2 127
Total 18 0 8 22
Semester VIII
Theory
61. Professional Elective IV PE 3 0 0 3 *
62. Professional Elective V PE 3 0 0 3 *
Practicals
63. EC8811 Project Work EEC 0 0 20 10 128
Total 6 0 20 16
List of Professional Elective Courses
Professional Elective I
64. CS8392 Object Oriented Programming PE 3 0 0 3 131
65. EC8073 Medical Electronics PE 3 0 0 3 132
66. CS8493 Operating Systems PE 3 0 0 3 133
67. EC8074 Robotics and Automation PE 3 0 0 3 134
68. EC8075 Nano Technology and Applications PE 3 0 0 3 136
69. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 0 0 3 137

70. GE8077 Total Quality Management PE 3 0 0 3 138
Professional Elective II
71. CS8792 Cryptography and Network Security PE 3 0 0 3 139
72. EC8091 Advanced Digital Signal Processing PE 3 0 0 3 140
73. EC8001 MEMS and NEMS PE 3 0 0 3 141
74. EC8002 Multimedia Compression and PE 3 0 0 3 142
Communication
75. EC8003 CMOS Analog IC Design PE 3 0 0 3 143
76. EC8004 Wireless Networks PE 3 0 0 3 144
77. GE8075 Intellectual Property Rights PE 3 0 0 3 145
Professional Elective III`
78. EC8092 Advanced Wireless Communication PE 3 0 0 3 146
79. EC8071 Cognitive Radio PE 3 0 0 3 147
80. GE8072 Foundation Skills in Integrated Product PE 3 0 0 3 148
Development
81. CS8082 Machine Learning Techniques PE 3 0 0 3 150
82. EC8005 Electronics Packaging and Testing PE 3 0 0 3 151
83. EC8006 Mixed Signal IC Design PE 3 0 0 3 152
84. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 0 0 3 153
Professional Elective IV
85. EC8072 Electro Magnetic Interference and PE 3 0 0 3 155
Compatibility
86. EC8007 Low power SoC Design PE 3 0 0 3 156
87. EC8008 Photonic Networks PE 3 0 0 3 157
88. EC8009 Compressive Sensing PE 3 0 0 3 158
89. EC8093 Digital Image Processing PE 3 0 0 3 159
90. GE8076 Professional Ethics in Engineering PE 3 0 0 3 160
Professional Elective V
91. EC8010 Video Analytics PE 3 0 0 3 162
92. EC8011 DSP Architecture and Programming PE 3 0 0 3 163
93. EC8094 Satellite Communication PE 3 0 0 3 164
94. CS8086 Soft Computing PE 3 0 0 3 165
95. IT8006 Principles of Speech Processing PE 3 0 0 3 166
96. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nano Science PE 3 0 0 3 167
List of Open Elective Courses
Open Elective I
97. OCE551 Air Pollution and Control Engineering OE 3 0 0 3 171

98. OMD551 Basic of Biomedical Instrumentation OE 3 0 0 3 172
99. OBM551 Bio Chemistry OE 3 0 0 3 173
100. OIT552 Cloud Computing OE 3 0 0 3 174
101. OIT551 Database Management Systems OE 3 0 0 3 175
102. OTL552 Digital Audio Engineering OE 3 0 0 3 176
103. OME551 Energy Conservation and Management OE 3 0 0 3 177
104. OBT553 Fundamentals of Nutrition OE 3 0 0 3 178
105. OCE552 Geographic Information System OE 3 0 0 3 180
106. OPY551 Herbal Technology OE 3 0 0 3 181
107. OMD552 Hospital Waste Management OE 3 0 0 3 182
108. OCH551 Industrial Nanotechnology OE 3 0 0 3 183
109. OBT551 Introduction to Bioenergy and Biofuels OE 3 0 0 3 184
110. OEI551 Logic and Distributed Control Systems OE 3 0 0 3 185
111. OBM552 Medical Physics OE 3 0 0 3 186
112. OML552 Microscopy OE 3 0 0 3 187
113. OEI552 SCADA System and Applications OE 3 0 0 3 189
Management
114. OBT554 Principles of Food Preservation OE 3 0 0 3 190
115. OMF551 Product Design and Development OE 3 0 0 3 191
116. ORO551 Renewable Energy Sources OE 3 0 0 3 192
117. OCS551 Software Engineering OE 3 0 0 3 193
118. OTL551 Space Time Wireless Communication OE 3 0 0 3 194
119. OTL553 Telecommunication Network Management OE 3 0 0 3 195
120. OMD553 Telehealth Technology OE 3 0 0 3 196
121. OTL554 Wavelets and its Applications OE 3 0 0 3 197
122. OIM551 World Class Manufacturing OE 3 0 0 3 198
Open Elective II
123. OAI751 Agricultural Finance, Banking and Co- OE 3 0 0 3 199
operation
124. OBM751 Basics of Human Anatomy and Physiology OE 3 0 0 3 201
125. OGI751 Climate Change and its Impact OE 3 0 0 3 202
126. OPY751 Clinical Trials OE 3 0 0 3 203
127. OCS751 Data Structures and Algorithms OE 3 0 0 3 204
128. OME751 Design of Experiments OE 3 0 0 3 205
129. OCH752 Energy Technology OE 3 0 0 3 206
130. OCE751 Environmental and Social Impact OE 3 0 0 3 207
Assessment

131. OGI752 Fundamentals of Planetary Remote OE 3 0 0 3 208
Sensing
132. OEN751 Green Building Design OE 3 0 0 3 210
133. OBM752 Hospital Management OE 3 0 0 3 210
134. OME754 Industrial Safety OE 3 0 0 3 211
135. OCS752 Introduction to C Programming OE 3 0 0 3 212
136. OBT753 Introduction of Cell Biology OE 3 0 0 3 214
137. OMF751 Lean Six Sigma OE 3 0 0 3 214
138. OAN751 Low Cost Automation OE 3 0 0 3 215
139. OBT752 Microbiology OE 3 0 0 3 216
140. OMV751 Marine Vehicles OE 3 0 0 3 217
141. OAE752 Principles of Flight Mechanics OE 3 0 0 3 218
142. OIE751 Robotics OE 3 0 0 3 219
143. OME752 Supply Chain Management OE 3 0 0 3 221
144. OME753 Systems Engineering OE 3 0 0 3 221
145. OTL751 Telecommunication System Modeling and OE 3 0 0 3 222
Simulation
146. OML751 Testing of Materials OE 3 0 0 3 223
147. OIC751 Transducer Engineering OE 3 0 0 3 224
148. OCY751 Waste Water Treatment OE 3 0 0 3 225
Note:
* The detailed syllabi for Professional Electives are provided from page 128
** The detailed syllabi for Open Electives are provided from page 165
Total Contact Periods=L+T+P

Summary:
S.No. Subject Area No. of Courses Total Credits Percentage

1 Humanities and Social 4 14 7.56 %
Sciences (HS)
2 Basic Sciences (BS) 8 27 14.6 %
3 Engineering Sciences (ES) 7 19 10.27 %
4 Professional Core (PC) 33 92 50 %
5 Professional Electives (PE) 33 (5) 15 8.10 %
6 Open Electives (OE) 52 (2) 6 3.24 %
7 Employability Enhancement 3 13 6.48 %
Courses (EES)
Total Credits 186
Credits Distribution:
Credits Distribution
3% 8%
HS
6% BS
8% 15% ES
PC
10%
PE
OE
50%
EEC

Detailed Syllabi
With
CO-PO/PSO Mapping
HS8151 Communicative English LTPC4004
Course Objectives
 To enable the students to listen and understand speeches in English

 To facilitate the acquisition of speaking skills in real life contexts
 To provide activities to enrich their vocabulary
 To reinforce through practice the importance of reading and writing skills for engineers
UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY & FRIENDS 12

Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting-
Writing- completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and
informal conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information-
Language development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of
speech. Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- countable/ uncountable nouns.
UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12

Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives
and descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short
Listening texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing,
short narrative descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening-
telephonic conversations. Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking
leave- Language development – prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing
meanings of words in context.
UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12

Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure-
use of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening –
listening to longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different
sources. Speaking- asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language
development- degrees of comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary
development – single word substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12

Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines
Writing- letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email-
Listening- listening to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them.
Speaking- speaking about oneself- speaking about one‘s friend- Language development-
Tenses- simple present-simple past- present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary
development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal verbs
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12

Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing
an outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to
talks- conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-
Language development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-
collocations- fixed and semi-fixed expressions
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will be able to:
Deploy grammatical and vocabulary elements appropriately in
CO1 Understanding
writing short paragraphs and essays

Interpret content from a variety of texts to gain deeper
CO2 Understanding
understanding by using context clues
Present with clarity and precision essays, personal letters and Understanding
CO3
emails
CO4 Express briefly and precisely ideas and opinions in writing Applying
Text Books:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Course book for Undergraduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient Black Swan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.
References:
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York: Rutledge,
2011.
2. Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning ,USA: 2007
3. Redston, Chris & Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student‘s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4. Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills for Business
English. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5. Dutt P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan Geeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books:
2013
Correlation of Course Outcome (CO) with Program Outcomes (PO):
CO/
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
PO
CO1 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 -- 3 -- --
CO2 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 -- 3 -- --
CO3 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 -- 3 -- --
CO4 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 -- 3 -- --
CO -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 -- 3 -- --
1: Low 2: Medium 3: High

MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I LTPC 4004
Course Objectives:
 To achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of traditional

calculus.
 To provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the purpose of modelling the
engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many
branches of engineering.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals
and their usage.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation
rules -Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative –
Change of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series
for functions of two variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s
method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by
parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by
partial fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals.
UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of
parameters– Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous
linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Differentiate functions using the limit and continuity concepts and find
CO1 Applying
extreme values for functions of single variable.
Calculate the derivatives of functions of two variables and determine

CO2 Applying
extreme values.
Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution,
CO3 Applying
partial fractions and integration by parts.

Compute multiple integrals, area between curves and volume enclosed by
CO4 Applying
surfaces.
Solve second and higher order differential equations (upto fourth order
CO5 Applying
with constant coefficients).
Text Books:
1. Grewal B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 rd

Edition, 2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7 th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems
only), 2.8 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net
change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8].
References:
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.

2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II, S.
Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press,
2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO5 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2

PH8151 Engineering Physics LTPC3003
Course Objectives
 To be able to identify and analyze concepts involved in the mechanical and thermal
properties of materials.
 To acquire skills allowing the student to identify different oscillatory motion and the
knowledge about lasers, fiber optics and their applications.
 To acquaint the student with the knowledge of physics governing the behavior of
electrons and their relevance in the development of various electron microscopes.
 To introduce basic concepts of solid state physics that determine the properties of
materials
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9

Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses – factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile
strength – torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple – torsion pendulum: theory and
experiment – bending of beams – bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment –
uniform and non-uniform bending: theory and experiment – I-shaped girders – stress due to
bending in beams.
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9

Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution –
plane progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers: population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and
B coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor
lasers: homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and
acceptance angle – types of optical fibers (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated
with optical fibers – fibre optic sensors: pressure and displacement.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints – bimetallic
strips – thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal
conductivity – Forbe’s and Lee’s disc method: theory and experiment – conduction through
compound media (series and parallel – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers,
refrigerators, ovens and solar water heaters.
UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9

Black body radiation – Plank’s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its
physical significance – Schrodinger’s wave equation – time independent and time dependent
equations – particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunneling (qualitative) – scanning
tunneling microscope.
UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9

Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal
systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar
distances – coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond
structures – crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults –
role of imperfections in plastic deformation – growth of single crystals: solution and melt
growth techniques.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
CO1 Compare the elastic properties of different materials. Understanding
CO2 Explain the principles of LASER and fiber optic communication. Understanding
Explain the thermal properties of solids and its engineering
CO3 Understanding
applications.
Describe the behavior of electrons in electron microscope with the
CO4 Understanding
concepts of quantum physics.
Relate the crystal structure to electrical, mechanical and optical
CO5 Understanding
properties of materials.
Text Books:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”, Oxford University Press,

2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. – “Engineering Physics”, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. – “Engineering Physics”, Cengage Learning India, 2012.
References:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.

2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”, Cengage Learing,
2010.
3. Tippler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics”,
W.H. Freeman, 2007.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2
CO3 2 1 -- -- -- 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- 2 --
CO5 2 1 -- -- -- 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- 2 --
CO 2 1 -- -- -- 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- 2 2

CY8151 Engineering Chemistry LTPC3003
Course Objectives
• To impart the basic knowledge about water quality, water treatment process and
application of water treatment processes for domestic and industrial use.
• To understand the adsorption process and its use in pollution control.
• To study the fundamentals of phase rule and the preparation of different types of alloys
and its use in different fields
• To imbibe the basic knowledge of fuels and assess its quality using different methods
• To categorize the different energy resources and their uses
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water
– Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external
treatment – Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse
Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9

Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from
solutions – adsorption isotherms – Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption
isotherm – contact theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir -
applications of adsorption on pollution abatement.
Catalysis:Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria – autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and
catalytic promoters - acid base catalysis – applications (catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis–
Michaelis – Menten equation.
UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9

Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and
effect of alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase
rule: Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system -
reduced phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-
silver system - Pattinson process.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum -
manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil -
cetane number - natural gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG)
- power alcohol and biodiesel. Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and
lower calorific values- theoretical calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature -
spontaneous ignition temperature - explosive range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear
fission and fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant -
breeder reactor - solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and
supercapacitors: Types of batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid
battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cell, methanol oxygen fuel cell, SOFC and
supercapacitors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course students will be able to :
Describe the hardness of water samples and the various water

CO1 Understanding
treatment processes
CO2 Explain the different adsorption isotherms and catalysis Understanding
Illustrate the phase diagrams, alloys and the heat treatment
CO3 Understanding
processes
Distinguish the types of fuels and describe the manufacturing of
CO4 Understanding
synthetic fuels
Discuss the different renewable energy resources and the energy
CO5 Understanding
storage devices
Text Books:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand &
Company LTD, New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company
(P) LTD, New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India PVT,
LTD, New Delhi, 2013.
References:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi,
2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, 2015.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO3 2 1 - -- -- -- - -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO5 2 1 -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 2 --
CO 2 1 -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 2 --

GE8151 Problem Solving and Python Programming LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the basics of flowchart, algorithm and programming
 To expose appropriate constructs and data structure of the Python programming
language to solve the given problem.
 To impart the knowledge of code reusability by employing modular programming
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation
(pseudo code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple
strategies for developing algorithms (iteration, recursion) . Illustrative problems: find minimum
in a list, insert a card in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of
Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9

Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments;
modules and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and
arguments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of
n variables, distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions:
return values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings:
string slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays.
Illustrative programs: square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear
search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9

Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort,
insertion sort, merge sort, histogram.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line
arguments, errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative
programs: word count, copy file.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Explain the usage of basic programming constructs with suitable

CO1 Understanding
examples.
CO2 Design the algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems. Applying
Develop Python programs using conditional, loops and data
CO3 Applying
structures.

Create functions, modules and packages for real time programming
CO4 Applying
problems and demonstrate the concept of code reusability.
Demonstrate python applications which reads, writes and processes
CO5 Applying
python files.
Text Books:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016
(http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and
updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
References:
1. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational

Problem-Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
2. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised
and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
3. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning,
2012.
4. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An
Introduction to Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic
Programmers,LLC,2013.
5. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-disciplinary Approach”, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd.,
2016.
6. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,,
2015
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 - - 2 - - 1 - - - - - -
CO2 3 2 - 1 3 - - 2 - 2 - 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 - 1 3 - - 2 2 2 - 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 - 1 3 - - 2 2 2 - 3 2 2
CO5 3 2 - 1 3 - - 2 2 2 - 3 2 2
CO 2.8 1.8 1 2.8 1.8 2 2 2.75 2 2

GE8152 Engineering Graphics LTPC2044
Course Objectives:
 To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design
of engineering products.
 To expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS

conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction
of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid –
construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above
curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of
Three Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from
pictorial views of objects
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12

Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by
rotating object method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES

5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the
one of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders
and cones.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in
simple vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and
cylinders by visual ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
Prepare orthographic views of typical components from pictorial
CO1 Applying
drawings

CO2 Draw the orthographic projections of points, lines, planes and solids Applying
Draw the orthographic projections of sectioned solids and true shape of
CO3 Applying
the sections
CO4 Develop lateral surfaces of the cut solids and solids with holes Applying
Visualise and draw the isometric and perspective projections of the
CO5 Applying
simple solids, cut solids and combination of the solids
Construct conic sections like ellipse, parabola & hyperbola and special
CO6 Applying
curves like cycloid, epicycloid, hypocycloid and involute
Text Books:
1. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers,

Chennai, 2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.
References:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
50th Edition, 2010.
2. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores,
Bangalore, 2007.
4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production”, Eastern
Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
5. N S Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press,
New Delhi, 2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- --
CO2 3 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- --
CO3 3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- --
CO4 3 2 1 1 -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- --
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- --
CO6 3 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- --
CO 3 2 1 1 -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- --

GE8161 Problem Solving and Python Programming Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
 Demonstrate the use of basic Python Programming constructs and Data structures.
 Present an overview of debugging and validating the programs written in Python.
List of Programs:
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton‘s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
7. Merge sort
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
Course Outcomes:
Develop, implement and validate the python programs using
CO1 Applying
various constructs, modules and packages.
CO2 Develop, Implement and validate gaming programs using Pygame. Applying
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 2 1 3 1 - 1 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 3 1 - 1 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 1 3 1 - 1 2 1 1 2 2 2

BS8161 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
 To understand the fundamentals of interference and diffraction.
 To demonstrate the principles of elasticity and thermal properties for engineering
applications.
 To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
 To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometry.
List of Experiments: (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum

2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method
(a) Determination of wavelength and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber
3. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method
4. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic
interferometer
5. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
6. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
7. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
List of Experiments (Any SEVEN Experiments)
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity

in water sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.
16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:

Determine the thickness of thin samples, wavelength of the
CO1 prominent colors of the mercury spectrum and velocity of Applying
ultrasonic waves

Determine the Young’s modulus of the material and thermal
CO2 Applying
conductivity of poor conductor
Demonstrate the measurement of water quality parameters in the
CO3 Applying
given water sample
CO4 Evaluate the acidity/ basicity content in the given water sample Applying
Estimate the metal ion content in different water samples in order
CO5 Applying
to assess the potability of water
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 2 2 -- 2 1 --
CO2 3 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 2 2 -- 2 2 --
CO3 3 2 -- -- -- 3 -- 3 2 2 -- 2 -- --
CO4 3 2 -- -- -- 3 -- 3 2 2 -- 2 -- --
CO5 3 2 -- -- -- 3 -- 3 2 2 -- 2 -- --
CO 3 2 -- -- -- 3 -- 3 2 2 -- 2 1.5 --

HS8251 Technical English LTPC4004
Course Objectives:
 Deploy the required strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and
comprehend engineering and technology texts.
 Assist students to write effective letters of applications and reports.
 Develop their speaking skills which would help them to express their ideas, views and
opinions in varied formal and informal contexts.
 Enhance their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in
their areas of specialisation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12

Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing
information-gap exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short
technical texts from journals- newspapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions
– issue- writing instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical
vocabulary-Language Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12

Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking
– describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various
transitions in a text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting charts, graphs- Vocabulary
Development - vocabulary used in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development
impersonal passive voice, numerical adjectives.
UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12

Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talks on engineering/technology – Speaking -
introduction to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical,
practice in speed reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary
Development-sequence words - Misspelled words. Language Development-embedded sentences.
UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12

Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of
presentations- Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job
application – cover letter –Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and
issue based essays--Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-.
Language Development- clauses- if conditionals.
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12

Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and
survey-Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Read and comprehend passages on different topics Understanding
Deploy grammatical and vocabulary elements appropriately and Understanding

CO2
effectively

CO3 Prepare reports, job application, resumes, articles and formal letters Applying
Explain various manufacturing processes, and interpret charts and Understanding

CO4
graphs
Demonstrate good conversational skills and participate in group Applying

CO5
discussions
Text Books:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology.
Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
3. University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
References:
1. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.

2. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
3. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
4. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For
Colleges.Cengage Learning, USA: 2007
5. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles and
Practice. Oxford University Press: New Delhi, 2014.
6. Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for supplementary reading.
CO/
PO
CO1 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 2 -- 3 -- --
CO2 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 2 -- 3 -- --
CO3 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 -- 3 -- --
CO4 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 3 -- 3 -- --
CO5 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 3 -- 3 -- --
CO -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 2.6 -- 3 -- --

MA8251 Engineering Mathematics – II LTPC4004
Course Objectives:
 To acquaint the student with the concepts of Vector Calculus and Laplace Transforms
needed for solving problems that occur in all engineering disciplines.
 To introduce the concept of eigenvalues, eigenvectors and their applications.
 To impart the knowledge on analytic function, complex integration and their
applications.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices –
Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of
quadratic forms.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface - Volume integral - Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12

Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function – Conformal
mapping – Mapping by functions w=z+c, cz, 1/z, z2, - Bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12

Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s
series– Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for
evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12

Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function
and unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives
and integrals –Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem –
Transform of periodic functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary
differential equations with constant coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Reduce quadratic form into canonical form by orthogonal transformation. Applying
Compute integrals using Green’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem and Gauss

CO2 Applying
divergence theorem.
Construct analytic functions and describe conformal mappings for various
CO3 Applying
regions in complex plane.

CO4 Calculate real integrals using complex integral theorems. Applying
Solve ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients using

CO5 Applying
Laplace transforms.
Text Books:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd
Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley and Sons, 10 th
Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
References:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”‖,

Firewall Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition,
2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O‘Neil,P.V., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New
Delhi, 2007.
4. Sastry,S.S, “Engineering Mathematics”, Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 4th Edition,
New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw
Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3
CO3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO5 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 3 3
CO 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 3 2.4

PH8253 Physics For Electronics Engineering LTPC4004
Course Objectives
 To impart the electron transport properties in metals and semiconductors to identify
their specific applications.
 To become proficient in magnetic and dielectric properties of materials and applications
of these properties in modern electronic devices.
 To acquaint the student with the optical properties of semiconductors to understand
working of various electro optical devices.
 To introduce the basic concepts of nano structures and their applications in nano
devices and spintronics
UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classical free electron theory – Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression – Wiedemann – Franz law – Success and failures – electrons in metals – Particle in a
three dimensional box – degenerate states – Fermi – Dirac statistics – Density of energy states –
Electron in periodic potential: Bloch theorem – metals and insulators – Energy bands in solids -
tight binding approximation – Electron effective mass – concept of hole.
UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9

Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect semiconductors –
Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors – Carrier
concentration in N – type & P – type semiconductors – Carrier transport: Velocity – electric field
relations – drift and diffusion transport – Einstein’s relation – Hall effect and devices – Zener
and avalanche breakdown in p-n junctions – Ohmic contacts – tunnel diode – Schotttky diode –
MOS capacitor – power transistor.
UNIT III MAGNETIC AND DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Magnetism in materials – magnetic field and induction – magnetization – magnetic permeability
and susceptibility – types of magnetic materials – microscopic classification of magnetic
materials – Ferromagnetism: origin and exchange interaction – saturation magnetization and
Curie temperature – Domain Theory. Dielectric materials: Polarization processes – dielectric
loss – internal field – Clausius – Mosotti relation – dielectric breakdown – high-k dielectrics.
UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes –
Absorption emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and Semiconductors (concepts
only) – photo current in a P – N diode – solar cell – photo detectors – LED – Organic LED –
Laser diodes – excitons – quantum confined Stark effect – quantum dot laser.
UNIT V NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9

Introduction – electron density in bulk material – Size dependence of Fermi energy – quantum
confinement – quantum structures – Density of states in quantum well, quantum wire and
quantum dot structures – Zener – Bloch oscillations – resonant tunneling – quantum
interference effects – mesoscopic structures: conductance fluctuations and coherent transport
– Coulomb blockade effects – Single electron phenomena and Single electron Transistor –
magnetic semiconductors – spintronics – Carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Describe the origin of electrical and thermal properties in metal
CO1 Understanding
and semiconductors based on density of states and Fermi energy.

Explain the basics of semiconductor physics and its applications
CO2 Understanding
in semiconducting devices.
Elaborate the magnetic and dielectric properties of materials and
CO3 Understanding
their applications.
Describe the function of optical materials for opto electronic
CO4 Understanding
devices.
Explain the nanostructures and their properties in nano electronic
CO5 Understanding
devices and spintronics.
Text Books:
1. Kasap, S.O. “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, McGraw Education, 2007.
2. Umesh K Mishra & Jasprit Singh, “Semiconductor Device Physics and Design”,
Springer, 2008.
3. Wahab, M.A. “Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials”, Narosa
Publishing House, 2009.
References:
1. Gracia, N. & Damsk, A. “Physics for Computer Science Students”, Springer-Verlag,

2012.
2. Hanson, G.W. “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Rogers, B., Adams, J. & Pennathur, S. “Nanotechnology: Understanding Small
Systems”, CRC Press, 2014.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3 --
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3 --
CO3 2 1 -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3 --
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- 1 1 -- -- -- -- 3 3 3
CO5 2 1 -- -- -- 1 1 -- -- -- -- 3 3 --
CO 2 1 -- -- -- 1.6 1.6 -- -- -- -- 3 3 3

BE8254 Basic Electrical and Instrumentation Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives
• To impart knowledge on three-phase power supply circuits and power measurement.

• To introduce the basic structure of power system, concepts of generation, transmission,
distribution and protection of power system
• To introduce the concept of various tariffs on energy consumption and power factor
improvement
• To introduce the construction and working principle of static and rotating electrical
machines
• To describe the type and characteristics of measuring instruments, and application of
transducers in instrumentation
UNIT I AC CIRCUITS AND POWER SYSTEMS 9

Three phase power supply – Star connection – Delta connection – Balanced and Unbalanced
Loads- Power equation – Star Delta Conversion – Three Phase Power Measurement -
Transmission & Distribution of electrical energy – Over head Vs Underground system –
Protection of power system – types of tariff – power factor improvement
UNIT II TRANSFORMER 9
Introduction - Ideal Transformer – Accounting For Finite Permeability And Core Loss – Circuit
Model Of Transformer – Per Unit System – Determination Of Parameters Of Circuit Model Of
Transformer – Voltage Regulation – Name Plate Rating – Efficiency – Three Phase Transformers
- Auto Transformers
UNIT III DC MACHINES 9

Introduction – Constructional Features– Motoring and generation principle - Emf And Torque
equation – Circuit Model – Methods of Excitation and magnetisation characteristics – Starting
and Speed Control – Universal Motor
UNIT IV AC MACHINES 9
Principle of operation of three-phase induction motors – Construction –Types – Equivalent
circuit, Single phase Induction motors -Construction– Types–starting and speed control
methods. Alternator- working principle–Equation of induced EMF – Voltage regulation,
Synchronous motors- working principle-starting methods -– Torque equation – Stepper Motors
– Brushless DC Motors
UNIT V MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION 9

Type of Electrical and electronic instruments – Classification- Types of indicating Instruments –
Principles of Electrical Instruments –Multimeters, Oscilloscopes- Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Measurement – Errors in Measurement – Transducers - Classification of
Transducers: Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive, Thermoelectric, piezoelectric, photoelectric, Hall
effect and Mechanical
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course the students will be able to:
CO1 Explain the structure of power systems Understanding
Describe the construction, working principle and characteristics of
CO2 Understanding
rotating electrical machines
Solve problems in three-phase electric circuits, power
CO3 Applying
measurement, tariff, and power factor improvement

CO4 Solve numerical problems in rotating electrical machines Applying
Develop the circuit model of transformer and compute the
CO5 Applying
performance parameters
Choose appropriate instrument for an application based on the
CO6 performance characteristics of measuring instruments and Applying
transducers.
Text Books:
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, McGraw
Hill Education(India) Private Limited, Third Reprint ,2016
2. Giorgio Rizzoni, “Principles and Applications of Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited, 2010
3. S.K.Bhattacharya “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Pearson India, 2011
References:
1. Del Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Leonard S Bobrow, “Foundations of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press,
2013
3. Rajendra Prasad, “Fundamentals of Electrical engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
4. Mittle N., “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 24th reprint 2016
5. A.E.Fitzgerald, David E Higginbotham and Arvin Grabel, “Basic Electrical Engineering”,
McGraw Hill Education(India) Private Limited, 2009
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 2 1 1
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 2 1 --
CO3 3 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 --
CO4 3 2 1 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 1 --
CO5 3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 1
CO6 3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 1
CO 2.67 1.67 1 1 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 1.67 1.17 1

EC8251 Circuit Analysis LTPC3104
Course Objectives:
• To impart the basic concepts required for analysis of DC/AC electric circuits and for
solving circuits using network topologies.
• To develop the ability to apply network theorems for solving AC and DC circuits
• To introduce the concept of resonance and its application to coupled circuits and to
provide the required knowledge to obtain transient response for RL, RC and RLC
circuits.
• To develop the capability to represent a two port network using different two port
network parameters.
UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS AND NETWORK TOPOLOGY 12
Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s laws – Mesh current and node voltage method of analysis for D.C and
A.C. circuits - Network terminology - Graph of a network - Incidence and reduced incidence
matrices– Trees –Cutsets - Fundamental cutsets - Cutset matrix – Tie sets - Link currents and
Tie set schedules -Twig voltages and Cutset schedules, Duality and dual networks.
UNIT II NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS 12

Network theorems -Superposition theorem, Thevenin’s theorem, Norton’s theorem, Reciprocity
theorem, Millman’s theorem, and Maximum power transfer theorem, application of Network
theorems- Network reduction: voltage and current division, source transformation – star delta
conversion.
UNIT III RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 12

Resonance - Series resonance - Parallel resonance - Variation of impedance with frequency –
Variation in current through and voltage across L and C with frequency – Bandwidth - Q factor
-Selectivity. Self inductance - Mutual inductance - Dot rule - Coefficient of coupling - Analysis
of multiwinding coupled circuits - Series, Parallel connection of coupled inductors - Single
tuned and double tuned coupled circuits.
UNIT IV TRANSIENT ANALYSIS 12

Natural response-Forced response - Transient response of RC, RL and RLC circuits to
excitation by Step Signal, Impulse Signal and exponential sources - Complete response of RC,
RL and RLC Circuits to sinusoidal excitation.
UNIT V TWO PORT NETWORKS 12

Two port networks, Z parameters, Y parameters, Transmission (ABCD) parameters, Hybrid (H)
Parameters, Interconnection of two port networks, Symmetrical properties of T and π networks.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Calculate the incidence, Tie-set and Cut-set matrices for network

CO1 Applying
graphs.
Apply the basic circuital laws, series and parallel equivalent
CO2 Applying
concepts to find the response of DC and AC electric circuits.
Determine the response of DC and AC circuits using relevant
CO3 Applying
theorems

Determine the two port network characteristics using two port
CO4 Applying
network parameters.
Apply basic circuit laws and dot conventions to compute the
CO5 Applying
response of coupled circuits and tuned circuits.
Analyze the transient behavior of first and second order circuits
CO6 Analyzing
and the resonance behavior of series and parallel RLC circuits.
Text Books:
1. William H. Hayt, Jr. Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit
Analysis”, McGraw Hill Science Engineering, Eighth Edition, 11th Reprint 2016.
2. Joseph Edminister and Mahmood Nahvi, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’s Outline Series,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, Fifth Edition Reprint 2016.
References:
1. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Fifth

Edition,McGraw Hill, 9th Reprint 2015.
2. A.Bruce Carlson, “Cicuits: Engineering Concepts and Analysis of Linear Electric
Circuits”, Cengage Learning, India Edition 2nd Indian Reprint 2009.
3. Allan H.Robbins, Wilhelm C.Miller, “Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice”, Cengage
Learning,FifthEdition, 1st Reprint 2013.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO4 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO6 3 3 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO 3 2.17 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2

EC6201 Electronic Devices LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To instill the construction, operation and performance characteristics of basic electronic
devices
• To model electronic devices using basic circuit elements
• To introduce the application of different special electronic devices and simple circuits
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DIODE 9

PN junction diode, Current equations, Energy Band diagram, Diffusion and drift current
densities, forward and reverse bias characteristics, Transition and Diffusion Capacitances,
Switching Characteristics, Breakdown in PN Junction Diodes.
UNIT II BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORS 9

NPN -PNP -Operations-Early effect-Current equations – Input and Output characteristics of
CE, CB, CC - Hybrid -π model - h-parameter model, Ebers Moll Model- Gummel Poon-model,
Multi Emitter Transistor.
UNIT III FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS 9

JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics,-Current equations-Pinch off voltage and its
significance- MOSFET- Characteristics- Threshold voltage -Channel length modulation, D-
MOSFET, E-MOSFET- Characteristics – Comparison of MOSFET with JFET.
UNIT IV SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

Metal-Semiconductor Junction- MESFET, FINFET, PINFET, CNTFET, DUAL GATE MOSFET,
Schottky barrier diode-Zener diode-Varactor diode –Tunnel diode- Gallium Arsenide device,
LASER diode, LDR.
UNIT V POWER DEVICES AND DISPLAY DEVICES 9

UJT, SCR, Diac, Triac, Power BJT- Power MOSFET- DMOS-VMOS. LED, LCD, Photo transistor,
Opto Coupler, Solar cell, CCD.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Describe the fundamental concepts and operation of semiconductor Understanding

devices
CO2 Sketch the equivalent circuit of transistor using different modeling Understanding
techniquesand its characteristics for different configurations
CO3 Determine the performance parameters of diodes, BJTs and FETs Applying
CO4 Describe the characteristics of special semiconductor devices, power Understanding
devices and display devices
Text Books:
1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, Third Edition, Tata Mc

GrawHill Inc. 2007.

References:
1. Yang, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices”, McGraw Hill International Edition,

1978.
2. Robert Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electron Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 10th edition, July 2008.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO3 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 - - - 3 2
CO4 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO 2.25 1.25 - 1 - - - - 1 - - - 3 2

EC8261 Circuits and Devices Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives
 To learn the characteristics of basic electronic devices such as Diode, BJT,FET, SCR
 To understand the working of RL, RC and RLC circuits
 To gain hand on experience in Thevenin & Norton theorem, KVL & KCL, and Super
Position Theorems
List of Experiments:
1. Characteristics of PN Junction Diode
2. Zener diode Characteristics & Regulator using Zener diode
3. Common Emitter input-output Characteristics
4. Common Base input-output Characteristics
5. FET Characteristics
6. SCR Characteristics
7. Clipper and Clamper & FWR
8. Verification Of Thevenin & Norton’s theorem
9. Verification of KVL & KCL
10. Verifications of Super Position Theorem
11. Verifications of maximum power transfer & reciprocity theorem
12. Determination of Resonance Frequency of Series & Parallel RLC Circuits
13. Transient analysis of RL and RC circuits
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this laboratory course students will be able to:
CO1 Obtain the input and output characteristics of electronic devices Applying
CO2 Apply the various circuit theorems to simplify complex circuits Applying
CO3 Design and analyze RL and RC circuits Applying
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 1 - - 2 3 2 - 2 3 -
CO2 3 2 - 1 1 - - 2 3 2 - 2 3 -
CO3 3 2 - 1 1 - - 2 3 2 - 2 3 2
CO 3 2 - 1 1 - - 2 3 2 - 2 3 2

GE8261 Engineering Practices Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge about basic electronic components
 To enable students to carry out basic home electrical wiring
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

Buildings:
a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings.
Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions,
reducers, elbows in household fittings.
b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections
with different joining components.
e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18

Welding:
a) Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.
b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
b) Simple Turning and Taper turning
c) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:
b) Forming & Bending: (b) Model making – Trays, funnels, etc. (c) Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
b) Study of centrifugal pump
c) Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)

III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Staircase wiring

4. Measurement of electrical quantities–voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single-phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments- Resistor, color coding
Measurement of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, RMS period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates - AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice –Components Devices and Circuits –Using general purpose PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to
Select and connect appropriate tools & fittings for different pipeline
CO1 Applying
connections and carpentry works.
Perform the various welding, forming, bending, drilling and
CO2 Applying
machining processes and know about its applications.
CO3 Identify the value of resistors and the type of logic gates Understanding
Generate time delays using 555 timer IC and convert ac to dc

CO4 Applying
signals using rectifiers
Measure various electrical and electronic quantities using
CO5 Applying
appropriate meters
CO6 Implement basic house wiring plan Applying
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 -- -- 3 2 2 -- 2 -- --
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 -- -- 3 2 2 -- 2 - --
CO3 2 1 1 1 1 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 3 --
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 -- -- 3 2 2 -- 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 -- -- 3 2 2 -- 2 3 --
CO6 3 2 1 1 1 -- -- 3 2 2 -- 2 -- --
CO 2.83 1.83 1 1 1 -- -- 2.83 2 2 -- 2 3 2


MA8352 Linear Algebra and Partial Differential Equations LTPC4004
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the concept of Vector spaces, Linear dependence, Linear independence,

bases and dimensions.
 To acquaint the student with the concepts of Linear Transformation, Diagonalization
and Inner product spaces.
 To impart the knowledge on formation of Partial Differential Equations and different
methods of solving them.
UNIT I VECTOR SPACES 12

Vector spaces – Subspaces – Linear combinations and linear system of equations – Linear
independence and linear dependence – Bases and dimensions.
UNIT II LINEAR TRANSFORMATION AND DIAGONALIZATION 12

Linear transformation - Null spaces and ranges - Dimension theorem - Matrix representation of
a linear transformation – Eigenvalues and eigenvectors - Diagonalizability.
UNIT III INNER PRODUCT SPACES 12

Inner product, norms - Gram Schmidt orthogonalization process - Adjoint of linear operations -
Least square approximation.
UNIT IV PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Formation – Solutions of first order equations – Standard types and equations reducible to
standard types – Singular solutions – Lagrange’s linear equation – Integral surface passing
through a given curve – Classification of partial differential equations - Solution of linear
equations of higher order with constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial
differential equations.
UNIT V FOURIER SERIES SOLUTIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Half range sine and cosine series - Method of
separation of variables – Solutions of one-dimensional wave equation and one-dimensional heat
equation – Steady state solution of two-dimensional heat equation – Fourier series solutions in
Cartesian coordinates.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Identify vector spaces, subspaces, bases and dimensions and also test linear
CO1 Applying
dependence and independence of vectors.
CO2 Solve problems in linear transformation, null spaces, ranges. Applying
CO3 Diagonalize the matrices using eigenvalues, Eigenvectors. Applying
CO4 Find the orthonormal vectors using Gram Schmidt orthogonalization process. Applying
CO5 Solve partial differential equations (up to third order, with two variables) Applying

Find solution of one-dimensional wave equation, one dimensional heat
CO6 equation and steady state two-dimensional heat equations using the Fourier Applying
series.
Textbooks:
1. Grewal B.S., “ Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd
Edition, 2014.
2. Friedberg, A.H., Insel, A.J. and Spence, L., “Linear Algebra”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2004.
References:
1. Burden, R.L. and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis", 9th Edition, Cengage Learning,
2016.
2. James, G., “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Kolman, B. Hill, D.R., ―Introductory Linear Algebra‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
First Reprint, 2009.
4. Kumaresan, S., “Linear Algebra – A Geometric Approach”, Prentice – Hall of India,
New Delhi, Reprint, 2010.
5. Lay, D.C., “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
6. O‘Neil, P.V., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning, 2007.
7. Strang, G., “Linear Algebra and its applications”, Thomson (Brooks/Cole), New Delhi,
2005.
8. Sundarapandian, V., “Numerical Linear Algebra”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
2008.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO5 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO6 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2

EC8393 Fundamentals of Data Structures in C LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To make the students learn the features of C

 To describe the linear and non-linear data structures
 To make the students explore the applications of linear and non-linear data structures
 To mention the methods to represent data using graph data structure
 To describe the basic sorting and searching algorithms
UNIT I C PROGRAMMING BASICS 9

Structure of a C program – compilation and linking processes – Constants, Variables – Data
Types – Expressions using operators in C – Managing Input and Output operations – Decision
Making and Branching – Looping statements. Arrays – Initialization – Declaration – One
dimensional and Two-dimensional arrays. Strings- String operations – String Arrays. Simple
programs- sorting- searching – matrix operations.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS, POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND UNIONS 9

Functions – Pass by value – Pass by reference – Recursion – Pointers - Definition – Initialization
– Pointers arithmetic. Structures and unions - definition – Structure within a structure - Union
- Programs using structures and Unions – Storage classes, Pre-processor directives.
UNIT III LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9

Arrays and its representations – Stacks and Queues – Linked lists – Linked list-based
implementation of Stacks and Queues – Evaluation of Expressions – Linked list based
polynomial addition.
UNIT IV NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9

Trees – Binary Trees – Binary tree representation and traversals –Binary Search Trees –
Applications of trees. Set representations - Union-Find operations. Graph and its
representations – Graph Traversals.
UNIT V SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9

Linear Search – Binary Search. Bubble Sort, Insertion sort – Merge sort – Quick sort - Hash
tables – Overflow handling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Explain the basic elements of a C program. Understanding
CO2 Write code for simple problems using basic constructs of C Applying
Write programs for sorting and searching using hashing

CO3 Applying
concepts.
Demonstrate dynamic memory management, structures and
CO4 unions, Storage classes, Pre-processor Directives, Recursive Applying
functions

Implement the data structure operations for stack, queue, tree
CO5 Applying
and graphs using C
Identify linear / non-linear data structure for any given
CO6 Applying
application.
Textbooks:
1. Pradip Dey and Manas Ghosh, ―Programming in C, Second Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2011.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, ―Fundamentals of Data
Structures in C, Second Edition, University Press, 2008.
References:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Second Edition,
Pearson Education, 1996
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, ―Data Structures and
Algorithms, Pearson Education, 1983.
3. Robert Kruse, C.L.Tondo, Bruce Leung, Shashi Mogalla , ― Data Structures and
Program Design in C, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2007
4. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, ―An Introduction to Data Structures with
Applications, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1991.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- --
CO2 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 2
CO4 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 2
CO5 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 2
CO6 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 2
CO 2.83 1.83 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 1.8 -- -- 1 -- 1.8

EC8351 Electronic Circuits I LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To impart knowledge on BJT and FET transistor biasing circuits for analyze the stability of
operating point.
• To understand the small-signal analysis of BJT and FET amplifiers.
• To analyze the high frequency performance of BJT and FET amplifiers.
• To introduce power supplies and electronic device testing theories.
UNIT I BIASING OF DISCRETE BJT, JFET AND MOSFET 9

BJT– Need for biasing - DC Load Line and Bias Point – DC analysis of Transistor circuits -
Various biasing methods of BJT – Bias Circuit Design - Thermal stability - Stability factors -
Bias compensation techniques using Diode, thermistor and sensistor – Biasing BJT Switching
Circuits- JFET - DC Load Line and Bias Point - Various biasing methods of JFET - JFET Bias
Circuit Design - MOSFET Biasing - Biasing FET Switching Circuits.
UNIT II BJT AMPLIFIERS 9

Small Signal Hybrid π equivalent circuit of BJT – Early effect - Analysis of CE, CC and CB
amplifiers using Hybrid π equivalent circuits - AC Load Line Analysis- Darlington Amplifier -
Bootstrap technique - Cascade, Cascode configurations - Differential amplifier, Basic BJT
differential pair – Small signal analysis and CMRR.
UNIT III SINGLE STAGE JFET, MOSFET AMPLIFIERS 9

Small Signal Hybrid π equivalent circuit of FET and MOSFET - Analysis of CS, CD and CG
amplifiers using Hybrid π equivalent circuits - Basic FET differential pair- BiCMOS circuits.
UNIT IV FREQUENCY ANALYSIS OF AMPLIFIERS 9

Amplifier frequency response – Frequency response of transistor amplifiers with circuit
capacitors – BJT frequency response – short circuit current gain - cut off frequency – fα, fβ and
unity gain bandwidth – Miller effect - frequency response of FET - High frequency analysis of
CE and MOSFET CS amplifier - Transistor Switching Times.
UNIT V POWER SUPPLIES AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE TESTING 9

Linear mode power supply - Rectifiers - Filters - Half-Wave Rectifier Power Supply - Full-Wave
Rectifier Power Supply - Voltage regulators: Voltage regulation - Linear series, shunt and
switching Voltage Regulators - Over voltage protection - BJT and MOSFET – Switched mode
power supply (SMPS) - Power Supply Performance and Testing - Troubleshooting and Fault
Analysis, Design of Regulated DC Power Supply.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:

CO1 Design various biasing circuits for discrete BJTs and FETs. Applying
Develop small-signal equivalent circuit to analyze the

CO2 Applying
characteristics of BJT amplifiers.
Construct small-signal equivalent circuit to analyze the
CO3 Applying
performance of FET amplifiers.

Compute the frequency response of BJT and FET amplifiers using
CO4 Applying
expanded h-π model.
Describe the different types of rectifiers, voltage regulators, power
CO5 supply circuits, electronic testing circuits and their performance Understanding
characteristics.
Textbooks:
1. Donald. A. Neamen, ‘Electronic Circuits Analysis and Design’, 3rd Edition, Mc Graw Hill
Education (India) Private Ltd., 2010. (Unit I-IV).
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”,
11th Edition, Pearson Education, 2013. (Unit V).
References:
1. Millman J, Halkias.C.and Sathyabrada Jit, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 4th

Edition, Mc Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd., 2015.
2. Salivahanan and N. Suresh Kumar, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 4th Edition, , Mc
Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd., 2017.
3. Floyd, Electronic Devices, Ninth Edition, Pearson Education, 2012
4. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices & Circuits”, 5th Edition, Oxford University Press,
2008.
5. Anwar A. Khan and Kanchan K. Dey, “A First Course on Electronics”, PHI, 2006.
6. Rashid M, “Microelectronics Circuits”, Thomson Learning, 2007.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 2
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 2
CO4 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 2
CO5 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3 2
CO 2.8 1.8 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 2

EC8352 Signals and Systems LTPC4004
Course Objectives:
 To understand the basic operations on signal & classification of signals and systems
 To introduce the transforms for analyzing continuous time and discrete time signals
 To analyze continuous time Linear Time Invariant (LTI) system using Fourier and
Laplace transform
 To analyze discrete time LTI system using DTFT and Z transform
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 12

Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and Sinusoids,
Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals, Periodic &
Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals - Classification of
systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant & Time-invariant,
Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 12

Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
properties
UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 12

Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace
transforms in Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 12

Baseband signal Sampling – Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT) – Properties of
DTFT - Z Transform & Properties
UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 12

Impulse response – Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series and
parallel.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Determine the characteristics of signals and systems Applying

Apply various transforms for continuous time and discrete time
CO2 Applying
signals
Determine the response of an LTI System for both continuous time
CO3 Applying
and discrete time input signals
Apply Laplace and Fourier transform to examine continuous time
CO4 Applying
LTI systems.
Apply DTFT and Z transforms to examine discrete time LTI
CO5 Applying
systems.

Textbooks:
1. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H.Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, Pearson,

2015.(Unit 1-V)
References:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, Second Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. R.E.Zeimer, W.H.Tranter and R.D.Fannin, “Signals & Systems - Continuous and
Discrete”, Pearson, 2007.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO4 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO 3 2 - 1 2 - - - 2 - - 1 2 3

EC8392 Digital Electronics LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To present the number systems, codes and Boolean algebra and their application in
digital systems
 To familiarize with the design of various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
 To introduce the analysis and design procedures for synchronous and asynchronous
sequential circuits
 To explain the various semiconductor memories and related technology
 To introduce the electronic circuit families involved in the making of logic gates and
integrated circuits
UNIT I DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS 9

Number Systems – Decimal, Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal, 1‗s and 2‗s complements, Codes –
Binary, BCD, Excess 3, Gray, Alphanumeric codes, Boolean theorems, Logic gates, Universal
gates, Sum of products and product of sums, Minterms and Maxterms, Karnaugh map
Minimization and Quine-McCluskey method of minimization.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Design of Half and Full Adders, Half and Full Subtractors, Binary Parallel Adder – Carry look
ahead Adder, BCD Adder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Magnitude Comparator, Decoder,
Encoder, Priority Encoder.
UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9

Flip flops – SR, JK, T, D, Master/Slave FF – operation and excitation tables, Triggering of FF,
Analysis and design of clocked sequential circuits – Design - Moore/Mealy models, state
minimization, state assignment, circuit implementation – Design of Counters- Ripple Counters,
Ring Counters, Shift registers, Universal Shift Register.
UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9

Stable and Unstable states, output specifications, cycles and races, state reduction, race free
assignments, Hazards, Essential Hazards, Pulse mode sequential circuits, Design of Hazard
free circuits.
UNIT V MEMORY DEVICES AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 9

Basic memory structure – ROM -PROM – EPROM – EEPROM –EAPROM, RAM – Static and
dynamic RAM - Programmable Logic Devices – Programmable Logic Array (PLA) - Programmable
Array Logic (PAL) – Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) - Implementation of combinational
logic circuits using PLA, PAL. Digital integrated circuits: Logic levels, propagation delay, power
dissipation, fan-out and fan-in, noise margin, logic families and their characteristics-RTL, TTL,
ECL, CMOS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Apply the postulates, theorems and reduction techniques of Applying
CO1 Boolean algebra to simplify Boolean expressions.
CO2 Design combinational circuits using logic gates. Applying
Design synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits. Applying

CO3

Implement the combinational and sequential circuits using various Applying
CO4
semiconductor memories and Programmable logic devices.
Describe the various electronic circuits involved in the design of Understanding
CO5
Digital Integrated Circuits.
Textbooks:
1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2014.
References:
1. Charles H.Roth. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, 6th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2013.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, 10th Edition, Pearson Education Inc, 2011.
3. S.Salivahanan and S.Arivazhagan, “Digital Electronics”, Ist Edition, Vikas Publishing
House pvt Ltd, 2012.
4. Anil K.Maini. “Digital Electronics”, Wiley, 2014.
5. A.Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, 4th Edition, PHI Learning Private
Limited, 2016.
6. Soumitra Kumar Mandal, “Digital Electronics”, McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,
2016.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 -
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 2
CO5 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO 2.8 1.8 - 1 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 2

EC8391 Control System Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the fundamental concepts of control systems and mathematical

modeling of the system.
 To impart the concepts of time response and frequency response analysis of the
system.
 To impart the concepts of stability and stability margins.
 To introduce the state space analysis technique of control system.
 To impart software tool MATLAB to simulate, analyze and aid the design of control
systems.
UNIT I SYSTEMS COMPONENTS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION 9

Control System: Terminology and Basic Structure-Feed forward and Feedback control theory-
Electrical and Mechanical Transfer Function Models-Block diagram Models-Signal flow graphs
models-DC and AC servo Systems-Synchronous -Multivariable control system
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Transient response-steady state response-Measures of performance of the standard first order
and second order system-effect on an additional zero and an additional pole-steady error
constant and system- type number-PID control-Analytical design for PD, PI,PID control
systems
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9
Closed loop frequency response-Performance specification in frequency domain-Frequency
response of standard second order system- Bode Plot - Polar Plot- Nyquist plots-Design of
compensators using Bode plots-Cascade lead compensation-Cascade lag compensation-
Cascade lag-lead compensation
UNIT IV CONCEPTS OF STABILITY ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability-Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability-Routh stability criterion-
Relative stability-Root locus concept-Guidelines for sketching root locus-Nyquist stability
criterion.
UNIT V CONTROL SYSTEM ANALYSIS USING STATE VARIABLE METHODS 9

State variable representation-Conversion of state variable models to transfer functions-
Conversion of transfer functions to state variable models-Solution of state equations-Concepts
of Controllability and Observability-Stability of linear systems-Equivalence between transfer
function and state variable representations-State variable analysis of digital control system-
Digital control design using state feedback.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Develop mathematical model of linear time invariant (LTI) systems in

CO1 Applying
time domain and frequency domain.
Compute the transfer function of LTI systems using block diagram
CO2 Applying
reduction techniques and signal flow graph.

Illustrate the time domain response and steady state error analysis of
CO3 Applying
first and second-order LTI systems using standard test input signals.
Determine the frequency domain specifications using Bode plot, polar
CO4 Applying
plot and analyze stability of the systems with compensators
Compute the stability of closed-loop control (LTI) systems using Routh-
CO5 Applying
Hurwitz Criterion, root-locus techniques and Nyquist Stability Criterion.
Determine the controllability and observability of a given system with
CO6 Applying
the state equations.
Text Book:
1. M.Gopal, ―Control System – Principles and Design‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition,
2012.
References:
1. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, ―Control System Engineering‖, New Age International

Publishers, 5 th Edition, 2007.
2. K. Ogata, ‗Modern Control Engineering‘, 5th edition, PHI, 2012.
3. S.K.Bhattacharya, Control System Engineering, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2013.
4. Benjamin.C.Kuo, ―Automatic control systems‖, Prentice Hall of India, 7th Edition,1995.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 3 2
CO3 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO4 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO5 3 2 - 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 2 3 2
CO6 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 2
CO 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 2 3 2

EC8381 Fundamentals of Data Structures in C Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
 To understand and implement basic data structures using C
 To apply linear and non-linear data structures in problem solving.
 To learn to implement functions and recursive functions by means of data structures
 To implement searching and sorting algorithms
1. Basic C Programs – looping, data manipulations, arrays
2. Programs using strings – string function implementation
3. Programs using structures and pointers
4. Programs involving dynamic memory allocations
5. Array implementation of stacks and queues
6. Linked list implementation of stacks and queues
7. Application of Stacks and Queues
8. Implementation of Trees, Tree Traversals
9. Implementation of Binary Search trees
10. Implementation of Linear search and binary search
11. Implementation Insertion sort, Bubble sort, Quick sort and Merge Sort
12. Implementation Hash functions, collision resolution technique
Course Outcomes:
Write code for the various sorting, searching and hashing

problems and to perform various matrix operations and
CO1 Applying
understand various conditional constraints, string functions,
functions and pointers and structures.
Implement programs for stack, queue, tree and its variations
CO2 Applying
along with their applications.
CO/
PO
CO1 1 2 1 2 -- 3 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 1
CO2 1 2 1 2 -- 3 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- --
CO 1 2 1 2 -- 3 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 1

EC8361 Analog and Digital Circuits Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
 To impart hands on experience to construct Power supplies, BJT amplifiers and FET
amplifiers using discrete electronic components and to simulate them using SPICE.
 To impart hands on experience on combinational and sequential logic circuits using
ICs.
List of Analog Experiments:

1. Design of Regulated Power supplies
2. Frequency Response of CE, CB, CC and CS amplifiers
3. Darlington Amplifier
4. Differential Amplifiers - Transfer characteristics, CMRR Measurement
5. Cascode and Cascade amplifiers
6. Determination of bandwidth of single stage and multistage amplifiers
7. Analysis of BJT with Fixed bias and Voltage divider bias using Spice
8. Analysis of FET, MOSFET with fixed bias, self-bias and voltage divider bias using
simulation software like Spice
9. Analysis of Cascode and Cascade amplifiers using Spice
10. Analysis of Frequency Response of BJT and FET using Spice
List of Digital Experiments:
1. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates(i) BCD to excess-3 code
and vice versa (ii) Binary to gray and vice-versa
2. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ Subtractor and BCD adder using IC
7483
3. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and De-multiplexer using logic gates
4. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates
5. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod-10 / Mod-12 Ripple
counters
6. Design and implementation of 3-bit synchronous up/down counter
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Design, implement and simulate using PSPICE different BJT and
CO1 FET amplifiers for the given specifications and also analyze its Applying
frequency response.
CO2 Design and implement combinational and sequential logic circuits. Applying

CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO 3 2 1 1 1.5 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2

HS8381 Interpersonal Skills/Listening & Speaking LTPC0021
Course Objectives:
 Emphasis will be on equipping students with English language skills required for the
successful undertaking of academic studies with primary emphasis on academic
speaking and listening skills.
 Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to
engage in specific academic speaking activities.
 Facilitate activities that would improve general and academic listening skills
 Guide students to make effective presentations.
UNIT I
Listening as a key skill- its importance- speaking - give personal information - ask for personal
information - express ability - enquire about ability - ask for clarification Improving
pronunciation - pronunciation basics taking lecture notes - preparing to listen to a lecture -
articulate a complete idea as opposed to producing fragmented utterances.
UNIT II
Listen to process information- give information, as part of a simple explanation - conversation
starters: small talk - stressing syllables and speaking clearly - intonation patterns - compare
and contrast information and ideas from multiple sources- converse with reasonable accuracy
over a wide range of everyday topics.
UNIT III
Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors influence fluency, deliver a five-minute
informal talk - greet - respond to greetings - describe health and symptoms - invite and offer -
accept - decline - take leave - listen for and follow the gist- listen for detail
UNIT IV
Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback - participating in a group
discussion - summarizing academic readings and lectures - conversational speech listening to
and participating in conversations - persuade.
UNIT V
Formal and informal talk - listen to follow and respond to explanations, directions and
instructions in academic and business contexts - strategies for presentations and interactive
communication - group/pair presentations - negotiate disagreement in group work.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Hone active listening skills to connect better with people. Applying
Refine their pronunciation, use proper stress, and intonation to
CO2 Applying
speak clearly.
Introspect and strengthen their communication skills in formal
CO3 Applying
and informal situations.
CO4 Augment their presentation skills Understanding

Textbooks:
1. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University
Press, Oxford: 2011.
2. Richards,C. Jack. & David Bholke. Speak Now Level
3. Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2010
References:
1. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and

Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.
2. Hughes, Glyn and Josephine Moate. Practical English Classroom. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014.
3. Vargo, Mari. Speak Now Level 4. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2013.
4. Richards C. Jack. Person to Person (Starter). Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2006.
5. Ladousse, Gillian Porter. Role Play. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2014
CO/
PO
CO1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 3 -- --
CO2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 2 -- 3 -- --
CO3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- 3 -- --
CO4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 2 -- 3 -- --

MA8451 Probability and Random Processes LTPC4004
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the basic concepts of probability, one- and two-dimensional random

variables and to introduce some standard distributions applicable to engineering which
can describe real life phenomenon.
2. To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in IT fields.
3. To understand the concepts of correlation and spectral densities.
4. To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.
UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12

Probability - Axioms of probability - Conditional probability - Baye‘s theorem -Discrete and
continuous random variables – Moments - Moment generating functions- Binomial, Poisson,
Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal distributions.
UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12

Joint distributions - Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance - Correlation and
linear regression - Transformation of random variables - Central limit theorem (for independent
and identically distributed random variables).
UNIT III RANDOM PROCESSES 12

Classification - Stationary process - Markov process - Markov chain - Poisson process
Random telegraph process.
UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 12

Auto correlation functions - Cross correlation functions – Properties - Power spectral density -
Cross spectral density - Properties.
UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 12

Linear time invariant system - System transfer function - Linear systems with random inputs -
Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Solve problems in probability, random variables and standard

CO1 Applying
distributions.
CO2 Solve problems based on two dimensional random variables Applying
Solve the problems involving stationary process, Markov
CO3 process, Markov chain, Poisson process and Random telegraph Applying
process
CO4 Find the correlation and spectral densities. Applying
Calculate the response of random inputs and outputs by linear

CO5 Applying
time invariant systems.

Textbooks:
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1 st Indian
Reprint, Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.
References:
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis",
Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu,"Schaum‘s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables
and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to
Signal Processing and Communications”, Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Process with Applications to
signal Processing”, Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes”, Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3
CO3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3
CO4 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3
CO5 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3
CO 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3

EC8452 Electronic Circuits II LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the concept of feedback in electronic circuits and analysis of its types and
applications.
 To impart the knowledge on design and analysis of tuned amplifiers.
 To develop the capability to design multivibrators and wave shaping circuits
 To understand the working principle of power amplifiers and DC converters.
UNIT I FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND STABILITY 9

Feedback Concepts – gain with feedback – effect of feedback on gain stability, distortion,
bandwidth, input and output impedances; topologies of feedback amplifiers – analysis of series-
series, shunt-shunt and shunt-series feedback amplifiers-stability problem-Gain and Phase-
margins-Frequency compensation.
UNIT II OSCILLATORS 9
Barkhausen criterion for oscillation – phase shift, Wien bridge - Hartley & Colpitt‘s oscillators –
Clapp oscillator-Ring oscillators and crystal oscillators – oscillator amplitude stabilization.
UNIT III TUNED AMPLIFIERS 9

Coil losses, unloaded and loaded Q of tank circuits, small signal tuned amplifiers –Analysis of
capacitor coupled single tuned amplifier – double tuned amplifier - effect of cascading single
tuned and double tuned amplifiers on bandwidth – Stagger tuned amplifiers - Stability of tuned
amplifiers – Neutralization - Hazeltine neutralization method.
UNIT IV WAVE SHAPING AND MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 9

Pulse circuits – attenuators – RC integrator and differentiator circuits – diode clampers and
clippers –Multivibrators - Schmitt Trigger- UJT Oscillator.
UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC CONVERTERS 9

Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Power MOSFET-Temperature Effect- Class
AB Power amplifier using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis
and design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Design a feedback amplifier and analyze its stability.

CO1 Applying
CO2 Construct low frequency and high frequency sinusoidal oscillators. Applying
Describe the working principle of tuned amplifiers and its stability
CO3 Understanding
analysis.
Applying
CO4 Construct Multivibrators and wave shaping circuits.
Comprehend the types of power amplifiers and design Buck-Boost
CO5 Applying
Convertor

Textbooks:
1. Sedra and Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits”, Sixth Edition, Oxford University Press,
2011. (UNIT I, III, IV, V).
2. Jacob Millman, “Microelectronics”, McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, Reprinted, 2009. (UNIT I,
II, IV, V).
References:
1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”,
10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Fifth Edition, Oxford University Press,
2008.
3. Millman J. and Taub H., “Pulse Digital and Switching Waveforms”, TMH, 2000.
4. Millman and Halkias. C., “Integrated Electronics”, TMH, 2007.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 3
CO3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 3 3
CO 2.8 1.8 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 2.8 2.8

EC8491 Communication Theory LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To develop a fundamental understanding on Communication Systems with emphasis on

analog modulation techniques
• To apply the concepts of Random Process to communication system design.
• To gain the knowledge on noise source and the effect of noise on communication
system.
• To understand the fundamental principles of sampling and quantization
UNIT I AMPLITUDE MODULATION 9

Amplitude Modulation- DSBSC, DSBFC, SSB, VSB - Modulation index, Spectra, Power
relations and Bandwidth – AM Generation – Square law and Switching modulator, DSBSC
Generation – Balanced and Ring Modulator, SSB Generation – Filter, Phase Shift and Third
Methods, VSB Generation – Filter Method, Hilbert Transform, Pre-envelope & complex envelope
–comparison of different AM techniques, Superheterodyne Receiver
UNIT II ANGLE MODULATION 9

Phase and frequency modulation, Narrow Band and Wide band FM – Modulation index,
Spectra, Power relations and Transmission Bandwidth - FM modulation –Direct and Indirect
methods, FM Demodulation – FM to AM conversion, FM Discriminator - PLL as FM
Demodulator.
UNIT III RANDOM PROCESS 9

Random variables, Random Process, Stationary Processes, Mean, Correlation & Covariance
functions, Power Spectral Density, Ergodic Processes, Gaussian Process, Transmission of a
Random Process Through a LTI filter.
UNIT IV NOISE CHARACTERIZATION 9

Noise sources – Noise figure, noise temperature and noise bandwidth – Noise in cascaded
systems. Representation of Narrow band noise –In-phase and quadrature, Envelope and Phase
– Noise performance analysis in AM & FM systems – Threshold effect, Pre-emphasis and de-
emphasis for FM.
UNIT V SAMPLING & QUANTIZATION 9

Low pass sampling – Aliasing- Signal Reconstruction-Quantization - Uniform & non-uniform
quantization - quantization noise - Logarithmic Companding –PAM, PPM, PWM, PCM – TDM,
FDM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:

CO1 Describe the amplitude and frequency modulation schemes. Understanding
CO2 Determine the type of noise in AM and FM systems. Understanding

Compute energy and power spectral density of the signal using
CO3 Applying
random process

CO4 Determine the performance of analog modulation schemes Applying
Calculate the performance of various pulse modulation
CO5 Applying
techniques.
Textbooks:
1. J.G.Proakis, M.Salehi, ―Fundamentals of Communication Systems‖, Pearson Education

2014. (UNIT I-IV)
2. Simon Haykin, ―Communication Systems‖, 4th Edition, Wiley, 2014. (UNIT I-V)
References:
1. B.P.Lathi, ―Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 3rd Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2007.
2. D.Roody, J.Coolen, ―Electronic Communications, 4th edition PHI 2006
3. A.Papoulis, ―Probability, Random variables and Stochastic Processes, McGraw Hill, 3rd
edition, 1991.
4. B.Sklar, ―Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications, 2nd Edition
Pearson Education 2007
5. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series - ―Analog and Digital Communications TMH 2006
6. Couch.L., "Modern Communication Systems", Pearson, 2001.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 3
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO4 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO 2.6 1.6 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 1 3

EC8451 Electromagnetic Fields LTPC4004
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge on laws associated with static electric and magnetic fields.
 To use laws governing electric and magnetic field in analyzing various charge and
current element configurations respectively.
 To understand the concept of conductors, dielectrics, magnetic materials, inductance
and capacitance
 To deduce Maxwell’s equation by understanding concepts of Time varying electric field
and thereby evaluating EM wave propagation.
UNIT I STATIC ELECTRIC FIELD 9

Vector Algebra, Coordinate Systems, Vector differential operator, Gradient, Divergence, Curl,
Divergence theorem, Stokes theorem, Coulombs law, Electric field intensity, Point, Line,
Surface and Volume charge distributions, Electric flux density, Gauss law and its applications,
Gauss divergence theorem, Absolute Electric potential, Potential difference, Calculation of
potential differences for different configurations. Electric dipole, Electrostatic Energy and
Energy density.
UNIT II CONDUCTORS AND DIELECTRICS 9

Conductors and dielectrics in Static Electric Field, Current and current density, Continuity
equation, Polarization, Boundary conditions, Method of images, Resistance of a conductor,
Capacitance, Parallel plate, Coaxial and Spherical capacitors, Boundary conditions for perfect
dielectric materials, Poisson’s equation, Laplace’s equation, Solution of Laplace equation,
Application of Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations.
UNIT III STATIC MAGNETIC FIELDS 9

Biot -Savart Law, Magnetic field Intensity, Estimation of Magnetic field Intensity for straight
and circular conductors, Ampere’s Circuital Law, Point form of Ampere’s Circuital Law, Stokes
theorem, Magnetic flux and magnetic flux density, The Scalar and Vector Magnetic potentials,
Derivation of Steady magnetic field Laws.
UNIT IV MAGNETIC FORCES AND MATERIALS 9

Force on a moving charge, Force on a differential current element, Force between current
elements, Force and torque on a closed circuit, The nature of magnetic materials,
Magnetization and permeability, Magnetic boundary conditions involving magnetic fields, The
magnetic circuit, Potential energy and forces on magnetic materials, Inductance, Basic
expressions for self and mutual inductances, Inductance evaluation for solenoid, toroid, coaxial
cables and transmission lines, Energy stored in Magnetic fields.
UNIT V TIME VARYING FIELDS AND MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS 9

Fundamental relations for Electrostatic and Magnetostatic fields, Faraday’s law for
Electromagnetic induction, Transformers, Motional Electromotive forces, Differential form of
Maxwell’s equations, Integral form of Maxwell’s equations, Potential functions, Electromagnetic
boundary conditions, Wave equations and their solutions, Poynting’s theorem, Time harmonic
fields, Electromagnetic Spectrum.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
CO1 Apply the vector analysis on Electric and Magnetic Fields Applying
Apply the laws governing static electric fields for estimating the
CO2 fields in different uniform charge distributions and interaction of Applying
static Electric field in materials
Apply the laws governing static magnetic fields for estimating the
CO3 Applying
fields and interaction of static magnetic field in materials
CO4 Construct Maxwell’s equations and wave equations. Applying
Textbooks:
1. William H Hayt and Jr John A Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics” , Tata Mc Graw-

Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008
2. Sadiku MH, “Principles of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press Inc, New Delhi,
2009
References:
1. David K Cheng, “Field and Wave Electromagnetics”, Pearson Education Inc, Delhi, 2004
2. John D Kraus and Daniel A Fleisch, “Electromagnetics with Applications”, Mc Graw Hill
Book Co,2005
3. Karl E Longman and Sava V Savov, “Fundamentals of Electromagnetics”, Prentice Hall
of India,New Delhi, 2006
4. Ashutosh Pramanic, “Electromagnetism”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2006
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 2 3
CO 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 2 3

EC8453 Linear Integrated Circuits LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the internal blocks and characteristics of linear Integrated circuits.

 To impart the knowledge on design and analysis of linear and non-linear applications of
operational amplifiers.
 To introduce the theory and applications of analog multiplier and PLL.
 To develop the capability to design Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog Converters.
 To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and introduce special function ICs.
UNIT I BASICS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Current mirror and current sources, Current sources as active loads, Voltage sources, Voltage
References, BJT Differential amplifier with active loads, Basic information about op-amps –
Ideal Operational Amplifier - General operational amplifier stages -and internal circuit
diagrams of IC 741, DC and AC performance characteristics, slew rate, Open and closed loop
configurations – JFET Operational Amplifiers – LF155 and TL082.
UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Sign Changer, Scale Changer, Phase Shift Circuits, Voltage Follower, V-to-I and I-to-V
converters, adder, subtractor, Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator, Differentiator, Logarithmic
amplifier, Antilogarithmic amplifier, Comparators, Schmitt trigger, Precision rectifier, peak
detector, clipper and clamper, Low-pass, high-pass and band-pass Butterworth filters.
UNIT III ANALOG MULTIPLIER AND PLL 9

Analog Multiplier using Emitter Coupled Transistor Pair - Gilbert Multiplier cell – Variable
transconductance technique, analog multiplier ICs and their applications, Operation of the
basic PLL, Closed loop analysis, Voltage controlled oscillator, Monolithic PLL IC 565,
application of PLL for AM detection, FM detection, FSK modulation and demodulation and
Frequency synthesizing and clock synchronization.
UNIT IV ANALOG TO DIGITAL AND DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTERS 9

Analog and Digital Data Conversions, D/A converter – specifications - weighted resistor type,
R-2R Ladder type, Voltage Mode and Current-Mode R - 2R Ladder types - switches for D/A
converters, high speed sample-and-hold circuits, A/D Converters – specifications - Flash type -
Successive Approximation type - Single Slope type – Dual Slope type - A/D Converter using
Voltage-to-Time Conversion - Over-sampling A/D Converters, Sigma – Delta converters.
UNIT V WAVEFORM GENERATORS AND SPECIAL FUNCTION ICS 9

Sine-wave generators, Multivibrators and Triangular wave generator, Saw-tooth wave
generator, ICL8038 function generator, Timer IC 555, IC Voltage regulators – Three terminal
fixed and adjustable voltage regulators - IC 723 general purpose regulator - Monolithic
switching regulator, Low Drop – Out(LDO) Regulators - Switched capacitor filter IC MF10,
Frequency to Voltage and Voltage to Frequency converters, Audio Power amplifier, Video
Amplifier, Isolation Amplifier, Opto-couplers and fibre optic IC.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Describe the building blocks and AC/DC performance
CO1 Understanding
characteristics of an operational amplifier

CO2 Design linear and non-linear circuits using op-amp. Applying
CO3 Describe analog multiplier, Phase Locked Loop and its applications Understanding
Construct various types of Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog
CO4 Applying
Converters using op-amp.
Illustrate the function of waveform generators and special functions
CO5 Understanding
ICs such as Voltage regulators, Timers and Amplifier ICs.
Textbooks:
1. D.Roy Choudhry, Shail Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 2018, Fifth Edition. (Unit I – V)
2. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, 4th
Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2016 (Unit I – V)
References:
1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “OP-AMP and Linear ICs”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall / Pearson
Education, 2015.
2. Robert F.Coughlin, Frederick F.Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated
Circuits”, Sixth Edition, PHI, 2001.
3. B.S.Sonde, “System design using Integrated Circuits”, 2nd Edition, New Age Pub, 2001.
4. Gray and Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, Wiley
International, 5th Edition, 2009.
5. William D.Stanley, “Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits‖, Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2001.
6. S.Salivahanan & V.S. Kanchana Bhaskaran, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, TMH, 2nd
Edition, 4th Reprint, 2016.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 1
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 3 2
CO3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 3 3
CO4 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 3 3
CO5 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 3 3
CO 2.4 1.4 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1.25 -- -- -- 2.8 2.4

GE8291 Environmental Science and Engineering LTP3003
Course Objectives:
• To study the nature and facts about environment.

• To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions
to environmental problems.
• To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
• To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human
world; envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
• To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth’s interior and
surface.
• To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control
and waste management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers
–energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds,
streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic,
species and ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity:
consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at
global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered
and endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of
biodiversity. Field study of common plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems –
pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8

Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards –
solid waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role
of an individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management:
floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural /
Industrial /Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10

Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction,
mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over-
utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits
and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting
and using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes
caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide
problems, water logging, salinity, case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs,
renewable and non-renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies –
Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion
and desertification – role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use
of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field study of local area to document environmental
assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.

UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rainwater harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization-
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid
rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. –wasteland
reclamation – consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air(Prevention
and Control of Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act –Wildlife
protection act – Forest conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental
legislation- central and state pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6

Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme
– environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course students will be able to :
Explain the concept, structure and function of different ecosystems and Understanding
CO1
the significance of biodiversity
Illustrate the causes, effects and control measures for air, water, soil, Understanding
CO2
marine and noise pollutions
Demonstrate the need of renewable energy resources and role of
CO3 Understanding
individual in conservation of natural resources
Describe the various rainwater harvesting methods and environmental
CO4 Understanding
protection acts to the society
Estimate the population growth patterns around the globe and list the
CO5 Understanding
importance of role of IT in environment and human health
Textbooks:
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2006.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd
edition,Pearson Education, 2004.
References:
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,
2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) Pvt, Ltd,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning
India Pvt, Ltd, Delhi, 2014.

4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press,
2005.
CO/
PO
CO1 -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO2 -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO3 -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO4 -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO5 -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CO -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --

EC8461 Circuits Design and Simulation Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives :
This lab course is intended
 To impart hands on experience to construct feedback amplifiers, tuned amplifiers,
sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal Oscillators, waveform generator circuits and power
amplifiers using discrete electronic components and to simulate them using SPICE
List of Experiments
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THE FOLLOWING CIRCUITS
1. Series and Shunt feedback amplifiers-Frequency response, Input and output impedance
Calculation
2. RC Phase shift oscillator and Wien Bridge Oscillator
3. Hartley Oscillator and Colpitts Oscillator
4. Single Tuned Amplifier
5. RC Integrator and Differentiator circuits
6. Astable and Monostable multivibrators
7. Clippers and Clampers
SIMULATION USING SPICE (Using Transistor):
1. Tuned Collector Oscillator
2. Twin -T Oscillator / Wein Bridge Oscillator
3. Double and Stagger tuned Amplifiers
4. Bistable Multivibrator
5. Schmitt Trigger circuit with Predictable hysteresis
6. Analysis of Power Amplifiers
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes :
Design, implement and simulate different feedback amplifiers,

CO1 tuned amplifiers and power amplifiers for the given specifications Applying
and also analyze its frequency response.
Design, implement and simulate different types of Oscillators and
CO2 Applying
multivibrator circuits for the given specifications.
Construct first order filter circuits, Clipping and clamping circuits,
CO3 Applying
and verify their respective outputs.

CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO 3 2 1 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2

EC8462 Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge about characteristics of operational amplifiers

 To enable the students to apply op-amps in linear and nonlinear applications and also
to simulate using SPICE.
 To impart basic knowledge of special function IC’s.
DESIGN AND TESTING OF THE FOLLOWING CIRCUITS
1. Inverting, Non-inverting and differential amplifiers.
2. Integrator and Differentiator.
3. Instrumentation amplifier
4. Active low-pass, High-pass and band-pass filters.
5. Astable & Monostable multivibrators using Op-amp
6. Schmitt Trigger using op-amp.
7. Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators using Op-amp.
8. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using NE555 Timer.
9. PLL characteristics and its use as Frequency Multiplier, Clock synchronization
10. R-2R Ladder Type D- A Converter using Op-amp.
11. DC power supply using LM317 and LM723. 12. Study of SMPS
SIMULATION USING SPICE:

1. Active low-pass, High-pass and band-pass filters using Op-amp
2. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using NE555 Timer.
3. A/ D converter
4. Analog multiplier
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to
Design the linear and non-linear applications of an op-amp for the
CO1 Applying
given specifications and simulate using SPICE.
Construct DC power supplies, Phase Locked Loop and also
CO2 Applying
simulate Multivibrators and analog multiplier using SPICE.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO 3 2 1 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2

EC8501 Digital Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To impart the knowledge about the building blocks of digital communication system.
 To expose the students to understand the mathematical modelling of various blocks
and the signal flow in digital communication system.
 To make the student to understand error performance of a digital communication
system in the presence of noise and other interferences.
 To get introduced to the concept of channel coding and decoding.
UNIT I INFORMATION THEORY 9

Discrete Memoryless source, Information, Entropy, Mutual Information - Discrete Memoryless
channels – Binary Symmetric Channel, Channel Capacity - Hartley - Shannon law - Source
coding theorem - Shannon - Fano & Huffman codes.
UNIT II WAVEFORM CODING & REPRESENTATION 9

Prediction filtering and DPCM - Delta Modulation - ADPCM & ADM principles-Linear Predictive
Coding- Properties of Line codes- Power Spectral Density of Unipolar / Polar RZ & NRZ –
Bipolar NRZ - Manchester
UNIT III BASEBAND TRANSMISSION & RECEPTION 9

ISI – Nyquist criterion for distortion less transmission – Pulse shaping – Correlative coding -
Eye pattern – Receiving Filters- Matched Filter, Correlation receiver, Adaptive Equalization
UNIT IV DIGITAL MODULATION SCHEME 9

Geometric Representation of signals - Generation, detection, PSD & BER of Coherent BPSK,
BFSK & QPSK - QAM - Carrier Synchronization - Structure of Non-coherent Receivers -
Principle of DPSK.
UNIT V ERROR CONTROL CODING 9

Channel coding theorem - Linear Block codes - Hamming codes - Cyclic codes - Convolutional
codes - Viterbi Decoder.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:

Determine the minimum number of bits per symbol required to
CO1 represent the source and the maximum rate at which reliable Applying
communication can take place over the channel.
Illustrate the waveform coding techniques such as DM, DPCM, ADM, Understanding
CO2
ADPCM, vocoders etc.
Obtain the power spectra of different baseband modulated signals such Applying
CO3
as NRZ, RZ, Polar, Bipolar, Manchester etc.
Describe the methods to overcome ISI and detect the digital modulated Understanding
CO4
signals.

Compute the probability of error and power spectral density of digital Applying
CO5 modulation techniques using signal space analysis and constellation
diagrams.
Determine the output code word, decoded message, error correcting/ Applying
CO6
detecting capability, etc. for channel coding methods.
Text Book:
1. S. Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley, 2005
Reference Books:
1. B. Sklar, “Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications”, 2nd Edition,

2. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems” 3rd Edition, Oxford
University Press 2007.
3. H P Hsu, “Schaum Outline Series – Analog and Digital Communications”, TMH 2006 4.
J.G Proakis, “Digital Communication”, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company, 2001.
4. 4. J.G Proakis, “Digital Communication”, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company,
2001.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- 3
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- 3
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- 3
CO6 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 2 3
CO 2.67 1.67 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 2 3

EC8553 Discrete-Time Signal Processing LTPC4004
Course Objectives:
 To learn discrete Fourier transform, properties of DFT and its application to linear
filtering
 To understand the characteristics of digital filters, design digital IIR and FIR filters and
apply these filters to filter undesirable signals in various frequency bands
 To understand the effects of finite precision representation on digital filters
 To understand the fundamental concepts of digital signal processors.
UNIT I DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM 12

Review of signals and systems, concept of frequency in discrete-time signals, summary of
analysis & synthesis equations for FT & DTFT, frequency domain sampling, Discrete Fourier
transform (DFT) - deriving DFT from DTFT, properties of DFT - periodicity, symmetry, circular
convolution. Linear filtering using DFT. Filtering long data sequences - overlap save and
overlap add method. Fast computation of DFT - Radix-2 Decimation-in-time (DIT) Fast Fourier
transform (FFT), Decimation-in-frequency (DIF) Fast Fourier transform (FFT). Linear filtering
using FFT.
UNIT II INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 12

Characteristics of practical frequency selective filters. characteristics of commonly used analog
filters - Butterworth filters, Chebyshev filters. Design of IIR filters from analog filters (LPF, HPF,
BPF, BRF) - Approximation of derivatives, Impulse invariance method, Bilinear transformation.
Frequency transformation in the analog domain. Structure of IIR filter - direct form I, direct
form II, Cascade, parallel realizations.
UNIT III FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 12

Design of FIR filters - symmetric and Anti-symmetric FIR filters - design of linear phase FIR
filters using Fourier series method - FIR filter design using windows (Rectangular, Hamming
and Hanning window), Frequency sampling method. FIR filter structures - linear phase
structure, direct form realizations
UNIT IV FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS 12

Fixed point and floating point number representation - ADC - quantization - truncation and
rounding - quantization noise - input / output quantization - coefficient quantization error -
product quantization error - overflow error - limit cycle oscillations due to product quantization
and summation - scaling to prevent overflow.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 12

DSP functionalities - circular buffering – DSP architecture – Fixed and Floating point
architecture principles – Programming – Application examples.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Compute DFT for discrete time signals Applying
CO2 Design IIR filters for the given specifications Applying
CO3 Construct FIR filters for the given specifications Applying

CO4 Illustrate the effects of finite word length on filters Understanding
Explain the applications of Digital Signal Processors in
CO5 Understanding
communication systems
Text Book:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing – Principles,

Algorithms & Applications”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall,
2007. (UNIT I – V)
References:
1. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor & Barrie. W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Second
Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. A. V. Oppenheim, R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, “Discrete-Time Signal Processing”,
8th Indian Reprint, Pearson, 2004.
3. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach”, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 2007.
4. Andreas Antoniou, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2006.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - - -- 3
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - - - 3
CO3 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - - - 3
CO4 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - - 3
CO5 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - - 3
CO 2.6 1.6 - 1 - - - - 2 - - - - 3

EC8552 Computer Architecture and Organization LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To make the students understand the basic structure and operation of digital computer
 To familiarize with implementation of fixed point and floating-point arithmetic
operations
 To study the design of data path unit and control unit for processor
 To understand the concept of various memories an interfacing
 To introduce the parallel processing technique
UNIT I COMPUTER ORGANIZATION & INSTRUCTIONS 9

Basics of a computer system: Evolution, Ideas, Technology, Performance, Power wall,
Uniprocessors to Multiprocessors. Addressing and addressing modes. Instructions: Operations
and Operands, Representing instructions, Logical operations, control operations
UNIT II ARITHMETIC 9
Fixed point Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division. Floating Point arithmetic, High
performance arithmetic, Subword parallelism
UNIT III THE PROCESSOR 9

Introduction, Logic Design Conventions, Building a Datapath - A Simple Implementation
scheme - An Overview of Pipelining - Pipelined Datapath and Control. Data Hazards:
Forwarding versus Stalling, Control Hazards, Exceptions, Parallelism via Instructions.
UNIT IV MEMORY AND I/O ORGANIZATION 9

Memory hierarchy, Memory Chip Organization, Cache memory, Virtual memory. Parallel Bus
Architectures, Internal Communication Methodologies, Serial Bus Architectures, Mass storage,
Input and Output Devices.
UNIT V ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 9

Parallel processing architectures and challenges, Hardware multithreading, Multicore and
shared memory multiprocessors, Introduction to Graphics Processing Units, Clusters and
Warehouse scale computers - Introduction to Multiprocessor network topologies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this theory course, the students will be able to:

Describe the data representation, instruction formats, operation
CO1 Understanding
and performance of a digital computer
Illustrate the concepts and compute fixed point and floating-point
CO2 Applying
arithmetic for ALU.
Discuss the implementation of pipelined data path and control,
CO3 Understanding
with minimum hazards.
Illustrate various memory mapping techniques and explain the
CO4 organization and interfacing of bus architectures, memory and I/O Understanding
devices.
Discuss the concepts of parallel processing, multithreading and
CO5 Understanding
multicore architectures.

Text Books:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessey, ―Computer Organization and Design,

Fifth edition, Morgan Kauffman / Elsevier, 2014. (UNIT I-V)
2. Miles J. Murdocca and Vincent P. Heuring, ―Computer Architecture and
Organization: An Integrated approach‖, Second edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2015 (UNIT
IV,V)
References:
1. V. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko G. Varanesic and Safat G. Zaky, “Computer Organization”,

Fifth edition, Mc Graw-Hill Education India Pvt Ltd, 2014.
2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture”, Seventh Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006.
3. Govindarajalu, “Computer Architecture and Organization, Design Principles and
Applications", Second edition, McGraw-Hill Education India Pvt Ltd, 2014.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3 --
CO2 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 --
CO3 2 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3 --
CO4 2 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3 --
CO5 2 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3 2
CO 2.2 1.2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3 2

EC8551 Communication Networks LTPC3003
Course Objective:
The student should be made to:

 Understand the division of network functionalities into layers.
 Be familiar with the components required to build different types of networks
 Be exposed to the required functionality at each layer
 Learn the flow control and congestion control algorithms
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS & LINK LAYER 9

Overview of Data Communications-Networks –Building Network and its types–Overview of
Internet –Protocol Layering –OSI Mode –Physical Layer –Overview of Data and Signals –
introduction to Data Link Layer –Link layer Addressing-Error Detection and Correction
UNIT II MEDIA ACCESS & INTERNETWORKING 9

Overview of Data link Control and Media access control –Ethernet (802.3) –Wireless LANs –
Available Protocols –Bluetooth –Bluetooth Low Energy –WiFi –6LowPAN–Zigbee –Network layer
services –Packet Switching –IPV4 Address –Network layer protocols ( IP, ICMP, Mobile IP)
UNIT III ROUTING 9

Routing –Unicast Routing –Algorithms –Protocols –Multicast Routing and its basics –Overview
of Intradomain and interdomain protocols –Overview of Ipv6 Addressing –Transition from Ipv4
to Ipv6
UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9

Introduction to Transport layer –Protocols-User Datagram Protocols (UDP) and Transmission
Control Protocols (TCP) –Services –Features –TCP Connection –State Transition Diagram –Flow,
Error and Congestion Control –Congestion avoidance (DECbit, RED) –QoS –Application
requirements
UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9

Application Layer Paradigms –Client Server Programming –World Wide Web and HTTP –DNS–
Electronic Mail (SMTP, POP3, IMAP, MIME) –Introduction to Peer to Peer Networks –Need for
Cryptography and Network Security –Firewalls.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Describe the concepts of layered models. Understanding

Discuss the different wired & wireless technologies and
CO2 Understanding
internetworking concepts like IP, ICMP.
CO3 Compare the routing algorithms based on their performance. Applying
Illustrate the protocols & features of transport layer and
CO4 Understanding
congestion control mechanisms to improve the Quality of Service.
Explain the application layer protocols such as SMTP, HTTP, DNS
CO5 Understanding
and security mechanisms.

Text Books:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, ―Data communication and Networking, Fifth Edition, Tata

McGraw –Hill, 2013(UNIT I –V)
References:
1. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking –A Top-Down Approach

Featuring the Internet”, Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
4. Nader. F. Mir, “Computer and Communication Networks”, Pearson Prentice Hall
Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2014.
5. Ying-Dar Lin, Ren-Hung Hwang, Fred Baker, “Computer Networks: An Open Source
Approach”, Mc Graw Hill Publisher, 2011.
6. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”, Fifth
Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 3
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 3
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 3
CO 2.4 1.4 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 3

EC8562 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
The student should be made:
 To perform basic signal processing operations such as Linear Convolution, Circular
Convolution, Auto Correlation, Cross Correlation and Frequency analysis in MATLAB
 To implement FIR and IIR filters in MATLAB and DSP Processor
 To study the architecture of DSP processor
 To design a DSP system to demonstrate the Multi-rate signal processing concepts.
List Of Experiments:
MATLAB / EQUIVALENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
1. Generation of elementary Discrete-Time sequences
2. Linear and Circular convolutions
3. Auto correlation and Cross Correlation
4. Frequency Analysis using DFT
5. Design of FIR filters (LPF/HPF/BPF/BSF) and demonstrates the filtering operation
6. Design of Butterworth and Chebyshev IIR filters (LPF/HPF/BPF/BSF) and demonstrate
the filtering operations
DSP PROCESSOR BASED IMPLEMENTATION
1. Study of architecture of Digital Signal Processor
2. Perform MAC operation using various addressing modes
3. Generation of various signals and random noise
4. Design and demonstration of FIR Filter for Low pass, High pass, Band pass and Band
stop filtering
5. Design and demonstration of Butter worth and Chebyshev IIR Filters for Low pass, High
pass, Band pass and Band stop filtering
6. Implement an Up-sampling and Down-sampling operation in DSP Processor
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Design / Simulate the mathematical operation like correlation, convolution,
CO1 Applying
DFT, FFT, FIR and IIR filter using MATLAB.
Design and implement MAC operations, FIR and IIR filter and demonstrate
CO2 Applying
various noises, Multi-rate signal processing concepts using DSP processor.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 3 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 3 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 1 3
CO 3 2 -- 1 3 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 1 3

EC8563 Communication Networks Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives
 To impart the concepts of networking protocols, socket programming, various routing

algorithms using simulation tools like C++, Java, NS2.
1. Implementation of Error Detection / Error Correction Techniques
2. Implementation of Stop and Wait Protocol and sliding window
3. Implementation and study of Goback-N and selective repeat protocols
4. Implementation of High Level Data Link Control
5. Implementation of IP Commands such as ping, Traceroute, nslookup.
6. Implementation of IP address configuration.
7. To create scenario and study the performance of network with CSMA / CA protocol and
compare with CSMA/CD protocols.
8. Network Topology -Star, Bus, Ring
9. Implementation of distance vector routing algorithm
10. Implementation of Link state routing algorithm
11. Study of Network simulator (NS) and simulation of Congestion Control Algorithms using
NS
12. Implementation of Encryption and Decryption Algorithms using any programming
language
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Configure IP address. Applying
Simulate various network topologies and analyze the performance
CO2 Analyzing
of routing algorithms.
Implement the flow and error control protocols using simulation
CO3 Applying
tools.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 3 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 -- 3
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 -- 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 3 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 -- 3
CO 3 2.33 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 3

EC8561 Communication Systems Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
 To visualize the effects of sampling and TDM
 To Implement AM & FM modulation and demodulation
 To implement PCM & DM
 To simulate Digital Modulation schemes
 To simulate Error control coding schemes
1. Signal Sampling and reconstruction
2. Time Division Multiplexing
3. AM Modulator and Demodulator
4. FM Modulator and Demodulator
5. Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation
6. Delta Modulation and Demodulation
7. Line coding schemes
8. Simulation of ASK, FSK, and BPSK generation schemes
9. Simulation of DPSK, QPSK and QAM generation schemes
10. Simulation of signal constellations of BPSK, QPSK and QAM
11. Simulation of ASK, FSK and BPSK detection schemes
12. Simulation of Linear Block and Cyclic error control coding schemes
13. Simulation of Convolutional coding scheme
14. Communication link simulation
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Construct and test different analog modulation and demodulation Applying
techniques
CO2 Construct and test different source coding methods such as Applying
sampling, TDM, PCM and DM as well as different line coding
schemes.
CO3 Simulate and analyze the performance of different digital Applying
modulation schemes, error control coding schemes and equalization
techniques.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 3 -- -- 2 2 2 -- 2 -- 3
CO 3 2 -- 1 1.67 -- -- 2 2.67 2 -- 2 1 3

EC8691 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To become familiar with the architecture, organization and the instruction set of an
Intel microprocessor 8086.
 To introduce internal Harvard architecture, built-in peripherals and memory structure
of 8051 microcontrollers.
 To expose the architecture of peripheral interfacing ICs and to use them to interface I/O
and Memory with Microprocessor and Microcontroller.
UNIT I THE 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Microprocessor architecture – Addressing modes - Instruction set and assembler directives –
Assembly language programming – Modular Programming - Linking and Relocation - Stacks -
Procedures – Macros – Interrupts and interrupt service routines – Byte and String
Manipulation.
UNIT II 8086 SYSTEM BUS STRUCTURE 9

8086 signals – Basic configurations – System bus timing –System design using 8086 – I/O
programming – Introduction to Multiprogramming – System Bus Structure – Multiprocessor
configurations – Coprocessor, Closely coupled and loosely Coupled configurations –
Introduction to advanced processors.
UNIT III I/O INTERFACING 9

Memory Interfacing and I/O interfacing - Parallel communication interface – Serial
communication interface – D/A and A/D Interface - Timer – Keyboard /display controller –
Interrupt controller – DMA controller – Programming and applications Case studies: Traffic
Light control, LED display , LCD display, Keyboard display interface and Alarm Controller.
UNIT IV MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture of 8051 – Special Function Registers(SFRs) - I/O Pins Ports and Circuits -
Instruction set - Addressing modes - Assembly language programming.
UNIT V INTERFACING MICROCONTROLLER 9

Programming 8051 Timers - Serial Port Programming - Interrupts Programming – LCD &
Keyboard Interfacing - ADC, DAC & Sensor Interfacing - External Memory Interface- Stepper
Motor and Waveform generation - Comparison of Microprocessor, Microcontroller, PIC and
ARM processors
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Write Assembly language programs for microprocessor by

CO1 applying digital concepts. Applying
Illustrate communication and bus interfacing concepts in
CO2 Understanding
multiprocessor environment.
Elaborate how different peripherals are interfaced with
CO3 Understanding
Microprocessor and Microcontroller for system design
Explain the architecture, instruction set and in-built peripherals
CO4
of 8051 Understanding
CO5 Design microcontroller based system for real time application. Applying

Text Books:
1. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn A.Gibson, “Microcomputer Systems: The 8086 / 8088 Family -
Architecture, Programming and Design”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
(TB1)
2. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin McKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller
and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C”, Second Edition, Pearson education,
2011. (TB2)
References:
1. Doughlas V.Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”,

TMH,2012
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 2 3 2
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 3 2
CO3 2 1 -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 3 2
CO4 2 1 -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 2 3 2
CO 2.4 1.4 -- 1 2 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 2 3 2

EC8095 VLSI Design LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To impart the basic concepts of MOS transistors- electrical characteristics and layout
design.
• To introduce the low power techniques for design of combinational and sequential
circuits design.
• To develop the capability and skill to design, implement and test digital VLSI circuits in
FPGAs
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOS TRANSISTOR 9

MOS Transistor- CMOS logic- Inverter- Pass Transistor- Transmission gate- Layout Design
Rules- Gate Layouts- Stick Diagrams- Long-Channel I-V Charters tics- C-V Charters tics- Non
ideal I-V Effects- DC Transfer characteristics- RC Delay Model- Elmore Delay- Linear Delay
Model- Logical effort- Parasitic Delay- Delay in Logic Gate- Scaling.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Circuit Families: Static CMOS - Ratioed Circuits - Cascode Voltage Switch Logic - Dynamic
Circuits - Pass Transistor Logic - Transmission Gates – Domino - Dual Rail Domino – CPL –
DCVSPG – DPL - Circuit Pitfalls.
Power: Dynamic Power- Static Power - Low Power Architecture
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Static latches and Registers - Dynamic latches and Registers - Pulse Registers - Sense
Amplifier Based Register – Pipelining - Schmitt Trigger - Monostable Sequential Circuits -
Astable Sequential Circuits.
Timing Issues : Timing Classification of Digital System- Synchronous Design.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS AND SUBSYSTEM 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths – Adders – Multipliers – Shifters – ALUs - power and
speed tradeoffs - Case Study: Design as a tradeoff.
Designing Memory and Array structures: Memory Architectures and Building Blocks - Memory
Core - Memory Peripheral Circuitry.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES AND TESTING 9

FPGA Building Block Architectures - FPGA Interconnect Routing Procedures - Design for
Testability: Ad Hoc Testing - Scan Design – BIST - IDDQ Testing - Design for Manufacturability
- Boundary Scan.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:

CO1 Explain the basic principles and characteristics of CMOS Understanding
transistors.
CO2 Construct combinational/sequential circuits using CMOS logic Applying
styles
CO3 Analyze the performance trade-offs involved in Analyzing
combinational/sequential circuits.

CO4 Illustrate building blocks used in microprocessors or digital ICs Understanding
and write their HDL code.
CO5 Discuss the architecture of FPGA, routing procedures and testing Understanding
methodologies.
Text Books:
1. 1.Neil H.E. Weste, David Money Harris “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, 4th Edition, Pearson , 2017 (UNIT I,II,V)
2. Jan M. Rabaey , Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated
Circuits:A Design perspective”, Second Edition , Pearson , 2016.(UNIT III,IV
References:
1. M.J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addisson Wesley, 1997

2. Sung-Mo kang, Yusuf leblebici, Chulwoo Kim “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits :
Analysis & Design”,4th edition McGraw Hill Education,2013
3. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: System On Chip”, Pearson Education, 2007
4. R.Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India 2005.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 1 2 - - - - 2 - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO5 2 1 - - - - - - 2 - - 1 3 2
CO 2.4 1.6 1 1.5 - - - - 2 - - 1 3 2

EC8652 Wireless Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To study the characteristic of wireless channel

 To understand the design of a cellular system
 To study the various digital signaling techniques and multipath mitigation techniques
 To understand the concepts of multiple antenna techniques
UNIT I WIRELESS CHANNELS 9

Large scale path loss – Path loss models: Free Space and Two-Ray models -Link Budget design
– Small scale fading- Parameters of mobile multipath channels – Time dispersion parameters-
Coherence bandwidth – Doppler spread & Coherence time, fading due to Multipath time delay
spread – flat fading – frequency selective fading – Fading due to Doppler spread – fast fading –
slow fading.
UNIT II CELLULAR ARCHITECTURE 9

Multiple Access techniques - FDMA, TDMA, CDMA – Capacity calculations–Cellular concept-
Frequency reuse - channel assignment- hand off- interference & system capacity- trunking &
grade of service – Coverage and capacity improvement.
UNIT III DIGITAL SIGNALING FOR FADING CHANNELS 9

Structure of a wireless communication link, Principles of Offset-QPSK, p/4-DQPSK, Minimum
Shift Keying, Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying, Error performance in fading channels, OFDM
principle – Cyclic prefix, Windowing, PAPR.
UNIT IV MULTIPATH MITIGATION TECHNIQUES 9

Equalisation – Adaptive equalization, Linear and Non-Linear equalization, Zero forcing and
LMS Algorithms. Diversity – Micro and Macro diversity, Diversity combining techniques, Error
probability in fading channels with diversity reception, Rake receiver.
UNIT V MULTIPLE ANTENNA TECHNIQUES 9

MIMO systems – spatial multiplexing -System model -Pre-coding - Beam forming - transmitter
diversity, receiver diversity- Channel state information-capacity in fading and non-fading
channels.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Describe the path loss models of wireless channels Understanding
Compute the characteristic parameters related to mobile multipath
CO2 Applying
channels
Illustrate the cellular concepts and multiple access techniques of
CO3 Understanding
mobile communication systems
Determine the BER performance of digital signaling schemes in
CO4 Applying
fading environment
Apply different equalization and diversity techniques to mitigate
CO5 Applying
multipath effects in wireless communication systems
Interpret the different MIMO techniques and analyze its performance
CO6 Understanding
in terms of capacity in fading and non- fading channels.

Text Books:
1. Rappaport,T.S., “Wireless communications”, Pearson Education, Second Edition,

2010.(UNIT I, II, IV)
2. Andreas.F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, John Wiley – India, 2006. (UNIT III,V)
References:
1. “Wireless Communication –Andrea Goldsmith”, Cambridge University Press, 2011

2. Van Nee, R. and Ramji Prasad, “OFDM for wireless multimedia communications”,
Artech House, 2000
3. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Upena Dalal, “Wireless Communication”, Oxford University Press, 2009.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO4 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO6 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- 3
CO 2.5 1.5 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1.75 -- -- 1 -- 3

MG8591 Principles of Management LTPC3003
Course Objectives
• To understand the evolution and functions of Management
• To learn the principles of management
• To illustrate the principles, concepts and importance of planning, organizing,
directing and controlling
• To learn the importance of the principles of management in an organization
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers -
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations , system
and contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship,
partnership, company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and
Environment – Current trends and issues in Management.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management ,
Career planning and management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behavior – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective
communication – Communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control
and performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Describe the evolution and functions of management Understanding
CO2 Illustrate the planning process in the organization Understanding
CO3 Explain the organizing and recruitment process in the organization Understanding
CO4 Discuss the motivational and leadership theories for effective Understanding
direction of organization
CO5 Summarize the budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques Understanding

Textbooks:
1. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, 10th Edition, Prentice Hall (India)
Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
References:
1. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of

Management” 7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1998.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.
CO/
PO
CO1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 1 2 -- -- --
CO2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 1 2 -- -- --
CO3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- 2 1 -- -- --
CO4 - - - - -- 1 - 1 2 1 1 -- -- --
CO5 - - - - 2 -- - 1 -- 1 3 -- -- --
CO - - - - 2 1 - 1 1.33 1.2 1.8 -- -- --

EC8651 Transmission Lines and RF Systems LTPC3003
Course Objectives
 To introduce the various types of transmission lines and its characteristics.

 To give thorough understanding about high frequency line, power and impedance
measurements
 To impart technical knowledge in impedance matching using smith chart.
 To introduce passive filters and basic knowledge of active RF components.
 To get acquaintance with RF system transceiver design
UNIT I TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY 9

General theory of Transmission lines - the transmission line - general solution - The infinite
line Wavelength, velocity of propagation - Waveform distortion - the distortion-less line Loading
and different methods of loading - Line not terminated in Z0 - Reflection coefficient –
calculation of current, voltage, power delivered and efficiency of transmission - Input and
transfer impedance Open and short circuited lines - reflection factor and reflection loss.
UNIT II HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LINES 9

Transmission line equations at radio frequencies - Line of Zero dissipation - Voltage and
current on the dissipation-less line, Standing Waves, Nodes, Standing Wave Ratio - Input
impedance of the dissipation-less line - Open and short circuited lines - Power and impedance
measurement on lines - Reflection losses - Measurement of VSWR and wavelength.
UNIT III IMPEDANCE MATCHING IN HIGH FREQUENCY LINES 9

Impedance matching: Quarter wave transformer - Impedance matching by stubs – Single stub
and double stub matching - Smith chart - Solutions of problems using Smith chart – Single
and double stub matching using Smith chart.
UNIT IV WAVEGUIDES 9
General Wave behaviour along uniform guiding structures – Transverse Electromagnetic
Waves, Transverse Magnetic Waves, Transverse Electric Waves – TM and TE Waves between
parallel plates. Field Equations in rectangular waveguides, TM and TE waves in rectangular
waveguides, Bessel Functions, TM and TE waves in Circular waveguides.
UNIT V RF SYSTEM DESIGN CONCEPTS 9

Active RF components: Semiconductor basics in RF, bipolar junction transistors, RF field effect
transistors, High electron mobility transistors Basic concepts of RF design, Mixers, Low noise
amplifiers, voltage control oscillators, Power amplifiers, transducer power gain and stability
considerations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Derive the general solution for transmission lines Applying
Calculate the characteristics of zero-dissipation line using
CO2 Applying
conventional and graphical methods.
Design impedance matching networks for unmatched transmission
CO3 Applying
lines by conventional and graphical methods
CO4 Explain the characteristics of EM wave propagation in waveguides Understanding
Illustrate working of semiconductors in Radio Frequency and RF
CO5 Understanding
system design concepts

Text Books:
1. John D Ryder, ― “Networks, lines and fields”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India, 2015.
(UNIT I- IV).
2. Mathew M. Radmanesh, ”Radio Frequency &Microwave Electronic”, Pearson Education
Asia, Second Edition,2002. (UNIT V)
References:
1. Reinhold Ludwig and Powel Bretchko, “RF Circuit Design – Theory and Applications”,
Pearson Education Asia, First Edition,2001.
2. D. K. Misra, “Radio Frequency and Microwave Communication Circuits- Analysis and
Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
3. E.C.Jordan and K.G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
4. G.S.N Raju, "Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines Pearson Education,
First edition 2005.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 1 3
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 3
CO5 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 2 3
CO 2.6 1.6 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- 1 1.2 3

EC8681 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives
 To introduce basic concepts of 8086 Microprocessor & 8051 Microcontroller and learn
the design aspects of I/O and memory interfacing circuits required to design a system
for real-time applications.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
8086 Programs using kits and MASM
1. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
2. Move a data block without overlap
3. Code conversion, decimal arithmetic and Matrix operations.
4. Floating point operations, string manipulations, sorting and searching
5. Password checking, Print RAM size and system date
6. Counters and Time Delay
Peripherals and Interfacing Experiments
7. Traffic light control
8. Stepper motor control
9. Digital clock
10. Key board and Display
11. Printer status
12. Serial interface and Parallel interface
13. A/D and D/A interface and Waveform Generation
8051 Experiments using kits and MASM
14. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
15. Square and Cube program, Find 2‟s complement of a number
16. Unpacked BCD to ASCII
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Apply basic concepts of digital fundamentals to program 8086
CO1 Applying
microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller.
Demonstrate working knowledge of memory, I/O devices, timers, Applying
CO2
interrupts, digital-to-analog and analog-to-digital converters.
Develop expertise in assembly language and high level Applying
CO3
programming to design a system for real-time application.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 1 -- 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 -- 2 1 -- 2 3 2 -- 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 1 -- 2 2 -- 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
CO 3 2 1 -- 2 1.5 -- 2 3 2 1 2 3 2

EC8661 VLSI Design Laboratory LTPC 0042
Course Objectives:
This lab course is intended

 To impart hands on experience on Xilinx Zedboard and Cadence Tool to design and
Implement analog and digital integrated circuits.
Part I: Digital System Design using HDL & FPGA (24 Periods)
1. Design an Adder (Min 8 Bit) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
2. Design a Multiplier (4 Bit Min) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
3. Design an ALU using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and implement by
Xilinx/Altera FPGA
4. Design a Universal Shift Register using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software
and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
5. Design Finite State Machine (Moore/Mealy) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera
Software and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
6. Design Memories using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and implement
by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Compare pre-synthesis and post-synthesis simulation for experiments 1 to 6.
Part-II Digital Circuit Design (24 Periods)

7. Design and simulate a CMOS inverter using digital flow
8. Design and simulate a CMOS Basic Gates & Flip-Flops
9. Design and simulate a 4-bit synchronous counter using a Flip-Flops
Manual/Automatic Layout Generation and Post Layout Extraction for experiments 7 to 9 .
Analyze the power, area and timing for experiments 7 to 9 by performing Pre Layout and Post
Layout Simulations
Part-III Analog Circuit Design (12 Periods

10. Design and Simulate a CMOS Inverting Amplifier.
11. Design and Simulate basic Common Source, Common Gate and Common Drain
Amplifiers.
Analyze the input impedance, output impedance, gain and bandwidth for experiments 10
and 11 by performing Schematic Simulations.
12. Design and simulate simple 5 transistor differential amplifier. Analyze Gain, Bandwidth
and CMRR by performing Schematic Simulations
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Design and implement digital logic circuits using EDA tools Applying
Design, Simulate and extract the layouts of analog circuits using EDA
CO2 Applying
tools.

CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 - 1 3 - - 2 3 2 - 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 - 1 3 - - 2 3 2 - 2 3 2
CO 3 2 - 1 3 - - 2 3 2 - 2 3 2

EC8611 Technical Seminar LTPC0021
Course Objectives:
• To encourage the students to explore new perspectives in an emerging field such as

industry and educational sectors
• to use the seminars to prepare and present technological and industrial advancements
• To encourage the students to use various teaching aids such as overhead projectors,
power point presentation and demonstrative models.
Course Outcomes:

CO1 Analyze the recent technological advancements and present it Evaluating
effectively
CO2 Apply ICT tools effectively for the report preparation and Applying
presentation
CO/
PO
CO1 3 3 2 3 -- 3 3 3 1 3 -- 3 3 3
CO2 -- -- -- -- 3 -- -- -- 1 3 -- 3 -- --
CO 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 -- 3 3 3

HS8581 Professional Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives
 To enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students

 To orient the students towards grooming as a professional
 To make them employability graduates
 To envelop confidence and help them attend interviews successfully
UNIT I 6
Introduction to Soft Skills– Hard skills & soft skills – employability and career Skills—
Grooming as a professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current
Affairs
UNIT II 6
Self-Introduction-organizing the material – Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing
the topic – answering questions – individual presentation practice – presenting the visuals
effectively – 5 minute presentations
UNIT III 6
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group
dynamics – brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to
improve GD skills
UNIT IV 6
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews
UNIT V 6
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress-
networking professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-
developing a long-term career plan-making career changes
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Demonstrate effective use of teamwork skills to complete

CO1 Applying
communication tasks
Use rhetorical strategies to produce persuasive research reports
CO2 Applying
and presentations
Text Books:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Course book for Undergraduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient Black Swan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.

References:
1. Butterfield, Jeff. Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Black swan:
Hyderabad, 2015
3. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. Orient Black Swan:
Hyderabad, 2016.
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford
University Press: Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharan & et.al. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
CO/
PO
CO1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3 3 -- 3 -- --
CO2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3 3 -- 3 -- --

EC8701 Antennas and Microwave Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To enable the student to understand the basic principles in antenna and microwave
system design
• To enhance the student knowledge in the area of various antenna designs.
• To enhance the student knowledge in the area of microwave components and antenna
for practical applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROWAVE SYSTEMS AND ANTENNAS 9

Microwave frequency bands, Physical concept of radiation, Near- and far-field regions, Fields
and Power Radiated by an Antenna, Antenna Pattern Characteristics, Antenna Gain and
Efficiency, Aperture Efficiency and Effective Area, Antenna Noise Temperature and G/T,
Impedance matching, Friis transmission equation, Link budget and link margin, Noise
Characterization of a microwave receiver.
UNIT II RADIATION MECHANISMS AND DESIGN ASPECTS 9

Radiation Mechanisms of Linear Wire and Loop antennas, Aperture antennas, Reflector
antennas, Microstrip antennas and Frequency independent antennas, Design considerations
and applications.
UNIT III ANTENNA ARRAYS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Two-element array, Array factor, Pattern multiplication, uniformly spaced arrays with uniform
and non-uniform excitation amplitudes, Smart antennas.
UNIT IV PASSIVE AND ACTIVE MICROWAVE DEVICES 9

Microwave Passive components: Directional Coupler, Power Divider, Magic Tee, attenuator,
resonator, Principles of Microwave Semiconductor Devices: Gunn Diodes, IMPATT diodes,
Schottky Barrier diodes, PIN diodes, Microwave tubes: Klystron, TWT, Magnetron.
UNIT V MICROWAVE DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9

Impedance transformation, Impedance Matching, Microwave Filter Design, RF and Microwave
Amplifier Design, Microwave Power amplifier Design, Low Noise Amplifier Design, Microwave
Mixer Design, Microwave Oscillator Design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Identify the parameters of microwave systems and antenna such
as radiation pattern, directivity, antenna gain, effective area, Friis
CO1 Applying
transmission equation etc and also to perform the link budget
analysis.
Determine the radiation characteristics of wire antennas and array
CO2 antennas by mathematically formulating the Electric and Magnetic Applying
field emissions.
Design aperture antennas, reflector antennas and frequency
CO3 independent antennas. Also explain the principle microstrip Applying
antennas and smart antennas.
Explain the working of microwave passive components and
CO4 Understanding
microwave semiconductor devices.
Design subsystems of microwave front-end for the given
CO5 Applying
application.

Textbooks:
1. John D Krauss, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S. Khan, "Antennas and Wave
Propagation” Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006. (UNIT I, II, III)
2. David M. Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Fourth Edition, Wiley India, 2012. (UNIT I,
IV,V)
References:
1. Constantine A.Balanis, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, Third edition, John
Wiley India Pvt Ltd., 2005.
2. R.E.Collin, "Foundations for Microwave Engineering", Second edition, IEEE Press, 2001
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO 2.8 1.8 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3

EC8751 Optical Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To develop a fundamental understanding on optical communication

• To impart knowledge about the different kind of losses, signal distortion in fibers.
• To understand operation of the various optical sources and detectors.
• To introduce various performance measurement of the fiber optical receivers and
various coupling techniques
• To gain knowledge on optical network.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL FIBERS 9

Introduction-general optical fiber communication system- basic optical laws and definitions-
optical modes and configurations -mode analysis for optical propagation through fibers-modes
in planar wave guide-modes in cylindrical optical fiber-transverse electric and transverse
magnetic modes- fiber materials-fiber fabrication techniques-fiber optic cables-classification of
optical fiber-single mode fiber-graded index fiber.
UNIT II TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTIC OF OPTICAL FIBER 9

Attenuation-absorption --scattering losses-bending losses-core and cladding losses-signal
dispersion –inter symbol interference and bandwidth-intra model dispersion-material
dispersion- waveguide dispersion-polarization mode dispersion-intermodal dispersion-
dispersion optimization of single mode fiber-characteristics of single mode fiber-R-I Profile-
cutoff wave length-dispersion calculation-mode field diameter.
UNIT III OPTICAL SOURCES AND DETECTORS 9

Sources: Intrinsic and extrinsic material-direct and indirect band gaps-LED-LED structures-
surface emitting LED-Edge emitting LED-quantum efficiency and LED power-light source
materials-modulation of LED-LASER diodes-modes and threshold conditions-Rate equations-
external quantum efficiency-resonant frequencies-structures and radiation patterns-single
mode laser-external modulation-temperature effort. Detectors: PIN photo detector-Avalanche
photo diodes-Photo detector noise-noise sources-SNR-detector response time-Avalanche
multiplication noise-temperature effects-comparisons of photo detectors.
UNIT IV OPTICAL RECEIVER, MEASUREMENTS AND COUPLING 9

Fundamental receiver operation-preamplifiers-digital signal transmission-error sources-Front
end amplifiers-digital receiver performance-probability of error-receiver sensitivity-quantum
limit. Optical power measurement-attenuation measurement-dispersion measurement- Fiber
Numerical Aperture Measurements- Fiber cutoff Wave length Measurements- Fiber diameter
measurements-Source to Fiber Power Launching-Lensing Schemes for Coupling Management-
Fiber to Fiber Joints-LED Coupling to Single Mode Fibers-Fiber Splicing-Optical Fiber
connectors.
UNIT V OPTICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS 9

System design consideration Point – to –Point link design –Link power budget –rise time
budget, WDM –Passive DWDM Components-Elements of optical networks-SONET/SDH-Optical
Interfaces-SONET/SDH Rings and Networks-High speed light wave Links-OADM configuration-
Optical ETHERNET-Soliton.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
Determine the parameters associated with the light propagation
CO1 Applying
inside the optical fiber
Evaluate the propagation characteristics of an optical signal in
CO2 different types of fibers Applying
Explain the characteristics of optical components and their usage in

CO3 Understanding
optical communication network
CO4 Compare the characteristics of fiber optic receivers Understanding
Describe the principles of operation of SONET, WDM network,
CO5 Applying
access network and to estimate power budget for optical network.
Text Books:
1. P Chakrabarti, "Optical Fiber Communication”, McGraw Hill Education (India)Private

Limited, 2016 (UNIT I, II, III)
2. Gred Keiser,"Optical Fiber Communication”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited. Fifth Edition, Reprint 2013. (UNIT I, IV, V)
References:
1. John M.Senior, “Optical fiber communication”, Pearson Education, second

edition.2007.
2. Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Networks”, Second Edition, Elsevier , 2004.
3. J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
4. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber-optic communication systems”, third edition, John Wiley &
sons, 2004.
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 1 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- 3
CO3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 3
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- 3
CO 2.6 1.6 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 1 3

EC8791 Embedded and Real Time System LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To introduce basic concepts of embedded computing systems design and ARM

processors.
• To develop knowledge in embedded computing platform design, development,
compilation, optimization and testing strategies.
• To impart knowledge of Operating System concepts to model real-time applications and
to demonstrate the real-time embedded projects
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Complex systems and micro processors– Embedded system design process –Design example:
Model train controller- Design methodologies- Design flows - Requirement Analysis –
Specifications-System analysis and architecture design – Quality Assurance techniques -
Designing with computing platforms – consumer electronics architecture – platform-level
performance analysis.
UNIT II ARM PROCESSOR AND PERIPHERALS 9

ARM Architecture Versions – ARM Architecture – Instruction Set – Stacks and Subroutines –
Features of the LPC 214X Family – Peripherals – The Timer Unit – Pulse Width Modulation Unit
– UART – Block Diagram of ARM9 and ARM Cortex M3 MCU.
UNIT III EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 9

Components for embedded programs- Models of programs- Assembly, linking and loading –
compilation techniques- Program level performance analysis – Software performance
optimization – Program level energy and power analysis and optimization – Analysis and
optimization of program size- Program validation and testing.
UNIT IV REAL TIME SYSTEMS 9

Structure of a Real Time System –– Estimating program run times – Task Assignment and
Scheduling – Fault Tolerance Techniques – Reliability, Evaluation – Clock Synchronisation.
UNIT V PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9

Introduction – Multiple tasks and multiple processes – Multirate systems- Preemptive real time
operating systems- Priority based scheduling- Interprocess communication mechanisms –
Evaluating operating system performance- power optimization strategies for processes –
Example Real time operating systems-POSIX-Windows CE. - Distributed embedded systems –
MPSoCs and shared memory multiprocessors. – Design Example - Audio player, Engine control
unit – Video accelerator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Explain the design methodologies employed in embedded system
CO1 Understanding
design with an example.
Describe ARM architecture and develop an application with built-in
CO2 Understanding
peripherals
Elaborate the program development tools, performance analysis and
CO3 optimization techniques at program level used in embedded system Understanding
development.

Explain the structure of Real-Time Systems with effective tasks
CO4 Understanding
assignment and scheduling.
Describe processes and operating system of Real Time Embedded
CO5 Understanding
systems for different applications.
Text Books:
1. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computing System

Design”, Third Edition ―Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.
(UNIT I, II, III, V)
7. Jane W.S.Liu, “Real Time Systems”, Pearson Education, Third Indian Reprint,
2003.(UNIT IV)
References:
1. Lyla B.Das, “Embedded Systems: An Integrated Approach” Pearson Education, 2013. 2.

Jonathan W.Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Third
Edition Cengage Learning, 2012.
8. David. E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression,
AddisonWesley Professional, 2007.
9. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From
Design to Networking with C/C++”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
10. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill
1997
11. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts”, Design & Programming‖,
Dream Tech Press, 2005.
12. Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 2004.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - - 1 2 2
CO3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - - 1 2 2
CO4 2 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 2 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO 2 1 1 - - - 1 - 1 - - 1 2 2

EC8702 Ad Hoc and Wireless Sensor Networks LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To make the students to learn Ad hoc network and Sensor Network fundamentals
 To provide an Understanding of the different routing protocols
 To provide an in-depth knowledge on sensor network architecture and design issues
 To impart an understanding of the transport layer and security issues possible in Ad
hoc and Sensor networks
 To give an exposure to mote programming platforms and tools
UNIT I AD HOC NETWORKS – INTRODUCTION AND ROUTING PROTOCOLS 9

Elements of Ad hoc Wireless Networks, Issues in Ad hoc wireless networks, Example
commercial applications of Ad hoc networking, Ad hoc wireless Internet, Issues in Designing a
Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Classifications of Routing Protocols, Table
Driven Routing Protocols - Destination Sequenced Distance Vector (DSDV), On–Demand
Routing protocols –Ad hoc On–Demand Distance Vector Routing (AODV).
UNIT II SENSOR NETWORKS – INTRODUCTION & ARCHITECTURES 9

Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks, Enabling Technologies for Wireless Sensor Networks,
WSN application examples, Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components, Energy
Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Network Architecture - Sensor Network Scenarios, Transceiver
Design Considerations, Optimization Goals and Figures of Merit.
UNIT III WSN NETWORKING CONCEPTS AND PROTOCOLS 9

MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks, Low Duty Cycle Protocols and Wakeup Concepts -
S-MAC, The Mediation Device Protocol, Contention based protocols - PAMAS, Schedule based
protocols – LEACH, IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol, Routing Protocols- Energy Efficient Routing,
Challenges and Issues in Transport layer protocol.
UNIT IV SENSOR NETWORK SECURITY 9

Network Security Requirements, Issues and Challenges in Security Provisioning, Network
Security Attacks, Layer wise attacks in wireless sensor networks, possible solutions for
jamming, tampering, black hole attack, flooding attack. Key Distribution and Management,
Secure Routing – SPINS, reliability requirements in sensor networks.
UNIT V SENSOR NETWORK PLATFORMS AND TOOLS 9

Sensor Node Hardware – Berkeley Motes, Programming Challenges, Node-level software
platforms – TinyOS, nesC, CONTIKIOS, Node-level Simulators – NS2 and its extension to
sensor networks, COOJA, TOSSIM, Programming beyond individual nodes – State centric
programming.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Interpret the fundamentals, issues and challenges of Ad-hoc wireless

CO1 Understanding
networks and the significant routing algorithms
Illustrate the architecture and enabling technologies of wireless
CO2 sensor Understanding
networksthe various networking concepts of transport layer and MAC
Explain
CO3 Understanding
layer
protocols

Discuss the security issues, challenges and possible solutions for
CO4 Understanding
different attacks in wireless sensor networks
Apply the mote programming platforms and tools for building basic
CO5 Applying
modules with the OS used in wireless sensor networks
Text Books:
1. C. Siva Ram Murthy and B. S. Manoj, ―Ad Hoc Wireless Networks Architectures and
Protocols‖, Prentice Hall, PTR, 2004. (UNIT I)
2. Holger Karl , Andreas willig, ―Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks‖,
John wiley publication, Jan 2006.(UNIT II-V)
References:
1. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, ―Wireless Sensor Networks: an information processing

approach‖, Elsevier publication, 2004.
2. Charles E. Perkins, ―Ad Hoc Networking‖, Addison Wesley, 2000.
3. I.F. Akyildiz, W. Su, Sankarasubramaniam, E. Cayirci, ―Wireless sensor networks: a
survey‖, computer networks, Elsevier, 2002, 394 - 422.
CO/
PO
CO1 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3
CO2 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 2
CO3 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3
CO4 2 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3
CO5 3 2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- 3
CO 2.2 1.2 -- 1 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- 1 1 3

EC8711 Embedded Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
This lab course is intended:
 To impart hands on experience on CC32OO Launchpad to build simple to Real-time

embedded systems using the Code Composer Studio and Energia Tools
1. Study of ARM evaluation system

2. Interfacing ADC and DAC.
3. Interfacing LED and PWM.
4. Interfacing real time clock and serial port.
5. Interfacing keyboard and LCD.
6. Interfacing EPROM and interrupt.
7. Mailbox.
8. Interrupt performance characteristics of ARM and FPGA.
9. Flashing of LEDS.
10. Interfacing stepper motor and temperature sensor.
11. Implementing zigbee protocol with ARM.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Demonstrate interfacing of memory and I/O devices with ARM

CO1 Applying
Processors
Demonstrate communication between networking devices using UART
CO2 Applying
and Zigbee protocol
CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- 2 3 1 -- 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- 2 3 1 -- 2 2 3

EC8761 Advanced Communication Laboratory LTPC0042
Course Objectives:
 The student should be made understand the working principle of optical

sources, detector, fibers and microwave components
 To develop understanding of the experimental approach in analyzing the
performance of digital wireless communication
OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS
1. Measurement of connector, bending and fiber attenuation losses.
2. Numerical Aperture and Mode Characteristics of Fibers.
3. DC Characteristics of LED and PIN Photo diode.
4. Fiber optic Analog and Digital Link Characterization - frequency response(analog), eye
diagram and BER (digital)
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION EXPERIMENTS
1. Wireless Channel Simulation including fading and Doppler effects
2. Simulation of Channel Estimation, Synchronization & Equalization techniques
3. Analyzing Impact of Pulse Shaping and Matched Filtering using Software Defined
Radios
4. OFDM Signal Transmission and Reception using Software Defined Radios
MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS
1. VSWR and Impedance Measurement and Impedance Matching
2. Characterization of Directional Couplers, Isolators, Circulators
3. Gunn Diode Characteristics
4. Microwave IC – Filter Characteristics
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Construct simple optical link and calculate the performance of
CO1 Applying
various optical components
Construct Microwave bench and determine the parameters of
CO2 Applying
passive and active microwave devices
Implement OFDM transmission link also simulate different wireless
CO3 Applying
communication techniques and analyze their system performance

CO/
PO
CO1 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 -- 1 -- -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 1 3
CO 3 2 -- 1 2 -- -- 2 3 2 -- 2 1 3

EC8811 Project Work L T P C 0 0 20 10
Objective:
 To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and
literature review till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in
preparing project reports and to face reviews and viva voce examination.
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department
under the guidance of a faculty member and prepare a comprehensive project report after
completing the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is
evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by
the Head of the Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project
work is evaluated based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and
internal examiners constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 180 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The students will be able to analyze, design, integrate and

CO1 simulate/implement Electronic/Communication systems for real Creating
world applications
CO/
PO
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Professional Electives
Detailed Syllabi
CS8392 Object Oriented Programming LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts and basic characteristics of Java
 To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces
 To define exceptions and use I/O streams
 To develop a java application with threads and generics classes
 To design and build simple Graphical User Interfaces
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 10

Object Oriented Programming - Abstraction – objects and classes - Encapsulation- Inheritance
- Polymorphism- OOP in Java – Characteristics of Java – The Java Environment - Java Source
File -Structure – Compilation. Fundamental Programming Structures in Java – Defining classes
in Java – constructors, methods -access specifiers - static members -Comments, Data Types,
Variables, Operators, Control Flow, Arrays , Packages - JavaDoc comments.
UNIT II INHERITANCE AND INTERFACES 9

Inheritance – Super classes- sub classes –Protected members – constructors in sub classes- the
Object class – abstract classes and methods- final methods and classes – Interfaces – defining
an interface, implementing interface, differences between classes and interfaces and extending
interfaces - Object cloning -inner classes, Array Lists - Strings
UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING AND I/O 9

Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions - built in exceptions,
creating own exception, Stack Trace Elements. Input / Output Basics – Streams – Byte
streams and Character streams – Reading and Writing Console – Reading and Writing Files
UNIT IV MULTITHREADING AND GENERIC PROGRAMMING 8

Differences between multi-threading and multitasking, thread life cycle, creating threads,
synchronizing threads, Inter thread communication, daemon threads, thread groups. Generic
Programming – Generic classes – generic methods – Bounded Types – Restrictions and
Limitations.
UNIT V EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING 9

Graphics programming - Frame – Components - working with 2D shapes - Using color, fonts,
and images - Basics of event handling - event handlers - adapter classes - actions - mouse
events - AWT event hierarchy - Introduction to Swing – layout management - Swing
Components – Text Fields , Text Areas – Buttons- Check Boxes – Radio Buttons – Lists-
choices- Scrollbars – Windows –Menus – Dialog Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Develop Java programs using OOP principles
 Develop Java programs with the concepts inheritance and interfaces
 Build Java applications using exceptions and I/O streams  Develop Java applications
with threads and generics classes
 Develop interactive Java programs using swings
Text Books:
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java The complete reference”, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education,
2011.

2. Cay S. Horstmann, Gary cornell, “Core Java Volume –I Fundamentals”, 9th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, “Java SE 8 for programmers”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2015.
2. Steven Holzner, “Java 2 Black book”, Dreamtech press, 2011.
3. Timothy Budd, “Understanding Object-oriented programming with Java”, Updated
Edition, Pearson Education, 2000.
EC8073 Medical Electronics LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To gain knowledge about the various physiological parameters both electrical and non
electrical and the methods of recording and also the method of transmitting these
parameters
 To study about the various assist devices used in the hospitals
 To gain knowledge about equipment used for physical medicine and the various
recently developed diagnostic and therapeutic techniques.
UNIT I ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO-POTENTIAL RECORDING 9

Sources of bio medical signals, Bio-potentials, Biopotential electrodes, biological amplifiers,
ECG, EEG, EMG, PCG, typical waveforms and signal characteristics
UNIT II BIO-CHEMICAL AND NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENT 9

pH, PO2, PCO2, Colorimeter, Blood flow meter, Cardiac output, respiratory, blood pressure,
temperature and pulse measurement, Blood Cell Counters.
UNIT III ASSIST DEVICES 9

Cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Dialyser, Ventilators, Magnetic Resonance Imaging
Systems, Ultrasonic Imaging Systems.
UNIT IV PHYSICAL MEDICINE AND BIOTELEMETRY 9

Diathermies- Shortwave, ultrasonic and microwave type and their applications, Surgical
Diathermy, Biotelemetry.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 9

Telemedicine, Insulin Pumps, Radio pill, Endomicroscopy, Brain machine interface, Lab on a
chip.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course, the student should be able to:

 Know the human body electro- physiological parameters and recording of bio-
potentials
 Comprehend the non-electrical physiological parameters and their measurement –
body temperature, blood pressure, pulse, blood cell count, blood flow meter etc.
 Interpret the various assist devices used in the hospitals viz. pacemakers,
defibrillators, dialyzers and ventilators
 Comprehend physical medicine methods eg. ultrasonic, shortwave, microwave surgical
diathermies , and bio-telemetry principles and methods

 Know about recent trends in medical instrumentation
Text Book:
1. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2007. (UNIT I – V)
References:
1. Khandpur, R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, TATA Mc Graw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2003.
2. John G.Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, 3rd Edition, Wiley
IndiaEdition, 2007
3. Joseph J.Carr and John M.Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2004.
CS8493 Operating Systems LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the basic concepts and functions of operating systems.
 To understand Processes and Threads
 To analyze Scheduling algorithms.
 To understand the concept of Deadlocks.
 To analyze various memory management schemes.
 To understand I/O management and File systems.
 To be familiar with the basics of Linux system and Mobile OS like iOS and Android.
UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 7

Computer System Overview-Basic Elements, Instruction Execution, Interrupts, Memory
Hierarchy, Cache Memory, Direct Memory Access, Multiprocessor and Multicore Organization.
Operating system overview-objectives and functions, Evolution of Operating System.-
Computer System Organization Operating System Structure and Operations- System Calls,
System Programs, OS Generation and System Boot.
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 11

Processes - Process Concept, Process Scheduling, Operations on Processes, Interprocess
Communication; CPU Scheduling - Scheduling criteria, Scheduling algorithms, Multiple-
processor scheduling, Real time scheduling; Threads- Overview, Multithreading models,
Threading issues; Process Synchronization - The critical-section problem, Synchronization
hardware, Mutex locks, Semaphores, Classic problems of synchronization, Critical regions,
Monitors; Deadlock - System model, Deadlock characterization, Methods for handling
deadlocks, Deadlock prevention, Deadlock avoidance, Deadlock detection, Recovery from
deadlock.
UNIT III STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9

Main Memory – Background, Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging, Segmentation,
Segmentation with paging, 32 and 64 bit architecture Examples; Virtual Memory –
Background, Demand Paging, Page Replacement, Allocation, Thrashing; Allocating Kernel
Memory, OS Examples.
UNIT IV FILE SYSTEMS AND I/O SYSTEMS 9

Mass Storage system – Overview of Mass Storage Structure, Disk Structure, Disk Scheduling
and Management, swap space management; File-System Interface - File concept, Access

methods, Directory Structure, Directory organization, File system mounting, File Sharing and
Protection; File System Implementation- File System Structure, Directory implementation,
Allocation Methods, Free Space Management, Efficiency and Performance, Recovery; I/O
Systems – I/O Hardware, Application I/O interface, Kernel I/O subsystem, Streams,
Performance.
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9

Linux System - Design Principles, Kernel Modules, Process Management, Scheduling, Memory
Management, Input-Output Management, File System, Interprocess Communication; Mobile
OS - iOS and Android - Architecture and SDK Framework, Media Layer, Services Layer, Core
OS Layer, File System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:  Analyze various scheduling
algorithms.
 Understand deadlock, prevention and avoidance algorithms.
 Compare and contrast various memory management schemes.
 Understand the functionality of file systems.
 Perform administrative tasks on Linux Servers and compare iOS and Android
Operating Systems.
Text Book:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, “Operating System
Concepts”, 9th Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012.
References:
1. Ramaz Elmasri, A. Gil Carrick, David Levine, “Operating Systems – A Spiral
Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2010.
2. Achyut S.Godbole, Atul Kahate, “Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
4. Gary Nutt, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Harvey M. Deital, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
6. Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati, “Understanding the Linux kernel”, 3rd edition,
O‘Reilly, 2005.
7. Neil Smyth, “iPhone iOS 4 Development Essentials – Xcode”, Fourth Edition, Payload
media, 2011.
EC8074 Robotics and Automation LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the basic concepts associated with the design, functioning,
applications and social aspects of robots
 To study about the electrical drive systems and sensors used in robotics for various
applications
 To learn about analyzing robot kinematics, dynamics through different methodologies
and study various design aspects of robot arm manipulator and end-effector
 To learn about various motion planning techniques and the associated control
architecture
 To understand the implications of AI and other trending concepts of robotics

UNIT I FOUNDATION FOR BEGINNERS 9
Introduction -- brief history, definition, anatomy, types, classification, specification and need
based applications; role and need of robots for the immediate problems of the society, future of
mankind and automation-ethical issues; industrial scenario local and global, case studies on
mobile robot research platform and industrial serial arm manipulator.
UNIT II BUILDING BLOCKS OF A ROBOT 9

Types of electric motors - DC, Servo, Stepper; specification, drives for motors - speed &
direction control and circuitry, Selection criterion for actuators, direct drives, non-traditional
actuators; Sensors for localization, navigation, obstacle avoidance and path planning in known
and unknown environments – optical, inertial, thermal, chemical, biosensor, other common
sensors; Case study on choice of sensors and actuators for maze solving robot and self driving
cars
UNIT III KINEMATICS, DYNAMICS AND DESIGN OF ROBOTS & END-EFFECTORS 9

Robot kinematics - Geometric approach for 2R, 3R manipulators, homogenous transformation
using D-H representation, kinematics of WMR, Lagrangian formulation for 2R robot dynamics;
Mechanical design aspects of a 2R manipulator, WMR; End-effector - common types and design
case study.
UNIT IV NAVIGATION, PATH PLANNING AND CONTROL ARCHITECTURE 9

Mapping & Navigation – SLAM, Path planning for serial manipulators; types of control
architectures - Cartesian control, Force control and hybrid position/force control, Behaviour
based control, application of Neural network, fuzzy logic, optimization algorithms for navigation
problems, programming methodologies of a robot
UNIT V AI AND OTHER RESEARCH TRENDS IN ROBOTICS 9

Application of Machine learning - AI, Expert systems; Tele-robotics and Virtual Reality, Micro &
Nano robots, Unmanned vehicles, Cognitive robotics, Evolutionary robotics, Humanoids
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The student should be able to:
 Explain the concepts of industrial robots in terms of classification, specifications and
coordinate systems, along with the need and application of robots & automation
 Examine different sensors and actuators for applications like maze solving and self-
driving cars.
 Design a 2R robot & an end-effector and solve the kinematics and dynamics of motion
for robots.
 Explain navigation and path planning techniques along with the control architectures
adopted for robot motion planning.
 Describe the impact and progress in AI and other research trends in the field of
robotics
Text Books:
1. Saeed. B. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics, Analysis, system, Applications”, Pearson
educations, 2002
2. Roland Siegwart, Illah Reza Nourbakhsh, “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile
Robots”, MIT Press, 2011
References:
1. Richard David Klafter, Thomas A. Chmielewski, Michael Negin, “Robotic engineering:
an integrated approach”, Prentice Hall, 1989

3. Craig, J. J., “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control”, 2nd Edition, Addison-
Wesley, 1989.
4. K.S. Fu, R.C. Gonzalez and C.S.G. Lee, “Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence”, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
5. Wesley E Snyder R, Industrial Robots, “Computer Interfacing and Control”, Prentice
Hall International Edition, 1988.
6. Robin Murphy, “Introduction to AI Robotics”, MIT Press, 2000
7. Ronald C. Arkin, “Behavior-based Robotics”, MIT Press, 1998
8. N. P. Padhy, “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems”, Oxford University Press,
2005
9. Stefano Nolfi, Dario Floreano, “Evolutionary Robotics – The Biology, Intelligence and
Technology of Self–Organizing Machines (Intelligent Robotics and Autonomous Agents
series)”, MIT Press, 2004.
EC8075 Nanotechnology and Applications LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To provide a broad view of the nascent field of nanoscience and nanotechnology to
undergraduates
 To explore the basics of nanomaterial synthesis and characterization.
 To introduce the applications of nanotechnology
UINI I INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Basic Structure of Nanoparticles- Kinetics in Nanostructured Materials- Zero dimensional, size
and shape of nanoparticles; one-dimensional and two dimensional nanostructures- clusters of
metals and semiconductors, bio nano-particles.
UNIT Ii FABRICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Types of Nanomaterials (Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,
Nanotubes); Gas, liquid, and solid –phase synthesis of nanomaterials; Lithography techniques
(Photolithography, Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography); Thin film deposition;
Electrospinning. Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.
UNIT III PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance; Methods for the measurement of
nanomaterials; Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM. Confocal and TIRF
imaging.
UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES 9

Carbon Nanotubes, Fullerenes, Nanowires, Quantum Dots. Applications of nanostructures.
Reinforcement in Ceramics, Drug delivery, Giant magnetoresistance, etc. Cells response to
Nanostructures.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Nano electronics, Nano sensors, Nanotechnology in Diagnostics applications, Environmental
and Agricultural Applications of nanotechnology, Nano technology for energy systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Describe the basic science behind the properties of materials.
 Interpret the creation, characterization, and manipulation of nanoscale materials.

 Comprehend the exciting applications of nanotechnology at the leading edge of
scientific research
 Apply their knowledge of nanotechnology to identify how they can be exploited for new
applications.
Text Books:
1. Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology by Bharat Bhushan 2004.(Unit I – V)
2. Encyclopedia of Nanotechnology - Hari Singh Nalwa 2004. (Unit I – V)
References:
1. “Nanomaterials, Nanotechnologies and Design: an Introduction to Engineers and
Architects”, D. Michael Ashby, Paulo Ferreira, Daniel L. Schodek, Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2009.
2. Handbook of Nanophase and Nanostructured Materials (in four volumes), Eds: Z.L.
Wang, Y. Liu, Z. Zhang, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers, 2003.
3. Handbook of Nanoceramics and their Based Nanodevices (Vol. 2) Edited by Tseung-
Yuen Tseng and Hari Singh Nalwa, American Scientific Publishers.
GE8074 Human Rights LTPC3003
Course Objective:
 To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.
UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights –
Natural, Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural
Rights; collective / Solidarity Rights.
UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864.
Universal Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.
UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.
UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabled
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National
and State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO‘s, Media, Educational
Institutions, Social Movements.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcome:
 Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.
References:
1. Kapoor S.K., “Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws”, Central Law
Agency, Allahabad, 2014.

2. Chandra U., “Human Rights”, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, “The Future of Human Rights”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
GE8077 Total Quality Management LTPC3003
Course Objective:
 To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of
product and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of
Deming, Juran and Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation,
Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee
involvement - Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier
partnership - Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts,
Methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking -
Reason to bench mark, Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss
function - TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration- ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO
14001—Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcome:
 The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.
Text Book:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant
Urdhwareshe and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson
Education Asia, Revised Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
References:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases",
Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.

3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd., 2006.
4. ISO9001-2015 standards
CS8792 Cryptography and Network Security LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand Cryptography Theories, Algorithms and Systems.
 To understand necessary Approaches and Techniques to build protection mechanisms
in order to secure computer networks
Security trends - Legal, Ethical and Professional Aspects of Security, Need for Security at
Multiple levels, Security Policies - Model of network security – Security attacks, services and
mechanisms – OSI security architecture – Classical encryption techniques: substitution
techniques, transposition techniques, steganography).- Foundations of modern cryptography:
perfect security – information theory – product cryptosystem – cryptanalysis
UNIT II SYMMETRIC CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

MATHEMATICS OF SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Algebraic structures - Modular
arithmetic-Euclid‘s algorithm- Congruence and matrices - Groups, Rings, Fields- Finite fields-
SYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: SDES – Block cipher Principles of DES – Strength of DES –
Differential and linear cryptanalysis - Block cipher design principles – Block cipher mode of
operation – Evaluation criteria for AES – Advanced Encryption Standard - RC4 – Key
distribution.
UNIT III PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

MATHEMATICS OF ASYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Primes – Primality Testing –
Factorization – Euler‘s totient function, Fermat‘s and Euler‘s Theorem - Chinese Remainder
Theorem – Exponentiation and logarithm - ASYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: RSA cryptosystem –
Key distribution – Key management – Diffie Hellman key exchange - ElGamal cryptosystem –
Elliptic curve arithmetic-Elliptic curve cryptography.
UNIT IV MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION AND INTEGRITY 9

Authentication requirement – Authentication function – MAC – Hash function – Security of
hash function and MAC – SHA –Digital signature and authentication protocols – DSS- Entity
Authentication: Biometrics, Passwords, Challenge Response protocols- Authentication
applications - Kerberos, X.509
UNIT V SECURITY PRACTICE AND SYSTEM SECURITY 9

Electronic Mail security – PGP, S/MIME – IP security – Web Security - SYSTEM SECURITY:
Intruders – Malicious software – viruses – Firewalls.
TOTAL: 45PERIODS
Course Outcomes:

 Understand the fundamentals of networks security, security architecture, threats and
vulnerabilities
 Apply the different cryptographic operations of symmetric cryptographic algorithms

 Apply the different cryptographic operations of public key cryptography
 Apply the various Authentication schemes to simulate different applications.
 Understand various Security practices and System security standards
Text Book:
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice”, PHI
3rd Edition, 2006.
References:
1. 1.C K Shyamala, N Harini and Dr. T R Padmanabhan: “Cryptography and Network
Security”, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd
2. BehrouzA.Foruzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill 2007.
3. Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman, and Mike Speciner, “Network Security: PRIVATE
Communication in a PUBLIC World”, Prentice Hall, ISBN 0-13-046019-2
EC8091 Advanced Digital Signal Processing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To learn and understand the concepts of stationary and non-stationary random
signals and analysis & characterization of discrete-time random processes
 To enunciate the significance of estimation of power spectral density of random
processes
 To introduce the principles of optimum filters such as Wiener and Kalman filters
 To introduce the principles of adaptive filters and their applications to communication
engineering
 To introduce the concepts of multi-resolution analysis
UNIT I DISCRETE-TIME RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Random variables - ensemble averages a review, random processes - ensemble averages,
autocorrelation and auto covariance matrices, ergodic random process, white noise, filtering
random processes, spectral factorization, special types of random processes - AR, MA, ARMA
UNIT II SPECTRUM ESTIMATION 10

Bias and consistency, Non-parametric methods - Periodogram, modified-Periodogram -
performance analysis. Bartlett's method, Welch's method, Blackman-Tukey method.
Performance comparison. Parametric methods - autoregressive (AR) spectrum estimation -
autocorrelation method, Prony's method, solution using Levinson Durbin recursion.
UNIT III OPTIMUM FILTERS 9

Wiener filters - FIR Wiener filter - discrete Wiener Hopf equation, Applications - filtering, linear
prediction. IIR Wiener filter - causal and non-causal filters. Recursive estimators - discrete
Kalman filter.
UNIT IV ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9

Principles and properties of adaptive filters - FIR adaptive filters. Adaptive algorithms - steepest
descent algorithm, the LMS algorithm - convergence. Applications of adaptive filtering - noise
cancellation, channel equalization.
UNIT V MULTIRESOLUTION ANALYSIS 8

Short-time Fourier transform - Heisenberg uncertainty principle. Principles of multi-resolution
analysis - sub-band coding, the continuous and discrete wavelet transform - properties.
Applications of wavelet transform - noise reduction, image compression.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
 Articulate and apply the concepts of special random processes in practical
applications
 Choose appropriate spectrum estimation techniques for a given random process
 Apply optimum filters appropriately for a given communication application
 Apply appropriate adaptive algorithm for processing non-stationary signals
 Apply and analyse wavelet transforms for signal and image processing based
applications
Text Books :
1. Monson H. Hayes, "Statistical digital signal processing and modeling", John Wiley and
Sons Inc. New York, Indian reprint 2008. (UNIT I-IV)
2. P. P. Vaidyanathan, "Multirate systems and filter banks", Prentice Hall Inc. 1993(UNIT
V)
References:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing – Principles,
Algorithms & Applications”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. Sophoncles J. Orfanidis, "Optimum signal processing", McGraw Hill, 2000
EC8001 MEMS and NEMS LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the concepts of micro and nano electromechanical devices

 To know the fabrication process of Microsystems
 To know the design concepts of micro sensors and micro actuators
 To introduce the concepts of quantum mechanics and nano systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS AND NEMS 9

Introduction to Design of MEMS and NEMS, Overview of Nano and Microelectromechanical
Systems, Applications of Micro and Nanoelectromechanical systems, Materials for MEMS and
NEMS: Silicon, silicon compounds, polymers, metals.
UNIT II MEMS FABRICATION TECHNOLOGIES 9

Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation, CVD, Sputtering Etching techniques,
Micromachining: Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, LIGA.
UNIT III MICRO SENSORS 9

MEMS Sensors: Design of Acoustic wave sensors, Vibratory gyroscope, Capacitive Pressure
sensors, Case study: Piezoelectric energy harvester
UNIT IV MICRO ACTUATORS 9

Design of Actuators: Actuation using thermal forces, Actuation using shape memory Alloys,
Actuation using piezoelectric crystals, Actuation using Electrostatic forces, Case Study:RF
Switch.

UNIT V NANO DEVICES 9
Atomic Structures and Quantum Mechanics, Shrodinger Equation, ZnO nanorods based NEMS
device: Gas sensor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course, the student should be able to:
 Interpret the basics of micro/nano electromechanical systems including their
applications and advantages
 Recognize the use of materials in micro fabrication and describe the fabrication
processes including surface micromachining, bulk micromachining and LIGA.
 Analyze the key performance aspects of electromechanical transducers including
sensors and actuators
 Comprehend the theoretical foundations of quantum mechanics and Nano systems
Reference:
1. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC press 1997.
2. Stephen D. Senturia, ”Micro system Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Tai Ran Hsu , “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture” ,Tata Mcraw
Hill,2002.
4. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson education India limited, 2006,
5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices, and Structures”,
CRC Press, 2002
EC8002 Multimedia Compression and Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives:

 To understand the compression schemes for text, voice, image and video
 To understand the QoS issues in multimedia network
 To know the communication protocols for multimedia networking
UNIT I AUDIO COMPRESSION 9

Sampling and Quantization of Speech (PCM) - Adaptive differential PCM - Delta Modulation -
Vector Quantization- Linear predictive coding (LPC) - Code excited Linear predictive Coding
(CELP)
UNIT II IMAGE AND VIDEO COMPRESSION 9

Graphics Interchange format- Tagged image file format-Digitized documents- Digitized pictures
JPEG-Video Encoding-Motion estimation –Overview of H.263 and MPEG-2
UNIT III TEXT COMPRESSION 7

Static and Dynamic Huffman coding – Arithmetic coding –Lempel-Ziv coding – LZW coding
UNIT IV GUARANTEED SERVICE MODEL 10

Best Effort service model – Scheduling and Dropping policies – Network Performance
Parameters – Quality of Service and metrics – WFQ and its variants – Random Early Detection
– QoS aware Routing – Admission Control – Resource Reservation – RSVP - Traffic Shaping
Algorithms – Caching – Laissez Faire Approach - Possible Architectures – An Overview of QoS
Architectures

UNIT V MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION 10
Stream characteristics for Continuous media – Temporal Relationship – Object Stream
Interactions, Media Levity, Media Synchronization – Models for Temporal Specifications –
Streaming of Audio and Video – Jitter – Fixed playout and Adaptive playout – Recovering from
packet loss – RTSP –– Multimedia Communication Standards – RTP/RTCP – SIP and H.263
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Design audio compression techniques
 Configure Text, image and video compression techniques
 Select suitable service model for specific application
 Configure multimedia communication network
Text Book:
1. Fred Halsall, “Multimedia communication- Applications, Networks, Protocols and
Standards”, Pearson education, 2007.
References:
1. Tay Vaughan, “Multimedia Making it work” , McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2006.
2. Kurose and W. Ross, “Computer Networking ―A Top Down Approach”, Pearson
education, 3rd ed, 2005.
3. KR. Rao,Z S Bojkovic, D A Milovanovic, “Multimedia Communication Systems:
Techniques, Standards, and Networks”, Pearson Education 2007
4. R. Steimnetz, K. Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Computing, Communications and
Applications”, Pearson Education, First ed, 1995.
5. Nalin K Sharda, “Multimedia Information Networking”, Prentice Hall of India, 1999
6. Aura Ganz, Zvi Ganz and Kitti Wongthawaravat, “Multimedia Wireless Networks:
Technologies, Standards and QoS”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
7. Ellen Kayata Wesel, “Wireless Multimedia Communications: Networking Video, Voice
and Data”, Addision Wesley, 1998
EC8003 CMOS Analog IC Design LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To study the fundamentals of analog circuits and MOS device models

 To gain knowledge on various configurations of MOS transistors and feedback
concepts
 To study the characteristics of noise and frequency response of the amplifier
 To learn the concepts of Op-Amp frequency compensation, capacitor switches and
PLLs
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ANALOG IC DESIGN AND CURRENT MIRRORS 9

Concepts of Analog Design - General consideration of MOS devices – MOS I/V Characteristics –
Second order effects – MOS device models. Basic current mirrors- Cascode current mirrors
Active current mirrors- Large and Small signal analysis- Common mode properties.
UNIT II AMPLIFIERS AND FEEDBACK 9

Basic Concepts – Common source stage- Source follower- Common gate stage- Cascode stage.
Single ended and differential operation- Basic Differential pair- Common mode response
Differential pair with MOS loads- Gilbert Cell. Feedback- General Consideration of feedback
circuits- Feedback topologies- Effect of loading- Effect of feedback on Noise.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERS AND NOISE 9
General considerations- Miller Effect and Association of Poles with Nodes, Common source
stage- Source followers- Common gate stage- Cascode stage- Differential pair. Noise- Statistical
characteristics of noise- Types of noise- Representation of noise in circuits- Noise in single
stage amplifiers- Noise in differential pairs- Noise Bandwidth.
UNIT IV OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER STABILITY AND FREQUENCY COMPENSATION 9

General Considerations- One and Two Stage Op Amps- Gain Boosting- Comparison- Common
mode feedback- Input range limitations- Slew rate- Power Supply Rejection- Noise in Op Amps
General consideration of stability and frequency compensation- Multipole system- Phase
margin Frequency compensation- Compensation of two stage op Amps- Other compensation
techniques.
UNIT V SWITCHED CAPACITOR CIRCUITS AND PLLS 9

General Considerations- Sampling switches- Switched Capacitor Amplifiers- Switched
Capacitor Integrator- Switched Capacitor Common mode feedback. Phase Locked Loops-Simple
PLL Charge pump PLLs - Non ideal Effects in PLLs- Delay locked loops- its Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, student should be able to:
 Realize the concepts of Analog MOS devices and current mirror circuits.
 Design different configuration of Amplifiers and feedback circuits.
 Analyze the characteristics of frequency response of the amplifier and its noise.
 Analyze the performance of the stability and frequency compensation techniques of
OpAmp Circuits.
 Construct switched capacitor circuits and PLLs
Text Book:
1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001,
33rd re-print, 2016.
References:
1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holmberg “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Second Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Paul R. Gray, Paul J. Hurst, Stephen H. Lewis, Robert G. Meyer, “Analysis and Design
of Analog Integrated Circuits”, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2009
3. Grebene, “Bipolar and MOS Analog Integrated circuit design”, John Wiley & sons, Inc.,
2003
EC8004 Wireless Networks LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the concept about Wireless networks, protocol stack and standards
 To understand and analyse the network layer solutions for Wireless networks
 To study about fundamentals of 3G Services, its protocols and applications
 To have in depth knowledge on internetworking of WLAN and WWAN
 To learn about evolution of 4G Networks, its architecture and applications
UNIT I WIRELESS LAN 9

Introduction-WLAN technologies: - IEEE802.11: System architecture, protocol architecture,
802.11b, 802.11a – Hiper LAN: WATM, BRAN, HiperLAN2 – Bluetooth: Architecture, WPAN –
IEEE 802.15.4, Wireless USB, Zigbee, 6LoWPAN, Wireless HART

UNIT II MOBILE NETWORK LAYER 9
Introduction - Mobile IP: IP packet delivery, Agent discovery, tunneling and encapsulation,
IPV6-Network layer in the internet- Mobile IP session initiation protocol - mobile ad-hoc
network: Routing: Destination Sequence distance vector, IoT: CoAP
UNIT III 3G OVERVIEW 9

Overview of UTMS Terrestrial Radio access network-UMTS Core network Architecture: 3GPP
Architecture, User equipment, CDMA2000 overview- Radio and Network components, Network
structure, Radio Network, TD-CDMA, TD – SCDMA.
UNIT IV INTERNETWORKING BETWEEN WLANS AND WWANS 9

Internetworking objectives and requirements, Schemes to connect WLANS and 3G Networks,
Session Mobility, Internetworking Architecture for WLAN and GPRS, System Description, Local
Multipoint Distribution Service, Multichannel Multipoint Distribution System.
UNIT V 4G & Beyond 9

Introduction – 4G vision – 4G features and challenges - Applications of 4G – 4G Technologies:
Multicarrier Modulation, Smart antenna techniques, IMS Architecture, LTE, Advanced
Broadband Wireless Access and Services, MVNO.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the student would be able to:
 Conversant with the latest 3G/4G networks and its architecture
 Design and implement wireless network environment for any application using latest
wireless protocols and standards
 Ability to select the suitable network depending on the availability and requirement
 Implement different type of applications for smart phones and mobile devices with
latest network strategies
Text Books:
1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Second Edition, Pearson Education
2012.(Unit I,II,III)
2. Vijay Garg, “Wireless Communications and networking”, First Edition, Elsevier
2007.(Unit IV,V)
References:
1. Erik Dahlman, Stefan Parkvall, Johan Skold and Per Beming, "3G Evolution HSPA and
LTE for Mobile Broadband”, Second Edition, Academic Press, 2008.
2. Anurag Kumar, D.Manjunath, Joy kuri, “Wireless Networking”, First Edition, Elsevier
2011.
3. Simon Haykin , Michael Moher, David Koilpillai, “Modern Wireless Communications”,
First Edition, Pearson Education 2013
GE8075 Intellectual Property Rights LTPC3003
Course Objective:
 To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from

WTO to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological
Research, Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.
UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10

Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents,
Geographical Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10

International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act
of India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9

Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair
Competition and IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7

Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcome:
 Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
Text Books:
1. V. Scople Vinod, “Managing Intellectual Property”, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
2. S. V. Satakar, “Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights”, Ess Ess Publications,
New Delhi, 2002.
References:
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks”, Copyrights,
Patents and Trade Secrets‖, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli, ”Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge
Economy”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, “The Management of Intellectual
Property”, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.
EC8092 Advanced Wireless Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To expose the students to the importance of improving capacity of wireless channel
using MIMO
 To enable understanding of channel impairment mitigation using space-time block
and Trellis codes
 To teach advanced MIMO system like layered space time codes, MU-MIMO System and
MIMO-OFDM systems
UNIT I CAPACITY OF WIRELESS CHANNELS 9

The crowded spectrum, need for high data rate, MIMO systems – Array Gain, Diversity Gain,
Data Pipes, Spatial MUX, MIMO System Model. MIMO System Capacity – channel known at the
TX, Channel unknown to the TX – capacity of deterministic channels, Random channels and
frequency selective channels.

UNIT II RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION 9
Radio wave propagation – Macroscopic fading- free space and out door, small scale fading
Fading measurements – Direct pulse measurements, spread spectrum correlation channel
sounding frequency domain channel sounding, Antenna Diversity – Diversity combining
methods.
UNIT III SPACE TIME BLOCK CODES 9

Delay Diversity scheme, Alamoti space time code – Maximum likelihood decoding maximum
ratio combining. Transmit diversity space time block codes for real signal constellation and
complex signal constellation - decoding of STBC.
UNIT IV SPACE TIME TRELLIS CODES 9

Space time coded systems, space time code word design criteria, design of space time T C on
slow fading channels, design of STTC on Fast Fading channels, performance analysis in slow
and fast fading channels, effect of imperfect channel estimation and Antenna correlation on
performance, comparison of STBC & STTC.
UNIT V LAYERED SPACE TIME CODES 9

LST transmitter – Horizontal and Vertical LST receiver – ML Rx, Zero forcing Rx; MMSE Rx, SIC
Rx, ZF V-blast Rx- MMSE V-blast Rx, Iterative Rx - capacity of MIMO – OFDM systems –
capacity of MIMO multi user systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The student should be able to:
 Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world
 Apply the knowledge about the importance of MIMO in today's communication
 Appreciate the various methods for improving the data rate of wireless communication
system
References:
1. Mohinder Jankiraman, “Space-time codes and MIMO systems”, Artech House, Boston,
London . www.artech house.com, ISBN 1-58053-865-7-2004
2. Paulraj Rohit Nabar, Dhananjay Gore, “Introduction of space time wireless
communication systems, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
3. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication‖,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Sergio Verdu ― Multi User Detection‖ Cambridge University Press, 1998
EC8071 Cognitive Radio LTPC3003
Course Objectives:

 To understand the evolving software defined radio and cognitive radio techniques and
their essential functionalities
 To study the basic architecture and standard for cognitive radio
 To understand the physical, MAC and Network layer design of cognitive radio
 To expose the student to evolving applications and advanced features of Cognitive
Radio

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE-DEFINED RADIO AND COGNITIVE RADIO 9
Evolution of Software Defined Radio and Cognitive radio: goals, benefits, definitions,
architectures, relations with other radios, issues, enabling technologies, radio frequency
spectrum and regulations.
UNIT II COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTURE 9

Cognition cycle – orient, plan, decide and act phases, Organization, SDR as a platform for
Cognitive Radio – Hardware and Software Architectures, Overview of IEEE 802.22 standard for
broadband wireless access in TV bands.
UNIT III SPECTRUM SENSING AND DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS 9

Introduction – Primary user detection techniques – energy detection, feature detection,
matched filtering, cooperative detection and other approaches, Fundamental Tradeoffs in
spectrum sensing, Spectrum Sharing Models of Dynamic Spectrum Access - Unlicensed and
Licensed Spectrum Sharing, Fundamental Limits of Cognitive Radio.
UNIT IV MAC AND NETWORK LAYER DESIGN FOR COGNITIVE RADIO 9

MAC for cognitive radios – Polling, ALOHA, slotted ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA / CA, Network layer
design – routing in cognitive radios, flow control and error control techniques.
UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS IN COGNITIVE RADIO 9

Overview of security issues in cognitive radios, auction based spectrum markets in cognitive
radio networks, public safety and cognitive radio, cognitive radio for Internet of Things.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Gain knowledge on the design principles on software defined radio and cognitive radio
 Develop the ability to design and implement algorithms for cognitive radio spectrum
sensing and dynamic spectrum access
 Build experiments and projects with real time wireless applications
 Apply the knowledge of advanced features of cognitive radio for real world applications
Text Books:
1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, Thomas Hou, “Cognitive Radio
Communications and Networks”, Academic Press, Elsevier, 2010. (Unit I to IV)
2. Huseyin Arslan (Ed.), “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive Wireless
Systems”, Springer, 2007. (Unit V)
References:
1. Bruce Fette, “Cognitive Radio Technology”, Newnes, 2006.
2. Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive Radio Networks”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2009.
3. Ezio Biglieri, Professor Andrea J. Goldsmith, Dr Larry J. Greenstein, Narayan B.
Mandayam, H. Vincent Poor, “Principles of Cognitive Radio”, Cambridge University
Press, 2012
GE8072 Foundation Skills in Integrated Product Development LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services

 To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
 To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
 To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive
at the optimum system specification and characteristics
 To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical
Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product
Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of
Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle –
Product Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability
Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to
System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design -
Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical,
Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program -
Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and
Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing -
System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Define, formulate and analyze a problem
 Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
 Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context

 Work independently as well as in teams
 Manage a project from start to finish
Text Books:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata
McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
References:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier],
Oxford, 2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and
Design", McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
CS8082 Machine Learning Techniques LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the need for machine learning for various problem solving
 To study the various supervised, semi-supervised and unsupervised learning algorithms
in machine learning
 To learn the new approaches in machine learning
 To design appropriate machine learning algorithms for problem solving
Learning Problems – Perspectives and Issues – Concept Learning – Version Spaces and
Candidate Eliminations – Inductive bias – Decision Tree learning – Representation – Algorithm
– Heuristic Space Search.
UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS AND GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Neural Network Representation – Problems – Perceptrons – Multilayer Networks and Back
Propagation Algorithms – Advanced Topics – Genetic Algorithms – Hypothesis Space Search –
Genetic Programming – Models of Evaluation and Learning.
UNIT III BAYESIAN AND COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING 9

Bayes Theorem – Concept Learning – Maximum Likelihood – Minimum Description Length
Principle – Bayes Optimal Classifier – Gibbs Algorithm – Naïve Bayes Classifier – Bayesian
Belief Network – EM Algorithm – Probability Learning – Sample Complexity – Finite and Infinite
Hypothesis Spaces – Mistake Bound Model.
UNIT IV INSTANT BASED LEARNING 9

K- Nearest Neighbour Learning – Locally weighted Regression – Radial Bases Functions – Case
Based Learning.
UNIT V ADVANCED LEARNING 9

Learning Sets of Rules – Sequential Covering Algorithm – Learning Rule Set – First Order Rules
– Sets of First Order Rules – Induction on Inverted Deduction – Inverting Resolution –

Analytical Learning – Perfect Domain Theories – Explanation Base Learning – FOCL Algorithm –
Reinforcement Learning – Task – Q-Learning – Temporal Difference Learning
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
 Differentiate between supervised, unsupervised, semi-supervised machine learning
approaches
 Apply specific supervised or unsupervised machine learning algorithm for a particular
problem
 Analyse and suggest the appropriate machine learning approach for the various types
of problem
 Design and make modifications to existing machine learning algorithms to suit an
individual application
 Provide useful case studies on the advanced machine learning algorithms
Text Book:
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning, McGraw-Hill Education (India) Private Limited,
2013.
References:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and
Machine Learning)”, The MIT Press 2004.
2. Stephen Marsland, “Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective”, CRC Press, 2009.
EC8005 Electronic Packaging and Testing LTPC3003
Course Objective:
 To introduce and discuss various issues related to the system packaging
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PACKAGING 9

Functions of an Electronic Package, Packaging Hierarchy, IC packaging: MEMS packaging,
consumer electronics packaging, medical electronics packaging, Trends, Challenges, Driving
Forces on Packaging Technology, Materials for Microelectronic packaging, Packaging Material
Properties, Ceramics, Polymers, and Metals in Packaging, Material for high density
interconnect substrates
UNIT II ELECTRICAL ISSUES IN PACKAGING 9

Electrical Issues of Systems Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power Distribution,
Electromagnetic Interference, Transmission Lines, Clock Distribution, Noise Sources, Digital
and RF Issues. Design Process Electrical Design: Interconnect Capacitance, Resistance and
Inductance fundamentals; Packaging roadmaps - Hybrid circuits - Resistive, Capacitive and
Inductive parasitics
UNIT III CHIP PACKAGES 9

IC Assembly - Purpose, Requirements, Technologies, Wire bonding, Tape Automated Bonding,
Flip Chip, Wafer Level Packaging, reliability, wafer level burn – in and test. Single chip
packaging: functions, types, materials processes, properties, characteristics, trends. Multi chip
packaging: types, design, comparison, trends. System – in - package (SIP); Passives: discrete,
integrated, and embedded
UNIT IV PCB, SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND THERMAL CONSIDERATIONS 9

Printed Circuit Board: Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard fabrication, Micro via
Boards. Board Assembly: Surface Mount Technology, Through Hole Technology, Process

Control and Design challenges. Thermal Management, Heat transfer fundamentals, Thermal
conductivity and resistance, Conduction, convection and radiation – Cooling requirements
UNIT V TESTING 9
Reliability, Basic concepts, Environmental interactions. Thermal mismatch and fatigue –
failures – thermo mechanically induced –electrically induced – chemically induced. Electrical
Testing: System level electrical testing, Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing, Design for
Testability
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Give a comprehensive introduction to the various packaging types used along with the
associated thermal, speed, signal and integrity power issues
 Enable design of packages which can withstand higher temperature, vibrations and
shock
 Design of PCBs which minimize the EMI and operate at higher frequency
 Analyze the concepts of Testing and testing methods
Text Book:
1. Tummala, Rao R., “Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging”, McGraw Hill, 2001
References:
1. Blackwell (Ed), “The electronic packaging handbook”, CRC Press, 2000.
2. Tummala, Rao R, “Microelectronics packaging handbook”, McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Bosshart, “Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology”, TataMcGraw Hill, 1988.
4. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, “Electronic Product design”, Wiley India, 2011
5. R.S.Khandpur, “Printed Circuit Board”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005
6. Recent literature in Electronic Packaging
7. Michael L. Bushnell & Vishwani D. Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for
Digital, memory & Mixed signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwer Academic Publishers.2000.
8. M. Abramovici, M. A. Breuer, and A.D. Friedman, “Digital System Testing and Testable
Design”, Computer Science Press,1990
EC8006 Mixed Signal IC Design LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 Study the mixed signal of submicron CMOS circuits
 Understand the various integrated based filters and topologies
 Learn the data converters architecture, modeling and signal to noise ratio
 Study the integrated circuit of oscillators and PLLs
UNIT I SUBMICRON CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Submicron CMOS: Overview and Models, CMOS process flow, Capacitors and Resistors. Digital
circuit design: The MOSFET Switch, Delay Elements, An Adder. Analog Circuit Design:
Biasing, Op-Amp Design, Circuit Noise.
UNIT II INTEGRATOR BASED CMOS FILTERS 9

Integrator Building Blocks- low pass filter, Active RC integrators, MOSFET-C Integrators, gmC
integrators, Discrete time integrators. Filtering Topologies: The Bilinear transfer function, The
Biquadratic transfer function, Filters using Noise shaping.

UNIT III DATA CONVERTER ARCHITECTURES 9
DAC Architectures- Resistor string, R-2R ladder Networks, Current Steering, Charge Scaling
DACs, Cyclic DAC, and Pipeline DAC. ADC Architectures- Flash, Two-step flash ADC, Pipeline
ADC, Integrating ADC‘s, Successive Approximation ADC.
UNIT IV DATA CONVERTER MODELING AND SNR 9

Sampling and Aliasing: A modeling approach, Impulse sampling, The sample and Hold,
Quantization noise. Data converter SNR: An overview, Clock Jitter, Improving SNR using
Averaging, Decimating filter for ADCs, Interpolating filter for DACs, Band pass and High pass
sinc filters - Using feedback to improve SNR.
UNIT V OSCILLATORS AND PLL 9

LC oscillators, Voltage Controlled Oscillators. Simple PLL, Charge pumps PLLs, Non ideal
effects in PLLs, Delay Locked Loops.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, student should be able to
 Apply the concepts for mixed signal MOS circuit.
 Analyze the characteristics of IC based CMOS filters.
 Design of various data converter architecture circuits.
 Analyze the signal to noise ratio and modeling of mixed signals.
 Design of oscillators and phase lock loop circuit.
References:
1. CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design by R.Jacob Baker, Wiley India, IEEE Press, reprint
2008.
2. CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation by R.Jacob Baker, Wiley India, IEEE
Press, Second Edition, reprint 2009.
3. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits by Behzad Razavi, McGraw Hill, 33rd
Reprint, 2016.
GE8071 Disaster Management LT P C 3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
 To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
 To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR) 
To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
 To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential disaster
response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc. - Classification, Causes, Impacts including
social, economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in
terms of caste, class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban
disasters, pandemics, complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don‘ts during various
types of Disasters.

UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community
based DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community,
Panchayati Raj Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other
stakeholders- Institutional Processes and Framework at State and Central Level- State
Disaster Management Authority(SDMA) – Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate
Agencies.
UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as
dams, embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario
and Scenarios in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate
technology and local resources.
UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9

Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food,
Sanitation, Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation,
Response and Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies,
plans, programmes and legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in
Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage
Assessment.
UNITV DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD

WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings
and Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm
Surge Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case
Studies, Man Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and
Management and field works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The students will be able to
 Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and
society
 Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as
mitigation.
 Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarios in the Indian context,
Disaster damage assessment and management.
Text Books:
1. Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427
ISBN13: 978-9380386423
2. Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India
Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
3. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. “Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk
Management”, NIDM, New Delhi, 2011
4. Kapur Anu “Vulnerable India: A Geographical Study of Disasters”, IIAS and Sage
Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
References:
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.

EC8072 Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the basic concepts of Electromagnetic Interference

 To teach the importance of Electromagnetic Compatible designs
 To explain the existing standards for Electromagnetic Compatibility
UNIT I EMI/EMC CONCEPTS 9

EMI-EMC definitions; Sources and Victims of EMI; Conducted and Radiated EMI Emission and
Susceptibility; Case Histories; Radiation Hazards to humans.
UNIT II EMI COUPLING PRINCIPLES 9

Conducted, radiated and transient coupling; Common ground impedance coupling; Common
mode and ground loop coupling; Differential mode coupling; Near field cable to cable coupling;
Field to cable coupling; Power mains and Power supply coupling; Transient EMI, ESD.
UNIT III EMI CONTROL 9

Shielding; EMI Filters; Grounding; Bonding; Isolation transformer; Transient suppressors; EMI
Suppression Cables.
UNIT IV EMC DESIGN FOR CIRCUITS AND PCBS 9

Noise from Relays and Switches; Nonlinearities in Circuits; Cross talk in transmission line and
cross talk control; Component selection and mounting; PCB trace impedance; Routing; Power
distribution decoupling; Zoning; Grounding; VIAs; Terminations.
UNIT V EMI MEASUREMENTS AND STANDARDS 9

Open area test site; TEM cell; EMI test shielded chamber and shielded ferrite lined anechoic
chamber; Line impedance stabilization networks; EMI Rx and spectrum analyzer; Civilian
standards - CISPR, FCC, IEC, EN; Military standards-MIL461E/462.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Identify the various types and mechanisms of Electromagnetic Interference
 Propose a suitable EMI mitigation technique
 Describe the various EMC Standards and methods to measure them
Text Books:
1. V.P.Kodali, “Engineering EMC Principles, Measurements and Technologies”, IEEE

Press, Newyork, 1996.(Unit I – V)
2. Henry W.Ott., “Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems”, A Wiley Inter
Science Publications, John Wiley and Sons, Newyork, 1988. (Unit – IV)
References:
1. C.R.Paul, “Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility” , John Wiley and Sons, Inc,

1992.
2. Bemhard Keiser, “Principles of Electromagnetic Compatibility”, 3rd Ed, Artech house,
Norwood, 1986.
3. Don R. J.White “Consultant Incorporate, ―Handbook of EMI/EMC”, Vol I-V, 1988.

EC8007 Low Power SoC Design LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 Identify sources of power in an IC.
 Understand basic principle of System on Chip design
 Learn optimization of power in combinational and sequential logic machines for SoC
Design
 Identify suitable techniques to reduce the power dissipation and design circuits with
low power dissipation.
UNIT I POWER CONSUMPTION IN CMOS 9

Physics of power dissipation in CMOS FET devices – Hierarchy of limits of power – Sources of
power consumption – Static Power Dissipation, Active Power Dissipation - Designing for Low
Power, Circuit Techniques for Leakage Power Reduction - Basic principle of low power design,
Logic level power optimization – Circuit level low power design.
UNIT II SYSTEM-ON-CHIP DESIGN 9

System-on-Chip Concept, Design Principles in SoC Architecture, SoC Design Flow,
Platformbased and IP based SoC Designs, Basic Concepts of Bus-Based Communication
Architectures. High performance algorithms for ASICs/ SoCs as case studies – Canonic Signed
Digit Arithmetic, KCM, Distributed Arithmetic, High performance digital filters for sigma-delta
ADC
UNIT III POWER OPTIMIZATION OF COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL LOGIC

MACHINES FOR SOC 9
Introduction to Standard Cell-Based Layout – Simulation - Combinational Network Delay -
Logic and interconnect Design - Power Optimization - Switch Logic Networks. Introduction -
Latches and Flip-Flops - Sequential Systems and Clocking Disciplines - Sequential System
Design - Power Optimization - Design Validation - Sequential Testing.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF LOW POWER CIRCUITS FOR SUB SYSTEM ON A SOC 9

Subsystem Design Principles - Combinational Shifters – Adders – ALUs – Multipliers – High
Density Memory – Field Programmable Gate Arrays - Programmable Logic Arrays - Computer
arithmetic techniques for low power system – low voltage low power static Random access and
dynamic Random access memories, low power clock, Inter connect and layout design
UNIT V FLOOR PLANNING 9

Floor-planning Methods – Block Placement & Channel Definition - Global Routing - switchbox
Routing - Power Distribution - Clock Distributions - Floor-planning Tips - Design Validation -
OffChip Connections – Packages, The I/O Architecture - PAD Design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcome:
 Analyze and design low-power VLSI circuits using different circuit technologies for
system on chip design
Text Books:
1. J.Rabaey, “Low Power Design Essentials (Integrated Circuits and Systems)”, Springer,
2009
2. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design – System – on – Chip Design”, Prentice Hall, 3rd
Edition, 2008.

References:
1. J.B.Kuo & J.H.Lou, “Low-voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, Wiley, 1999.
2. A.Bellaowar & M.I.Elmasry, “Low power Digital VLSI Design”, Circuits and Systems,
Kluwer, 1996.
3. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design – IP based Design”, Prentice Hall, 4th Edition,
2008.
4. M.J.S. Smith “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Pearson, 2003
5. Sudeep Pasricha and NikilDutt, “On-Chip Communication Architectures System on
Chip Interconnect”, Elsevier, 2008
6. Recent literature in Low Power VLSI Circuits.
7. Recent literature in Design of ASICs
EC8008 Photonic Networks LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
• To enable the student to understand the importance of the backbone infrastructure
for our present and future communication needs and familiarize them with the
architectures and the protocol stack in use
• To enable the student to understand the differences in the design of data plane and
the control plane and the routing, switching and the resource allocation methods and
the network management and protection methods in vogue
• To expose the student to the advances in networking and switching domains and the
future trends
UNIT I OPTICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9

Light Propagation in optical fibers – Loss & bandwidth, System limitations, Nonlinear effects;
Solitons; Optical Network Components – Couplers, Isolators & Circulators, Multiplexers &
Filters, Optical Amplifiers, Switches, Wavelength Converters.
UNIT II OPTICAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURES 9

Introduction to Optical Networks; SONET / SDH, Metropolitan-Area Networks, Layered
Architecture; Broadcast and Select Networks – Topologies for Broadcast Networks, Media
Access Control Protocols, Wavelength Routing Architecture.
UNIT III WAVELENGTH ROUTING NETWORKS 9

The optical layer, Optical Network Nodes, Routing and wavelength assignment, Traffic
Grooming in Optical Networks, Architectural variations- Linear Light wave networks, Logically
Routed Networks.
UNIT IV PACKET SWITCHING AND ACCESS NETWORKS 9

Photonic Packet Switching – OTDM, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Synchronization,
Broadcast OTDM networks, Switch-based networks, Contention Resolution Access Networks –
Network Architecture overview, Optical Access Network Architectures and OTDM networks.
UNIT V NETWORK DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT 9

Transmission System Engineering – System model, Power penalty - transmitter, receiver,
Optical amplifiers, crosstalk, dispersion, Wavelength stabilization, Overall design
considerations, Control and Management – Network management functions, Configuration
management, Performance management, Fault management, Optical safety, Service interface.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student would be able to:
 Use the backbone infrastructure for our present and future communication needs
 Analyze the architectures and the protocol stack
 Compare the differences in the design of data plane, control plane, routing, switching,
resource allocation methods, network management and protection methods in vogue
References:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar N. Sivarajan, “Optical Networks: A Practical
Perspective”, Harcourt Asia Pte Ltd., Second Edition 2004.
2. C. Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks: Concept,
Design and Algorithms”, Prentice Hall of India, Ist Edition, 2002.
3. P.E. Green, Jr., “Fiber Optic Networks”, Prentice Hall, NJ, 1993.
4. Biswanath Mukherjee, “Optical WDM Networks”, Springer Series, 2006.
EC8009 Compressive Sensing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To present the basic theory and ideas showing when it is possible to reconstruct sparse
or nearly sparse signals from under sampled data
 To expose students to recent ideas in modern convex optimization allowing rapid signal
Recovery
 To give students a sense of real time applications that might benefit from compressive
sensing ideas
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPRESSED SENSING 9

Introduction; Motivation; Mathematical Background; Traditional Sampling; Traditional
Compression; Conventional Data Acquisition System; Drawbacks of Transform coding;
Compressed Sensing (CS).
UNIT II SPARSITY AND SIGNAL RECOVERY 9

Signal Representation; Basis vectors; Sensing matrices; Restricted Isometric Property;
Coherence; Stable recovery; Number of measurements.
UNIT III RECOVERY ALGORITHMS 9

Basis Pursuit algorithm: L1 minimization; Matching pursuit: Orthogonal Matching Pursuit
(OMP), Stage wise OMP, Regularized OMP, Compressive Sampling Matching Pursuit (CoSaMP);
Iterative Thresholding algorithm: Hard thresholding, Soft thresholding; Model based : Model
based CoSaMP, Model based HIT.
UNIT IV COMPRESSIVE SENSING FOR WSN 9

Basics of WSN; Wireless Sensor without Compressive Sensing; Wireless Sensor with
Compressive Sensing; Compressive Wireless Sensing: Spatial compression in WSNs,
Projections in WSNs, Compressed Sensing in WSNs.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF COMPRESSIVE SENSING 9

Compressed Sensing for Real-Time Energy-Efficient Compression on Wireless Body Sensor
Nodes; Compressive sensing in video surveillance; An Application of Compressive Sensing for
Image Fusion; Single-Pixel Imaging via Compressive Sampling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
 Appreciate the motivation and the necessity for compressed sensing technology
 Design a new algorithm or modify an existing algorithm for different application areas in
wireless sensor network.
Text Books:
1. Radha S, Hemalatha R, Aasha Nandhini S, “Compressive Sensing for Wireless
Communication: Challenges and Opportunities”, River publication, 2016. (UNIT I-V)
2. Mark A. Davenport, Marco F. Duarte, Yonina C. Eldar and Gitta Kutyniok,
―Introduction to Compressed Sensing,” in Compressed Sensing: Theory and
Applications, Y. Eldar and G. Kutyniok, eds., Cambridge University Press, 2011 (UNIT
I)
References:
1. Duarte, M.F.; Davenport, M.A.; Takhar, D.; Laska, J.N.; Ting Sun; Kelly, K.F.;
Baraniuk, R.G.; , "Single-Pixel Imaging via Compressive Sampling," Signal Processing
Magazine, IEEE, vol.25, no.2, pp.83-91, March 2008.
2. Tao Wan.; Zengchang Qin.; , An application of compressive sensing for image fusion,
CIVR '10 Proceedings of the ACM International Conference on Image and Video
Retrieval, Pages 3-9.
3. H. Mamaghanian , N. Khaled , D. Atienza and P. Vandergheynst "Compressed sensing
for real-time energy-efficient ecg compression on wireless body sensor nodes", IEEE
Trans. Biomed. Eng., vol. 58, no. 9, pp.2456 -2466 2011.
4. Mohammadreza Balouchestani.; Kaamran Raahemifar.; and Sridhar Krishnan.;
“Compressed Sensing In Wireless Sensor Networks: Survey”, Canadian Journal on
Multimedia and Wireless Networks Vol. 2, No. 1, February 2011.
EC8093 Digital Image Processing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To become familiar with digital image fundamentals

 To get exposed to simple image enhancement techniques in Spatial and Frequency
domain.
 To learn concepts of degradation function and restoration techniques.
 To study the image segmentation and representation techniques
 To become familiar with image compression and recognition methods
UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9

Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components – Elements of Visual Perception – Image
Sensing and Acquisition – Image Sampling and Quantization – Relationships between pixels -
Color image fundamentals - RGB, HSI models, Two-dimensional mathematical preliminaries,
2D transforms - DFT, DCT.
UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9

Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations – Histogram processing – Basics of Spatial
Filtering– Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering, Frequency Domain: Introduction to
Fourier Transform– Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain filters – Ideal, Butterworth
and Gaussian filters, Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.

UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9
Image Restoration - degradation model, Properties, Noise models – Mean Filters – Order
Statistics – Adaptive filters – Band reject Filters – Band pass Filters – Notch Filters – Optimum
Notch Filtering – Inverse Filtering – Wiener filtering
UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION 9

Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough transform – Thresholding - Region based segmentation
– Region growing – Region splitting and merging – Morphological processing- erosion and
dilation, Segmentation by morphological watersheds – basic concepts – Dam construction –
Watershed segmentation algorithm.
UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION AND RECOGNITION 9

Need for data compression, Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Shift codes, Arithmetic coding,
JPEG standard, MPEG. Boundary representation, Boundary description, Fourier Descriptor,
Regional Descriptors – Topological feature, Texture - Patterns and Pattern classes - Recognition
based on matching.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to
 Know and understand the basics and fundamentals of digital image processing, such
as digitization, sampling, quantization, and 2D-transforms.
 Operate on images using the techniques of smoothing, sharpening and enhancement.
 Understand the restoration concepts and filtering techniques.
 Learn the basics of segmentation, features extraction, compression and recognition
methods for color models.
Text Books:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, Third
Edition, 2010.
2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, 2002.
References:
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, 2006.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using
MATLAB”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
3. D,E. Dudgeon and RM. Mersereau, “Multidimensional Digital Signal Processing”,
Prentice Hall Professional Technical Reference, 1990.
4. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley, New York, 2002
5. Milan Sonka et al “Image processing, analysis and machine vision”, Brookes/Cole,
Vikas Publishing House, 2nd edition, 1999.
GE8076 Professional Ethics in Engineering LT P C 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values
 To instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10

Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation

– Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga
and meditation for professional excellence and stress management.
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9

Senses of ‗Engineering Ethics‘ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‘s theory – Gilligan‘s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models
of professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses
of Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9

Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9

Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest –
Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
– Discrimination.
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8

Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development
– Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors
– Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to apply ethics in society, discuss
 The ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in
the society
. Text Books:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 2003. 2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering
Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.
References:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey,
2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics –
Concepts and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2003
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
Engineers”, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal
Integrity and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, “Value Educatio”, Vethathiri publications, Erode,
2011.
Web sources:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org

EC8010 Video Analytics LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
The student should be made: To understand the need for video Analytics
 To understand the basic configuration of video analytics
 To understand the functional blocks of a video analytic system
 To get exposed to the various applications of video analytics
UNIT I VIDEO ANALYTIC COMPONENTS 9

Need for Video Analytics-Overview of video Analytics- Foreground extraction- Feature
extraction classifier - Preprocessing- edge detection- smoothening- Feature space-PCA-FLD-
SIFT features
UNIT II FOREGROUND EXTRACTION 9

Background estimation- Averaging- Gaussian Mixture Model- Optical Flow based- Image
Segmentation- Region growing- Region splitting-Morphological operations- erosion-Dilation
Tracking in a multiple camera environment
UNIT III CLASSIFIERS 9

Neural networks (back propagation) - Deep learning networks- Fuzzy Classifier- Bayesian
classifier-HMM based classifier
UNIT IV VIDEO ANALYTICS FOR SECURITY 9

Abandoned object detection- human behavioral analysis -human action recognition- perimeter
security crowd analysis and prediction of crowd congestion
UNIT V VIDEO ANALYTICS FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE & TRAFFIC MONITIRING

AND ASSISTANCE 9
Customer behavior analysis - people counting- Traffic rule violation detection- traffic
congestion identification for route planning- driver assistance- lane change warning
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to: Design video analytic algorithms for
security applications
 Design video analytic algorithms for business intelligence
 Design custom made video analytics system for the given target application
References:
1. Graeme A. Jones (Editor), Nikos Paragios (Editor), Carlo S. Regazzoni (Editor) “Video-
Based Surveillance Systems: Computer Vision and Distributed Processing” , Kluwer
academic publisher, 2001
2. Nilanjan Dey (Editor), Amira Ashour (Editor) and Suvojit Acharjee (Editor), “Applied
Video Processing in Surveillance and Monitoring Systems” (IGI global) 2016
3. Zhihao Chen (Author), Ye Yang (Author), Jingyu Xue (Author), Liping Ye (Author), Feng
Guo (Author), The Next Generation of Video Surveillance and Video Analytics: The
Unified Intelligent Video Analytics Suite, CreateSpace Independent Publishing
Platform, 2014
4. Caifeng Shan (Editor), Fatih Porikli (Editor), Tao Xiang (Editor), Shaogang Gong
(Editor) Video Analytics for Business Intelligence, Springer, 2012

EC8011 DSP Processor Architecture and Programming LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 The objective of this course is to provide knowledge on:
 Basics on Digital Signal Processors
 Programmable DSP‘s Architecture, On-chip Peripherals and Instruction set
 Programming for signal processing applications
 Advanced Programmable DSP Processors
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMABLE DSPs 9

Introduction to Programmable DSPs, Architectural Features of PDSPs - Multiplier and
Multiplier accumulator – Modified Bus Structures and Memory access – Multiple access
memory – Multi-port memory – VLIW architecture- Pipelining – Special Addressing modes in P-
DSPs – On chip Peripherals, Applications of Programmable DSPs.
UNIT II TMS320C5X PROCESSOR 9

Architecture of C5X Processor – Addressing modes – Assembly language Instructions - Pipeline
structure, On-chip Peripherals – Block Diagram of DSP starter kit (DSK) – Software Tools, DSK
on-board peripherals, Application Programs for processing real time signals.
UNIT III TMS320C6X PROCESSOR 9

Architecture of the C6x Processor - Instruction Set – Addressing modes, Assembler directives,
Onchip peripherals, DSP Development System: DSP Starter Kit - Code Composer Studio -
Support Files – Introduction to AIC23 codec and other on-board peripherals, Real-Time
Programming Examples for Signals and Noise generation, Frequency analysis, Filter design.
UNIT IV ADSP PROCESSORS 9

Architecture of ADSP-21XX and ADSP-210XX series of DSP processors- Addressing modes and
assembly language instructions – Application programs –Filter design, FFT calculation.
UNIT V ADVANCED PROCESSORS 9

Study of TI‘s advanced processors - TMS320C674x and TMS320C55x DSPs, ADSP‘s Blackfin
and Sigma DSP Processors, NXP‘s DSP56Fxx Family of DSP Processors, Comparison of the
features of TI, ADSP and NXP DSP family processors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to: Analyze the concepts of Digital Signal
Processors
 Demonstrate their ability to program the DSP processor for signal processing
applications
 Discuss, compare and select the suitable Advanced DSP Processors for real-time
signal processing applications
References:
1. B. Venkataramani and M. Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processors – Architecture”,
Programming and Applications‖– Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited.
New Delhi, 2003.
2. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, “Digital Signal Processing – Implementations using
DSP Microprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54xx”, Cengage Learning India
Private Limited, Delhi 2012. 3. Rulph Chassaing and Donald Reay, Digital Signal
Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416 DSK, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
Publication, 2012 (Reprint).
3. User guides Texas Instruments, Analog Devices and NXP.

EC8094 Satellite Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 Understand the basics of satellite orbits
 Understand the satellite segment and earth segment
 Analyze the various methods of satellite access
 Understand the applications of satellites
 Understand the basics of satellite Networks
UNIT I SATELLITE ORBITS 9
Kepler’s Laws, Newton’s law, orbital parameters, orbital perturbations, station keeping, geo
stationary and non Geo-stationary orbits – Look Angle Determination- Limits of visibility –
eclipse-Sub satellite point –Sun transit outage-Launching Procedures - launch vehicles and
propulsion.
UNIT II SPACE SEGMENT 9

Spacecraft Technology- Structure, Primary power, Attitude and Orbit control, Thermal control
and Propulsion, communication Payload and supporting subsystems, Telemetry, Tracking and
command-Transponders-The Antenna Subsystem.
UNIT III SATELLITE LINK DESIGN 9

Basic link analysis, Interference analysis, Rain induced attenuation and interference,
Ionospheric characteristics, Link Design with and without frequency reuse.
UNIT IV SATELLITE ACCESS AND CODING METHODS 9

Modulation and Multiplexing: Voice, Data, Video, Analog – digital transmission system, Digital
video Broadcast, multiple access: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, DAMA Assignment Methods,
compression – encryption, Coding Schemes.
UNIT V SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 9

INTELSAT Series, INSAT, VSAT, Mobile satellite services: GSM, GPS, INMARSAT, LEO, MEO,
Satellite Navigational System. GPS Position Location Principles, Differential GPS, Direct
Broadcast satellites (DBS/DTH).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student would be able to: Analyze the satellite orbits
 Analyze the earth segment and space segment
 Analyze the satellite Link design
 Design various satellite applications
Text Books:
1. Dennis Roddy, ―Satellite Communication‖, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill International,
2006.
2. Timothy,Pratt,Charles,W.Bostain,JeremyE.Allnutt,"SatelliteCommunication‖,2nd
Edition, Wiley Publications,2002
References:
1. Wilbur L.Pritchard, Hendri G. Suyderhoud, Robert A. Nelson, “Satellite
Communication Systems Engineering”, Prentice Hall/Pearson, 2007.
2. N.Agarwal, ―Design of Geosynchronous Space Craft‖, Prentice Hall, 1986.
3. Bruce R. Elbert, “The Satellite Communication Applications”, Hand Book, Artech
House Bostan London, 1997.

4. Tri T. Ha, “Digital Satellite Communication”, II nd edition, 1990.
5. Emanuel Fthenakis, “Manual of Satellite Communications”, Mc Graw Hill Book Co.,
1984.
6. Robert G. Winch, “Telecommunication Trans Mission Systems”, Mc Graw-Hill Book
Co., 1983.
7. Brian Ackroyd, “World Satellite Communication and earth station Design”, BSP
professional Books, 1990.
8. G.B.Bleazard, “Introducing Satellite communications”, NCC Publication, 1985.
9. M.Richharia, “Satellite Communication Systems-Design Principles”, Macmillan 2003.
CS8086 Soft Computing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
To learn the basic concepts of Soft Computing

 To become familiar with various techniques like neural networks, genetic algorithms
and fuzzy systems.
 To apply soft computing techniques to solve problems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING 9

Introduction-Artificial Intelligence-Artificial Neural Networks-Fuzzy Systems-Genetic Algorithm
and Evolutionary Programming-Swarm Intelligent Systems-Classification of ANNs-McCulloch
and Pitts Neuron Model-Learning Rules: Hebbian and Delta- Perceptron Network-Adaline
Network-Madaline Network.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Back propagation Neural Networks - Kohonen Neural Network -Learning Vector Quantization -
Hamming Neural Network - Hopfield Neural Network- Bi-directional Associative Memory -
Adaptive Resonance Theory Neural Networks- Support Vector Machines - Spike Neuron Models.
UNIT III FUZZY SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical Sets and Fuzzy Sets - Classical Relations and Fuzzy
Relations -Membership Functions -Defuzzification - Fuzzy Arithmetic and Fuzzy Measures -
Fuzzy Rule Base and Approximate Reasoning - Introduction to Fuzzy Decision Making.
UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Basic Concepts- Working Principles -Encoding- Fitness Function - Reproduction - Inheritance
Operators - Cross Over - Inversion and Deletion -Mutation Operator - Bit-wise Operators -
Convergence of Genetic Algorithm.
UNIT V HYBRID SYSTEMS 9

Hybrid Systems -Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic -GA Based Weight Determination -
LR-Type Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy Neuron - Fuzzy BP Architecture - Learning in Fuzzy BP-
Inference by Fuzzy BP - Fuzzy ArtMap: A Brief Introduction - Soft Computing Tools - GA in
Fuzzy Logic Controller Design - Fuzzy Logic Controller
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
 Apply suitable soft computing techniques for various applications.
 Integrate various soft computing techniques for complex problems

Text Books:
1. N.P.Padhy, S.P.Simon, "Soft Computing with MATLAB Programming", Oxford
2. S.N.Sivanandam , S.N.Deepa, "Principles of Soft Computing", Wiley India Pvt.Ltd., 2nd
Edition, 2011.
3. S.Rajasekaran, G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic
Algorithm, Synthesis and Applications ", PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., 2017.
References:
1. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft
Computing”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002.
2. Kwang H.Lee, “First course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications”, Springer, 2005.
3. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, ―Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and Applications‖,
Prentice Hall, 1996.
4. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications,
and Programming Techniques”, Addison Wesley, 2003.
IT8006 Principles of Speech Processing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:

 To understand the speech production mechanism and the various speech analysis
 techniques and speech models To understand the speech compression techniques
 To understand the speech recognition techniques
 To know the speaker recognition and text to speech synthesis techniques
UNIT I SPEECH SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS & ANALYSIS 11

Speech production process - speech sounds and features- - Phonetic Representation of Speech
-- representing= speech in time and frequency domains - Short-Time Analysis of Speech –
Short Time Energy and Zero-Crossing Rate - Short-Time Autocorrelation Function - Short-Time
Fourier Transform (STFT) - Speech Spectrum - Cepstrum - Mel-Frequency Cepstrum
Coefficients - Hearing and Auditory Perception - Perception of Loudness - Critical Bands - Pitch
Perception
UNIT II SPEECH COMPRESSION 12

Sampling and Quantization of Speech (PCM) - Adaptive differential PCM - Delta Modulation -
Vector Quantization- Linear predictive coding (LPC) - Code excited Linear predictive Coding
(CELP)
UNIT III SPEECH RECOGNITION 12

LPC for speech recognition- Hidden Markov Model (HMM)- training procedure for HMM-
subword unit model based on HMM- language models for large vocabulary speech recognition -
Overall recognition system based on subword units - Context dependent subword units-
Semantic post processor for speech recognition
UNIT IV SPEAKER RECOGNITION 5

Acoustic parameters for speaker verification- Feature space for speaker recognition-similarity
measures- Text dependent speaker verification-Text independent speaker verification
techniques

UNIT V SPEAKER RECOGNITION AND TEXT TO SPEECH SYNTHESIS 5
Text to speech synthesis (TTS)-Concatenative and waveform synthesis methods, sub-word
units for TTS, intelligibility and naturalness-role of prosody
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Design speech compression techniques
 Configure speech recognition techniques
 Design speaker recognition systems
 Design text to speech synthesis systems
Text Books:
1. L. R. Rabiner and R. W. Schafer, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing, Foundations
and Trendsin Signal Processing Vol. 1, Nos. 1–2 (2007) 1–194
2. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan “Speech and Audio signal processing- processing and
perception of speech and music”, John Wiley and sons 2006
References
1. Lawrence Rabiner, Biiing and– Hwang Juang and B.Yegnanarayana “Fundamentals of
Speech Recognition”, Pearson Education, 2009
2. Claudio Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti, “Speech Recognition”, John Wiley and Sons,
1999
3. Donglos O shanhnessy “Speech Communication: Human and Machine”, 2nd Ed.
University press 2001.
GE8073 Fundamentals of Nanoscience LTPC3003
Course Objective:
 To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and
application
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots,
nanowiresultra-thin films-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on
properties: Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to
properties and motivation for study (qualitative only).
UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9

Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical
Milling, Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering,
Evaporation, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12

Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall
carbon Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of
synthesis(arcgrowth, laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property
Relationships applications Nanometal oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, Nano alumina, CaO,
AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nano clays-functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum
dots-preparation, properties and applications.

UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis
techniquesAFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
Nano InfoTech: Information storage- Nano computer, molecular switch, super chip,
nanocrystal, Nano biotechnology: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano
medicines, Targeted drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS),
Nano Electro Mechanical Systems (NEMS)- Nano sensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial
inhibition, Nanoparticles for sun barrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
 Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
 Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
Text Books:
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing", Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale Characterization of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
References:
1. G Timp, “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia, “The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure, Theory,
Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

Open Electives
Detailed Syllabi
OCE551 Air Pollution and Control Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge on the principle and design of control of Indoor/ particulate/
gaseous air pollutant and its emerging trends.
Structure and composition of Atmosphere – Definition, Scope and Scales of Air Pollution –
Sources and classification of air pollutants and their effect on human health, vegetation,
animals, property, aesthetic value and visibility- Ambient Air Quality and Emission standards.
UNIT II METEOROLOGY 6
Effects of meteorology on Air Pollution - Fundamentals, Atmospheric stability, Inversion, Wind
profiles and stack plume patterns- Atmospheric Diffusion Theories – Dispersion models, Plume
rise.
UNIT III CONTROL OF PARTICULATE CONTAMINANTS 11

Factors affecting Selection of Control Equipment – Gas Particle Interaction – Working principle
- Gravity Separators, Centrifugal separators Fabric filters, Particulate Scrubbers, Electrostatic
Precipitators.
UNIT IV CONTROL OF GASEOUS CONTAMINANTS 11

Factors affecting Selection of Control Equipment – Working principle - absorption, Adsorption,
condensation, Incineration, Bio filters – Process control and Monitoring.
UNIT V INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 10

Sources, types and control of indoor air pollutants, sick building syndrome and Building
related illness- Sources and Effects of Noise Pollution – Measurement – Standards –Control and
Preventive measures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The students completing the course will have
 An understanding of the nature and characteristics of air pollutants, noise pollution
and basic concepts of air quality management
 Ability to identify, formulate and solve air and noise pollution problems
 Ability to design stacks and particulate air pollution control devices to meet applicable
standards.
 Ability to select control equipments.
 Ability to ensure quality, control and preventive measures.
Text Books:
1. Lawrence K. Wang, Norman C. Pareira, Yung Tse Hung, “Air Pollution Control
Engineering”, Tokyo, springer science + science media LLC,2004.
2. Noel de Nevers, “Air Pollution Control Engineering”, Waveland press, Inc 2017.
3. Anjaneyulu. Y, “Air Pollution and Control Technologies‟, Allied Publishers (P) Ltd., India
2002.
References:
1. David H.F. Liu, Bela G. Liptak, “Air Pollution”, Lweis Publishers, 2000.
2. Arthur C. Stern, “Air Pollution (Vol.I – Vol.VIII)”, Academic Press, 2006.
3. Wayne T.Davis, “Air Pollution Engineering Manual”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2000.

4. M.N Rao and HVN Rao, “Air Pollution”,Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Company
limited,2007.
5. C.S.Rao, “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”,New Age International(P)
Limited Publishers,2006.
OMD551 Basics of Biomedical Instrumentation LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To study about the different bio potential and its propagation
 To understand the different types of electrodes and its placement for various recording
 To study the design of bio amplifier for various physiological recording
 To learn the different measurement techniques for non-physiological parameters.
 To familiarize the different biochemical measurements.
UNIT I BIO POTENTIAL GENERATION AND ELECTRODES TYPES 9

Origin of bio potential and its propagation. Types of electrodes - surface, needle and micro
electrodes and their equivalent circuits. Recording problems - measurement with two
electrodes
UNIT II BIOSIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS AND ELECTRODECONFIGURATIONS 9

Biosignals characteristics – frequency and amplitude ranges. ECG – Einthoven‟s triangle,
standard 12 lead system. EEG – 10-20 electrode system, unipolar, bipolar and average mode.
EMG– unipolar and bipolar mode.
UNIT III SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS 9

Need for bio-amplifier - differential bio-amplifier, Impedance matching circuit, isolation
amplifiers, Power line interference, Right leg driven ECG amplifier, Band pass filtering
UNIT IV MEASUREMENT OF NON-ELECTRICALPARAMETERS 10

Temperature, respiration rate and pulse rate measurements. Blood Pressure: indirect methods
- Auscultatory method, direct methods: electronic manometer, Systolic, diastolic pressure,
Blood flow and cardiac output measurement: Indicator dilution, and dye dilution method,
ultrasound blood flow measurement.
UNIT V BIO-CHEMICAL MEASUREMENT 8

Blood gas analyzers and Non-Invasive monitoring, colorimeter, Sodium Potassium Analyser,
spectrophotometer, blood cell counter, auto analyzer (simplified schematic description).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 To learn the different bio potential and its propagation.
 To get Familiarize the different electrode placement for various physiological recording
 Students will be able design bio amplifier for various physiological recording
 Students will understand various technique non electrical physiogical measurements
 Understand the different biochemical measurements
Text Books:
1. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”, Prentice hall of India,
New Delhi, 2007.

2. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, John Wiley and
sons, New York, 2004. (Units I, II & V)
References:
1. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill
Publisher, 2003.
2. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2003.(Units II & IV)
3. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, Pearson Education, 2004.
OBM551 Bio Chemistry LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To study the structural and functional properties of carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and
nucleic acids
 To discuss the impairments in metabolism of the above, including inborn errors of
metabolism.
UNIT I BIOLOGICAL PRINCIPLE 8

Composition & properties of the cell membrane, membrane transports, permeability Coefficient
& partition coefficient, body fluids, electrolytes, acid-base balance, blood viscosity and
Newtonian nature, colloids, filtration, diffusion, osmosis, dialysis, ultrafiltration,
ultracentrifugation, cellular fractionation, electrophoresis, radioimmunoassay, Photochemical
reaction, law of photochemistry, fluorescence and phosphorescence.
UNIT II MACROMOLECULES 10
Classification and functions of carbohydrates, glycolysis, TCA cycle, Blood Sugar analysis and
glucose tolerance test, Classification and functions of proteins, architecture of proteins,
Classification of amino acids, Oxidative and non oxidative deamination, transamination,
decarboxylation, urea cycle, Purification/separation of proteins, Classification and functions of
lipids, biosynthesis of long chain fatty acids, oxidation and degradation of fatty acids.
UNIT III ENZYMES 9

Chemical Nature, General Properties, Spectrophotometric measurement of enzymes, Isolation
techniques, Diagnostic enzymes. Hormones: Chemical Nature, Properties of hormones,
Hormonal Assay and their Significance.
UNIT IV METABOLIC DISORDER 9

Diabetes mellitus, Diabetic ketoacidosis, lactose intolerance, Glycogen storage disorders, Lipid
storage disorders, obesity, atherosclerosis, Plasma proteins in health and disease, Inborn error
of amino acid metabolism, Disorders associated with abnormalities in the metabolism of
bilirubin – Jaundice.
UNIT V 9
Liver Function tests, Renal Function Tests, Blood gas Analysis, Measurement of Electrolytes.
Their abnormal and Normal Values and Conditions. Biochemistry of Urine and Stools testing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
After the successful completion of this course, the students will be able to,
 Explain the fundamentals of biochemistry
 Have in-depth knowledge about the classification, structures and properties of
carbohydrates, lipid, protein and amino acid.
 Demonstrate about the mechanism of actions of enzymes and co-enzymes, clinical
importance of enzymes, hormonal assay and significance.
Text Books:
1. Keith Wilson & John Walker, “Practical Biochemistry - Principles &
Techniques”, Oxford University Press, 2009.
2. Rafi MD ―Text book of biochemistry for Medical Student, Second Edition, University
Press, 2014.
3. W. Rodwell, David Bender, Kathleen M. Botham, Peter J. Kennelly, P. Anthony
Weil―Harper‟s Review of biochemistry, 30 th Edition, LANGE Medical Publications,
2015.
4. Trevor palmer and Philip L Bonner “Enzymes: Biochemistry, Biotechnology, Clinical
Chemistry”, 2nd Edition, Woodhead Publishing, 2009.
References:
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry, Fourth Edition - by David L. Nelson & Michael
M.Cox , - W. H. Freeman; 4 edition (April 23, 2004)
2. Fundamentals of Biochemistry: Life at the Molecular Level - by Donald J. Voet , Judith
G. Voet & Charlotte W. Pratt. - Wiley; 2 edition (March 31, 2005)
3. Pamela.C.Champe & amp; Richard.A.Harvey, ―Lippincott Biochemistry Lippincott’s
Illustrated Reviews, 6th Edition, LWW publishers, 2013.
OIT552 Cloud Computing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To learn about the concept of cloud and utility computing.
 To have knowledge on the various issues in cloud computing.
 To be familiar with the lead players in cloud.
 To appreciate the emergence of cloud as the next generation computing paradigm.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9

Introduction to Cloud Computing – Roots of Cloud Computing – Desired Features of Cloud
Computing – Challenges and Risks – Benefits and Disadvantages of Cloud Computing.
UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION 9
Introduction to Virtualization Technology – Load Balancing and Virtualization – Understanding
Hypervisor – Seven Layers of Virtualization – Types of Virtualization – Server, Desktop,
Application Virtualization.
UNIT III CLOUD ARCHITECTURE, SERVICES AND STORAGE 9

NIST Cloud Computing Reference Architecture – Public, Private and Hybrid Clouds - laaS –
PaaS – SaaS – Architectural Design Challenges – Cloud Storage.
UNIT IV RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND SECURITY IN CLOUD 9

Inter Cloud Resource Management – Resource Provisioning Methods – Security Overview –
Cloud Security Challenges – Data Security –Application Security – Virtual Machine Security.

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
Google App Engine(GAE) – GAE Architecture – Functional Modules of GAE – Amazon Web
Services(AWS) – GAE Applications – Cloud Software Environments – Eucalyptus – Open Nebula
– Open Stack.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Articulate the main concepts, key technologies, strengths and limitations of cloud
computing.
 Learn the key and enabling technologies that help in the development of cloud.
 Develop the ability to understand and use the architecture of compute and storage
cloud, service and delivery models.
 Explain the core issues of cloud computing such as resource management and security.
 Be able to install and use current cloud technologies.
 Choose the appropriate technologies, algorithms and approaches for implementation
and use of cloud.
Text Books:
1. Buyya R., Broberg J., Goscinski A., “Cloud Computing: Principles and Paradigm”, First
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C. Fox, Jack G. Dongarra, "Distributed and Cloud Computing,
From Parallel Processing to the Internet of Things", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,
2012.
3. Rittinghouse, John W., and James F. Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation,
Management, and Security”, CRC Press, 2017.
References:
1. Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola, S. ThamaraiSelvi, “Mastering Cloud Computing”,
Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2013.
2. Toby Velte, Anthony Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, "Cloud Computing - A Practical
Approach”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2009.
3. eorge Reese, "Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure
in the Cloud: Transactional Systems for EC2 and Beyond (Theory in Practice)”, O'Reilly,
2009.
OIT551 Database Management Systems LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To learn the fundamentals of data models
 To learn conceptual modeling using ER diagrams.
 To study SQL queries and database programming
 To learn proper designing of relational database.
 To understand database security concepts
 To understand Information retrieval techniques
UNIT I DBMS AND CONCEPTUAL DATA MODELING 9

Purpose of Database System – Data independence - Data Models – Database System
Architecture – Conceptual Data modeling: ER models - Enhanced-ER Model. Introduction to

relational databases – Relational Model – Keys – ER-to-Relational Mapping. Modeling of a
library management system.
UNIT II DATABASE QUERYING 11

Relational Algebra – SQL: fundamentals – DDL – Specifying integrity constraints - DML – Basic
retrieval queries in SQL - Complex SQL retrieval queries – nested queries – correlated queries –
joins - aggregate functions. Creating a table, populating data, adding integrity constraints,
querying tables with simple and complex queries.
UNIT III DATABASE PROGRAMMING 7

Database programming with function calls, stored procedures - views – triggers. Embedded
SQL. ODBC connectivity with front end tools. Implementation using ODBC/JDBC and
SQL/PSM, implementing functions, views, and triggers in MySQL / Oracle.
UNIT IV DATABASE DESIGN 9

Functional Dependencies – Design guidelines – Normal Forms: first, second, third –
Boyce/Codd Normal Form – Normalization algorithms. Design of a banking database system /
university database system.
UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS 9

Database security issues – Discretionary access control – role based access – Encryption and
public key infrastructures – challenges. Information Retrieval: IR Concepts, Retrieval Models,
Queries in IR systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Understand relational data model, evolve conceptual model of a given problem, its
mapping to relational model and Normalization
 Query the relational database and write programs with database connectivity
 Understand the concepts of database security and information retrieval systems
Text Books:
1. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Sixth
Edition , Pearson, 2011.
2. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”,
Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011
References:
1. C.J.Date, A.Kannan, S.Swamynathan, “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Eighth
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, ―Database Management Systems‖, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill
College Publications, 2015.
OTL552 Digital Audio Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the concept of fundamentals of digital audio.
 To understand the concept of audio in digital TV broadcasting.
 To understand the various codes of digital coding.

 To understand the concept of digital audio tape recorder.
 To analyze the concept internet audio in digital audio engineering .
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL AUDIO 9

Discrete time sampling - sampling theorem - Nyquist frequency – aliasing – prevention –
quantization – signal to error ratio – distortion – other architectures – dithers – types of dither.
UNIT II RECORDING AND TRANSMISSION PRINCIPLES 9

PCM – record processing – recording oriented codes – transmission oriented codes – audio in
digital TV broadcasting – DAB.
UNIT III DIGITAL CODING & COMPRESSION 9

Block & convolutional codes – cyclic codes – Reed Solomon codes – interleaving – compression
principles – lossless & perceptive coding – subband codes – transform coding – compression
formats – MPEG audio – Dolby AC 3 – ATRAC.
UNIT IV DIGITAL AUDIO TECHNIQUES 9

Digital audio tape recorder – cassettes – modes – track format – digital audio editing – editing
with random access media & recording media – editor structure – digital audio in optical disks
– CD, MD, DVD, playing optical disk – Minidisk.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF DIGITAL AUDIO 9

Internet audio – MP3 – SDMI – audio MPEG 4 – PC – MIDI – sound cards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students would be able to
 Analyze the type of dither.
 Analyze the recording and transmission principles in digital audio.
 Analyze the various compression techniques.
 Design and analyze the digital audio editing.
 Analyze the various application of digital audio.
Text Books:
1. John Watkinson, “An Introduction to Digital Audio”, Focal Press, Second edition. 2013
2. 2. Ken C Pohlmann, “Principles of Digital audio”, McGraw Hill, Sixth edition, 2010
References:
1. Then Ballin, “ Handbook for sound Engineers Taylor & Francis”, Fifth edition, 2015
2. John Watkinson, “The art of Digital Audio” Focal Press, Third edition, 2013.
OME551 Energy Conservation and Management LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
 Understand and analyze the energy data of industries
 Carryout energy accounting and balancing
 Conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings and
 Utilize the available resources in optimal ways

Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need, Types,
Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of
Capacitors, Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency
Computation, Energy Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy,
LED Lighting and scope of Encon in Illumination.
UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and
encon measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash
Steam Utilization, Insulators & Refractories
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9

Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems –
Cooling Towers – D.G. sets
UNIT V ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present
Value, Life Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyse the energy data of industries.
 Can carry out energy accounting and balancing
 Can suggest methodologies for energy savings
Text Books:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at www.energymanager
training.com,a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory
body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004.
References:
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilisation”
Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Press,
Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987.
OBT553 Fundamentals of Nutrition LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 The course aims to develop the knowledge of students in the basic area of Food
Chemistry.

 This is necessary for effective understanding of food processing and technology
subjects.
 This course will enable students to appreciate the similarities and complexities of the
chemical components in foods.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF NUTRITION 9

Definition, six classes of nutrients, calculating energy values from food, using the RDA,
nutritional status, nutritional requirement, malnutrition, nutritional assessment of individuals
and populations, dietary recommendations, Balanced diet planning: Diet planning principles,
dietary guidelines; food groups, exchange lists, personal diet analysis;
UNIT II DIGESTION 9
Digestion, Absorption and Transport: Anatomy and physiology of the digestive tract,
mechanical and chemical digestion, absorption of nutrients.
UNIT III CARBOHYDRATES 9

Glycemic and Non-glycemic carbohydrates, blood glucose regulation, recommendations of
sugar intake for health, health effects of fiber and starch intake, Artificial sweeteners;
Importance of blood sugar regulation, Dietary recommendations for NIDDM and IDDM
UNIT IV PROTEINS & LIPIDS 9

Proteins; Food enzymes ; Texturized proteins; Food sources, functional role and uses in foods.
Review of structure, composition & nomenclature of fats. Non-glyceride components in fats &
oils; Fat replacements; Food sources, functional role and uses in foods. Health effects and
recommended intakes of lipids. Recommended intakes of proteins, Deficiency- short term and
long term effects.
UNIT V METABOLISM, ENERGY BALANCE AND BODY COMPOSITION 9

Energy Balance; body weight and body composition; health implications; obesity, BMR and
BMI calculations; Weight Control: Fat cell development; hunger, satiety and satiation; dangers
of unsafe weight loss schemes; treatment of obesity; attitudes and behaviours toward weight
control. Food and Pharmaceutical grades; toxicities, deficiencies, factors affecting
bioavailability, Stability under food processing conditions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Text Books:
1. Chopra, H.K. and P.S. Panesar. “Food Chemistry”. Narosa, 2010.
2. Vaclavik, V. A. and Christian E. W. “Essentials of Food Science”. II Edition, Kluwer-
Academic, Springer, 2003.
3. Mann, Jim and Stewart Truswell “Essentials of Human Nutrition”. 3rd Edition. Oxford
4. Gibney, Michael J., et al., “Introduction to Human Nutrition”. 2nd Edition.
Blackwell,2009.
5. Gropper, Sareen S. and Jack L.Smith “Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism”.
5th Edition. Wadsworth Publishing, 2008.
References:
1. Gopalan C., B.V. Rama Sastri, and S.C. Balasubramanian S. C. “Nutritive Value of
Indian Foods”. NIN, ICMR, 2004.
2. Damodaran, S., K.L. Parkin and O.R. Fennema. “Fennema‟s Food Chemistry”. 4th
Edition, CRC Press, 2008
3. Belitz,H.-D, Grosch W and Schieberle P. “Food Chemistry”, 3rd Rev. Edition, Springer-
Verlag, 2004.
4. Walstra, P. “Physical Chemistry of Foods”. Marcel Dekker Inc. 2003.
5. Owusu-Apenten, Richard. “Introduction to Food Chemistry”. CRC Press, 2005.

OCE552 Geographic Information System LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the fundamentals and components of Geographic Information System

 To provide details of spatial data structures and input, management and output
processes.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and Information
Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software, Data,
People, Methods – Proprietary and open source Software - Types of data – Spatial, Attribute
data- types of attributes – scales/ levels of measurements.
UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9

Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – ER diagram - spatial data models – Raster
Data Structures – Raster Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector
Models- TIN and GRID data models - OGC standards - Data Quality.
UNIT III DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Vector Data Input –Digitiser –
Topology - Adjacency, connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency rules – Attribute
Data linking – ODBC – GPS - Concept GPS based mapping.
UNIT IV DATA ANALYSIS 9

Vector Data Analysis tools - Data Analysis tools - Network Analysis - Digital Education models
- 3D data collection and utilisation.
GIS Applicant - Natural Resource Management - Engineering - Navigation - Vehicle tracking
and fleet management - Marketing and Business applications - Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
This course equips the student to
 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
 Understand the types of data models.
 Get knowledge about data input and topology.
 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards.
 Understand data management functions and data output
Text Books:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw Hill
Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction
Geographical Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.
References:
1. Lo.C.P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
Systems, Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006.

OPY551 Herbal Technology LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To acquire the basic knowledge of Indian system of medicines.
 To enable the students to know about the plant tissue culture techniques and learn
about the instruments used in the extraction, isolation, purification and identification
of herbal drugs.
UNIT I INDIAN SYSTEMS OF MEDICINE 9

Introduction, basic principles and treatment modalities of Ayurveda – Unani – Homeopathy –
Siddha –naturopathy- Introduction and streams of Yoga. Classification of herbs - Harvesting –
Post harvesting – Conditions of storage.-seasonal and geographical variation.
UNIT II IN-VITRO CULTURE OF MEDICINAL PLANTS 9

Requirements – Setting up a tissue culture lab – Basic laboratory procedure – Processing of
plant tissue culture – Growth profile – Growth measurement – Plant tissue culture methods –
Callus culture – Types of tissue culture – Tissue culture of medicinal plants – Applications of
plant tissue culture.
UNIT III PHYTO PHARMACEUTICALS 9

Traditional and modern extraction techniques: Successive solvent extraction- Super critical
fluid extraction – Steam distillation – Head space techniques – Sepbox –General extraction
process: Carbohydrates – Proteins – Alkaloids –Glycosides. Isolation and purification of
phytochemicals (Eg. Quinine from cinchona, vincristine from Vinca, sennoside from senna,
Euginol from clove oil.)
UNIT IV SCREENING METHODS FOR HERBAL DRUGS 9

Screening methods for anti-fertility agents – Antidiabetic drugs – Anti anginal drugs – Diuretic
– Analgesic activity – Antipyretic activity – Anti cancer activity –Evaluation of hepatoprotective
agents – anticonvulsive- Anti ulcer drugs.
UNIT V STANDARDIZATION AND CONSERVATION OF HERBAL DRUGS 9

Importance of standardization - Standardization of single drugs and compound formulations –
WHO guidelines for the quality assessment herbal drugs - Conservation strategies of medicinal
plants – Government policies for protecting the traditional knowledge.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The student will be able to

 Understand the basic principle, design, control and processing techniques of medicinal
plants and their derivatives.
 Find a solution to problems, including social, scientific and ethical issues connected
with the use of medicinal plants in the different field of applications.
 Describe the biological effects of medicinal plants with legislation and governmental
policies for conserving medicinal plants.
Text Books:
1. Agarwal, S.S. & Paridhavi, M., “Herbal Drug Technology” Universities Press, Pvt Limited,
2007.
2. Wallis, T.E., “Textbook of Pharmacognosy” 5th Edition, CBS Publishers and
Distributors, 2005.

3. Indian System of Medicine and Homeopathy, Planning and Evaluation Cell, Govt. of
India, New Delhi, 2001.
4. Yoga- The Science of Holistic Living by V.K.Yoga, VKY Prakashna Publishing, Bangalore,
2005.
5. Quality Control Methods for medicinal plant material, WHO Geneva, 1998.
References:
1. Evans, W.C., “Trease and Evans Pharmacognosy” 15th Edition, Elsevier Health
Sciences, 2001.
2. Pulok K. Mukherjee., “Quality control of Herbal Drugs” Reprinted, Business Horizons,
New Delhi, 2012.
3. Daniel, M., “Herbal Technology: Concepts and Advances” Satish Serial Publishing
House, 2008.
OMD552 Hospital Waste Management LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 Know about the healthcare hazard control and accidents
 Understand biomedical waste management
 Learn the facility guidelines, infection control and patient safety.
UNIT I HEALTHCARE HAZARD CONTROL AND UNDERSTANDING ACCIDENTS 9

Healthcare Hazard Control: Introduction, Hazard Control: Management & Responsibilities,
Hazard Analysis, Hazard Correction, Personal Protective Equipment, Hazard Control
Committees, Accident Causation Theories, Accident Reporting, Accident Investigations,
Accident Analysis, Accident Prevention, Workers‟ Compensation, Orientation, Education, and
Training.
UNIT II BIOMEDICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Biomedical Waste Management : Types of wastes, major and minor sources of biomedical
waste, Categories and classification of biomedical waste, hazard of biomedical waste, need for
disposal of biomedical waste, waste minimization, waste segregation and labeling, waste
handling and disposal.
UNIT III HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 9

Hazardous Materials : Hazardous Substance Safety, OSHA Hazard Communication Standard,
DOT Hazardous Material Regulations, Healthcare Hazardous Materials, Medical Gas Systems,
Respiratory Protection.
UNIT IV FACILITY SAFETY 9

Introduction, Facility Guidelines: Institute, Administrative Area Safety, Slip, Trip, and Fall
Prevention, Safety Signs, Colors, and Marking Requirements, Tool Safety, Electrical Safety,
Control of Hazardous Energy, Landscape and Ground Maintenance, Fleet and Vehicle Safety.
UNIT V INFECTION CONTROL, PREVENTION AND PATIENT SAFETY 9

Healthcare Immunizations, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Disinfectants,
Sterilants, and Antiseptics, OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard, Tuberculosis, Healthcare
Opportunistic Infections, Healthcare-Associated Infections, Medication Safety.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Course Outcomes:
 After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to know the
concepts of healthcare waste management, its prevention and safety.
References:
1. Tweedy, James T., Healthcare hazard control and safety management-CRC Press_Taylor
and Francis (2014).
2. Anantpreet Singh, Sukhjit Kaur, Biomedical Waste Disposal, Jaypee Brothers Medical
Publishers (P) Ltd (2012).
OCH551 Industrial Nanotechnology LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in each industry
 To provide instances of contemporary industrial applications of nanotechnology
 To provide an overview of future technological advancements and increasing role of
nanotechnology in each industry
UNIT I NANO ELECTRONICS 9

Advantages of nano electrical and electronic devices –Electronic circuit chips – Lasers - Micro
and NanoElectromechanical systems – Sensors, Actuators, Optical switches,- Data memory –
Lighting and Displays – Batteries - Fuel cells and Photo-voltaic cells – Electric double layer
capacitors – Lead-free solder – Nanoparticle coatings for electrical products
UNIT II BIONANOTECHNOLOGY 9
Nanoparticles in bone substitutes and dentistry – Implants and Prosthesis – Nanorobotics in
Surgery –Nanosensors in Diagnosis– Neuro-electronic Interfaces– Therapeutic applications
UNIT III NANOTECHNOLOGY IN CHEMICAL INDUSTRY 9

Nanocatalyts – Smart materials – Heterogenous nanostructures and composites –
Nanostructures for Molecular recognition (Quantum dots, Nanorods, Nanotubes) – Molecular
Encapsulation and its applications – Nanoporous zeolites – Self-assembled Nanoreactors
UNIT IV NANOTECHNOLOGY IN AGRICULTURE AND FOOD TECHNOLOGY 9

Nanotechnology in Agriculture -Precision farming, Smart delivery system – Insecticides using
nanotechnology – Potential of nano-fertilizers - Nanotechnology in Food industry
UNIT V NANOTECHNOLOGY IN TEXTILES AND COSMETICS 9

Nanofibre production - Electrospinning – Controlling morphologies of nanofibers – Tissue
engineering application– Polymer nanofibers - Nylon-6 nanocomposites from polymerization -
Nano-filled polypropylene fibers - Nano finishing in textiles (UV resistant, antibacterial,
hydrophilic, self-cleaning, flame retardant finishes) – Modern textiles Cosmetics – Formulation
of Gels, Shampoos, Hair-conditioners.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
References:
1. Neelina H. Malsch (Ed.),Biomedical Nanotechnology, CRC Press (2005)

2. Udo H. Brinker, Jean-Luc Mieusset (Eds.), Molecular Encapsulation: Organic Reactions
in Constrained Systems, Wiley Publishers (2010).

3. Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, Nanotechnology in agriculture and food production,
Woodrow Wilson International Center, (2006).
4. Lynn J. Frewer, Willehm Norde, R. H. Fischer and W. H. Kampers, Nanotechnology in
the Agri-food sector, Wiley-VCH Verlag, (2011).
5. P. J. Brown and K. Stevens, Nanofibers and Nanotechnology in Textiles, Woodhead
Publishing Limited, Cambridge, (2007).
6. Y-W. Mai,Polymer Nano composites, Woodhead publishing, (2006).
7. W.N. Chang,Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications, Nova Science
Publishers Inc, (2009)
OBT551 Introduction to Bioenergy and Biofuels LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 This course will be focused on achievement, acquisition of knowledge and enhancement
of comprehension of information regarding bioenergy and biofuel technologies and their
sustainable applications.
UNIT I CONCEPTS 9
Biopower, Bioheat, Biofuesl, advanced liquid fuels, drop-in fuels, biobased products
UNIT II FEEDSTOCKS 9
Harvested Feedstocks: First generation biofuels, Second generation biofuels, third generation
biofuels. Residue Feedstocks: Agricultural wastes, forestry wastes, farm waste, organic
components of residential, commercial, institutional and industrial waste.
UNIT III CONVERSION TECHNOLOGIES 9

Biorefinery concept – biorefineries and end products, Biochemical conversion – hydrolysis,
enzyme and acid hydrolysis, fermentation, anaerobic digestion and trans-esterification,
Thermochemical conversion – Combustion, Gasification, Pyrolysis, other thermochemical
conversion technologies. Scaling up of emerging technologies.
UNIT IV BIOFUELS 9
Pros and cons of Biofuels, Algal biofuels, Cyanobacteria and producers of biofuels, Jatropha as
biodiesel producer, Bioethanol, Biomethane, biohydrogen, biobutanol, metabolic engineering of
fuel molecules, Engineering aspects of biofuels, Economics of biofuels
UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY & RESILIENCE 9

Environmental Sustainability, bioenergy sustainability, emissions of biomass to power
generation applications, emissions from biofuels. ILUC issues, Carbon footprint, Advanced low
carbon fuels
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Text Books:
1. Biorenewable Resources – Engieering new products. Robert C Brown. Blackwell
Publishing Professional, 2003.
2. Biofuels. Wim Soetaert and Erik Vandamme (Editors) Wiley. 2009.
3. Biomass for Renewable Energy, Fuels and Chemicals. Donald Klass. Academic press.
1998
References:
1. Introduction to Bioenergy.Vaughn C. Nelson and Kenneth L. Starcher.

2. Bioenergy: Biomass to Biofuels by by Anju Dahiya
3. Bioenergy: Principles and Applications by Yebo Li and Samir Kumar Khanal
4. Bioenergy by Judy D. Wall and Caroline S. Harwood
5. Bioenergy: Sustainable Perspectives by Ted Weyland
6. W.N. Chang,Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications, Nova Science
Publishers Inc, (2009)
OEI551 Logic and Distributed Control Systems LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To give an introductory knowledge on Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and their
programming languages
 To give adequate knowledge about applications of PLC
 To give basic knowledge about Computer Controlled Systems
 To give basic knowledge on the architecture and local control unit of Distributed
Control System (DCS)
 To give adequate information with respect to interfaces used in DCS
UNIT I PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9

Evolution of PLCs – Components of PLC – Architecture of PLC – Discrete and analog I/O
modules – Programming languages -Ladder diagram – Function block diagram (FBD) -
Programming timers and counters
UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF PLC 9

Instructions in PLC – Program control instructions, math instructions, data manipulation
Instructions, sequencer and shift register instructions – Case studies in PLC
UNIT III COMPUTER CONTROLLED SYSTEMS 9

Basic building blocks of computer controlled systems – Data acquisition system – Supervisory
control – Direct digital control- SCADA:- Hardware and software, Remote terminal units,
Master Station and Communication architectures.
UNIT IV DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

DCS – Various Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process interfacing issues –
Communication facilities
UNIT V INTERFACES IN DCS 9

Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces – Displays - Engineering
interfaces – Low level and high level engineering interfaces – Factors to be considered in
selecting DCS – Case studies in DCS
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Ability to understand and analyze Instrumentation systems and their applications to

various industries.
 Ability to understand and analyse, linear and digital electronic circuits.

Text Books:
1. F.D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, Third edition,
2010.
2. Michael P. Lukas, Distributed Control Systems: Their Evaluation and Design, Van
Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1986.
3. D. Popovic and V.P.Bhatkar,‟ Distributed computer control for industrial Automation‟
Marcel Dekker, Inc., Newyork ,1990.
References:
1. T.A. Hughes, Programmable Controllers, Fourth edition, ISA press, 2005
2. Krishna Kant, Computer Based Industrial Control, Second edition, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2010.
3. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, 'Programmable Logic Controllers, Fifth edition,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.
4. John R. Hackworth and Frederick D. Hackworth Jr, Programmable Logic Controllers,
Pearson, New Delhi, 2004.
5. Clarke, G., Reynders, D. and Wright, E., “Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3,4.
60870.5 and Related Systems”, Newnes, 1st Edition, 2004.
6. E.A.Parr, Programmable Controllers, An Engineer’s Guide, Elsevier, 2013
OBM552 Medical Physics LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To study the complete non-ionizing radiations including light and its effect in human
body.
 To understand the principles of ultrasound radiation and its applications in medicine.
 To learn about radioactive nuclides and also the interactions of radiation with matters
and how isotopes are produced.
 To study the harmful effects of radiation and radiation protection regulations.
UNIT I NON-IONIZING RADIATION AND ITS MEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Introduction to EM waves - Tissue as a leaky dielectric - Relaxation processes: Debye model,
Cole–Cole model- Overview of non-ionizing radiation effects-Low Frequency Effects- Higher
frequency effects. Physics of light-Measurement of light and its unit- limits of vision and color
vision an overview - Applications of ultraviolet in medicine, Thermography.
UNIT II ULTRASOUND IN MEDICINE 9

Ultrasound fundamentals – Generation of ultrasound (Ultrasound Transducer) - Interaction of
Ultrasound with matter: Cavitation, Reflection, Transmission- Scanning systems – Artefacts-
Ultrasound- Doppler-Double Doppler shift-Clinical Applications- Ultrasonography.
UNIT III PRINCIPLES OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLIDES AND DECAY 9

Introduction to Radioisotopes - Radioactive decay : Spontaneous Fission, Isomeric Transition,
Alpha Decay, Beta Decay, Positron Decay, Electron Capture- Radioactive decay equations –
Half life- Mean Life- Effective half-life - Natural and Artificial radioactivity, - Production of
radionuclide – Cyclotron produced Radionuclide - Reactor produced Radionuclide: fission and
electron Capture reaction, Target and Its Processing Equation for Production of Radionuclide -
Radionuclide Generator-Technetium generator.

UNIT IV INTERACTION OF RADIATION WITH MATTER 9
Interaction of charged particles with matter –Specific ionization, Linear energy transfer, range,
Bremsstrahlung, Annihilation - Interaction of X and Gamma radiation with matter:
Photoelectric effect, Compton Scattering, Pair production- Attenuation of Gamma Radiation -
Interaction of neutron with matter and their clinical significance- Radionuclide used in
Medicine and Technology.
UNIT V RADIATION EFFECTS AND REGULATIONS 9

Classification of Radiation Damage, Stochastic and Deterministic Effects, Acute Effects of Total
Body Irradiation, Long-Term Effects of Radiation, Risk Versus Benefit in Diagnostic Radiology
and Nuclear Medicine, Risk of Pregnant Women, Nuclear Regulatory Commission, ALARA
Program, Medical Uses of Radioactive Materials, Survey for Contamination and Exposure Rate,
Dose Calibrators and Survey Meters, Bioassay, Radioactive Waste Disposal.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Analyze the low frequency and high frequency effects of non-ionizing radiation and
physics of light.
 Define various clinical applications based on ultrasound wave.
 Explain the process of radioactive nuclide production using different techniques
 Analyze radiation mechanics involved with various physiological systems
 Outline the detrimental effects of radiation and regulations for radiation safety.
Text Books:
1. B H Brown, R H Smallwood, D C Barber, P V Lawford and D R Hose, Medical Physics
and Biomedical Engineering, 2nd Edition, IOP Publishers.2001. (Unit I & II)
2. Gopal B. Saha, Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine, 4th Edition, Springer,
2013. (Unit III & IV)
3. R.Hendee and Russell Ritenour “Medical Imaging Physics”, Fourth Edition William,
Wiley-Liss, 2002. (Unit V)
References:
1. S.Webb “ The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Taylor and Francis, 1988
2. HyltonB.Meire and Pat Farrant “Basic Ultrasound” John Wiley & Sons, 1995
3. John R Cameran, James G Skofronick “Medical Physics” John-Wiley & Sons. 1978
4. W.J.Meredith and J.B. Massey “Fundamental Physics of Radiology” Third edition,
Varghese Publishing house. 1992
OML552 Microscopy LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
This course will cover the basic principles and techniques of optical and electron
microscopy. This course also deals with the sample preparation techniques for the
microstructural analysis.
History of Microscopy, Overview of current microscopy techniques. Light as particles and
waves, Fundamental of optics: Diffraction and interference in image formation, real and virtual

images, Resolution, Depth of field and focus, Magnification, Numerical aperture, Aberration of
lenses. Components of Light Microscopy, Compound light microscopy and its variations.
UNIT II MICROSCOPY 9
Phase contrast microscopy: optical design, theory, image interpretation, Dark-field microscopy:
optical design, theory , image interpretation, Polarization Microscopy: Polarized light, optical
design, theory , image interpretation, Differential Interference Contrast (DIC): equipment and
optics, image interpretation, Modulation contrast microscopy: contrast methods using oblique
illumination.
UNIT III ELECTRON MICROSCOPY 9

Interaction of electrons with matter, elastic and inelastic scattering, secondary effects,
Components of electron microscopy: Electron sources, pumps and holders, lenses, apertures,
and resolution. Scanning Electron and Transmission Electron Microscopy: Principle,
construction, applications and limitations.
UNIT IV SAMPLE PREPARATION FOR MICROSTRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 9

Optical Microscopy sample preparation: Grinding, polishing and etching, SEM sample
preparation: size constrains, TEM sample preparation: Disk preparation, electro polishing, ion
milling, lithography, storing specimens.
UNIT V CHEMICAL ANALYSIS 9

Surface chemical composition (Principle and applications) - Mass spectroscopy and X-ray
emission spectroscopy - Energy Dispersive Spectroscopy- Wave Dispersive Spectroscopy.
Electron spectroscopy for chemical analysis (ESCA), Ultraviolet Photo Electron Spectroscopy
(UPS), X ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS), Auger Electron Spectroscopy (AES)-
Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Able to understand the physics behind the microscopy.
 Ability to describe the principle, construction and working of light microscopy.
 Ability to appreciate about electron microscopy.
 Ability to understand about the important of sample preparation technique.
 Ability to identify the appropriate spectroscopy technique for chemical analysis.
Text Books:
1. Douglas B. Murphy, Fundamentals of light microscopy and electronic imaging, 2001,

Wiley-Liss, Inc. USA.
2. David B. Williams and C. Barry Carter, Transmission Electron Microscopy-A Textbook
for Materials Science, Springer US, 2nd edition, 2009.
References:
1. Brandon D. G, “Modern Techniques in Metallography”, Von Nostrand Inc. NJ,

USA,1986.
2. Whan R E (Ed), ASM Handbook, Volume 10, Materials Characterisation”, Nineth
Edition, ASM international, USA, 1986.
3. Thomas G., “Transmission electron microscopy of metals”, John Wiley, 1996

OEI552 SCADA System and Applications Management LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand about the SCADA system components and SCADA communication
protocols
 To provide knowledge about SCADA applications in power system
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SCADA 9

Evolution of SCADA, SCADA definitions, SCADA Functional requirements and Components,
SCADA Hierarchical concept, SCADA architecture, General features, SCADA Applications,
Benefits
UNIT II SCADA SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Interface units, Human- Machine Interface Units (HMI), Display
Monitors/Data Logger Systems, Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED), Communication Network,
SCADA Server, SCADA Control systems and Control panels
UNIT III SCADA COMMUNICATION 9

SCADA Communication requirements, Communication protocols: Past, Present and Future,
Structure of a SCADA Communications Protocol, Comparison of various communication
protocols, IEC61850 based communication architecture, Communication media like Fiber
optic, PLCC etc. Interface provisions and communication extensions, synchronization with
NCC, DCC.
UNIT IV SCADA MONITORING AND CONTROL 9

Online monitoring the event and alarm system, trends and reports, Blocking list, Event
disturbance recording. Control function: Station control, bay control, breaker control and
disconnector control.
UNIT V SCADA APPLICATIONS IN POWER SYSTEM 9

Applications in Generation, Transmission and Distribution sector, Substation SCADA system
Functional description, System specification, System selection such as Substation
configuration, IEC61850 ring configuration, SAS cubicle concepts, gateway interoperability list,
signal naming concept. System Installation, Testing and Commissioning.
CASE STUDIES: SCADA Design for 66/11KV and 132/66/11KV or 132/66 KV any utility
Substation and IEC 61850 based SCADA Implementation issues in utility Substations,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 This course gives knowledge about various system components and communication
protocols of SCADA system and its applications.
References:
1. Stuart A. Boyer: SCADA-Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, Instrument Society
of America Publications,USA,2004
2. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders: Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5 and
Related Systems, Newnes Publications, Oxford, UK,2004
3. William T. Shaw, Cybersecurity for SCADA systems, PennWell Books, 2006
4. David Bailey, Edwin Wright, Practical SCADA for industry, Newnes, 2003
5. Michael Wiebe, A guide to utility automation: AMR, SCADA, and IT systems for electric
Power, Penn Well 1999
6. Dieter K. Hammer, Lonnie R. Welch, Dieter K. Hammer, “Engineering of Distributed
Control Systems”, Nova Science Publishers, USA, 1st Edition, 2001.

OBT554 Principles of Food Preservation LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Preservation. This is
necessary for effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and
technology subjects.
UNIT I FOOD PRESERVATION AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Introduction to food preservation. Wastage of processed foods; Shelf life of food products; Types
of food based on its perishability. Traditional methods of preservation
UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of
raw and processed foods. retort pouch packing, Aseptic packaging.
UNIT III THERMAL METHODS 9

Newer methods of thermal processing; batch and continuous; In container sterilization-
canning; application of infra-red microwaves; ohmic heating; control of water activity;
preservation by concentration and dehydration; osmotic methods
UNIT IV DRYING PROCESS FOR TYPICAL FOODS 9

Rate of drying for food products; design parameters of different type of dryers; properties of air-
water mixtures. Psychrometric chart, freezing and cold storage.freeze concentration, dehydro-
freezing, freeze drying, IQF; calculation of refrigeration load, design of freezers and cold
storages.
UNIT V NON-THERMAL METHODS 9
Super Critical Technology for Preservation - Chemical preservatives, preservation by ionizing
radiations, ultrasonics, high pressure, fermentation, curing, pickling, smoking, membrane
technology. Hurdle technology,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
 Be aware of the different methods applied to preserving foods.
Text Books:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge,
2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and
Practice”.Surbhi Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.
References:
1. Rahman, M. Shafiur. “Handbook of Food Preservation”. Marcel & Dekker, 2006.
2. Zeuthen, Peter and Bogh-Sarensen, Leif. “Food Preservation Techniques”. CRC / Wood
Head Publishing, 2003.
3. Ranganna, S. “Handbook of Canning and Aseptic Packaging”. Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000.
4. Ranganna, S. “Handbook of Canning and Aseptic Packaging”. Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000.

OMF551 Product Design and Development LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 The course aims at providing the basic concepts of product design, product features
and its architecture so that student can have a basic knowledge in the common
features a product has and how to incorporate them suitably in product.
Need for IPPD – Strategic importance of Product development – integration of customer,
designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer – Behaviour
analysis. Understanding customer – prompting customer understanding – involve customer in
development and managing requirements – Organization – process management and
improvement – Plan and establish product specifications.
UNIT II CONCEPT GENERATION AND SELECTION 9

Task – Structured approaches – clarification – search – externally and internally – explore
systematically – reflect on the solutions and processes – concept selection – methodology –
benefits.
UNIT III PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 9

Implications – Product change – variety – component standardization – product performance –
manufacturability – product development management – establishing the architecture –
creation – clustering – geometric layout development – fundamental and incidental interactions
– related system level design issues – secondary systems – architecture of the chunks –
creating detailed interface specifications.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Integrate process design – Managing costs – Robust design – Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools
– Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically – Need for
industrial design – impact – design process – investigation of for industrial design – impact –
design process – investigation of customer needs – conceptualization – refinement –
management of the industrial design process – technology driven products – user – driven
products – assessing the quality of industrial design.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Definition – Estimation of Manufacturing cost – reducing the component costs and assembly
costs – Minimize system complexity – Prototype basics – principles of prototyping – planning for
prototypes – Economic Analysis – Understanding and representing tasks – baseline project
planning – accelerating the project – project execution.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 The student will be able to design some products for the given set of applications; also
the knowledge gained through prototyping technology will help the student to make a
prototype of a problem and hence product design and development can be achieved.
Text Books:
1. Kari T.Ulrich and Steven D.Eppinger, ”Product Design and Development”, McGraw-Hill
International Edns. 1999.
References:
1. Kemnneth Crow, “Concurrent Engg./Integrated Product Development”, DRM
Associates, 26/3,Via Olivera, Palos Verdes, CA 90274(310) 377-569, Workshop Book.

2. Stephen Rosenthal, “Effective Product Design and Development”, Business One Orwin,
Homewood, 1992, ISBN 1-55623-603-4.
3. Staurt Pugh, “Tool Design –Integrated Methods for Successful Product Engineering”,
Addison Wesley Publishing, New york, NY.
ORO551 Renewable Energy Sources LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To get exposure on solar radiation and its environmental impact to power.
 To know about the various collectors used for storing solar energy.
 To know about the various applications in solar energy.
 To learn about the wind energy and biomass and its economic aspects.
 To know about geothermal energy with other energy sources.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF SOLAR RADIATION 10

Role and potential of new and renewable source, the solar energy option, Environmental impact
of solar power, physics of the sun, the solar constant, extraterrestrial and terrestrial solar
radiation, solar radiation on titled surface, instruments for measuring solar radiation and sun
shine, solar radiation data.
UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTION 8

Flat plate and concentrating collectors, classification of concentrating collectors, orientation
and thermal analysis, advanced collectors.
UNIT III SOLAR ENERGY STORAGE AND APPLICATIONS 7

Different methods, Sensible, latent heat and stratified storage, solar ponds. Solar Applications-
solar heating/cooling technique, solar distillation and drying, photovoltaic energy conversion.
UNIT IV WIND ENERGY 10

Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance characteristics,
Betz criteria BIO-MASS: Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion, types of
Bio-gas digesters, gas yield, combustion characteristics of bio-gas, utilization for cooking,
I.C.Engine operation and economic aspects.
UNIT V GEOTHERMAL ENERGY: 9

Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the energy, potential in India. OCEAN
ENERGY: OTEC, Principles utilization, setting of OTEC plants, thermodynamic cycles. Tidal
and wave energy: Potential and conversion techniques, mini-hydel power plants, and their
economics. DIRECT ENERGY CONVERSION: Need for DEC, Carnot cycle, limitations,
principles of DEC.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Understanding the physics of solar radiation.
 Ability to classify the solar energy collectors and methodologies of storing solar energy.
 Knowledge in applying solar energy in a useful way.
 Knowledge in wind energy and biomass with its economic aspects.
 Knowledge in capturing and applying other forms of energy sources like wind, biogas
and geothermal energies.

Text Books:
1. Rai G.D. , “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, 2011 2. Twidell &
Wier, “Renewable Energy Resources”, CRC Press (Taylor & Francis), 2011
References:
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, “Renewable energy resources”, Narosa Publishing House, 2007
2. Ramesh R & Kumar K.U , “Renewable Energy Technologies”,Narosa Publishing House,
2004
3. Mittal K M , “Non-Conventional Energy Systems”, Wheeler Publishing Co. Ltd, New
Delhi, 2003
4. Kothari D.P, Singhal ., K.C., “Renewable energy sources and emerging technologies”,
P.H.I, New Delhi, 2010
OCS551 Software Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the phases in a software development project
 To learn project management concepts
 To understand the concepts of requirements analysis and modeling.
 To understand software design methodologies
 To learn various testing methodologies
 To be familiar with issues related to software maintenance
UNIT I SOFTWARE PROCESS 9

Introduction to Software Engineering, scope – software crisis – principles of software
engineering - Software process – Life cycle models – Traditional and Agile Models - Team
organization.
UNIT II PLANNING AND ESTIMATION 9

Planning and the software process – cost estimation: LOC, FP Based Estimation, COCOMO I &
II Models – Duration estimation and tracking – Gantt chart - Software Project Management –
plan – risk analysis and management.
UNIT III REQUIREMENTS ANALYSIS AND SPECIFICATION 9

Software Requirements: Functional and Non-Functional, Software Requirements specification–
Structured system Analysis – modeling: UML based tools, DFD - Requirement Engineering
Process.
UNIT IV SOFTWARE DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION 9

Design process – Design principles and guidelines – design techniques – coupling and cohesion
- metrics – tools. Implementation: choice of programming language, programming practices –
coding standards – code walkthroughs and inspections.
UNIT V TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 9

Software testing fundamentals- Testing techniques: white box, black box, glass box testing -
unit testing – integration testing –system testing – acceptance testing – debugging. Post-delivery
maintenance: Types – objectives - metrics - Reverse Engineering.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to
 Understand different software life cycle models.

 Perform software requirements analysis
 Apply systematic methodologies for software design and deployment.
 Understand various testing approaches and maintenance related issues.
 Plan project schedule, and estimate project cost and effort required.
Text Books:
1. Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering – A Practitioner's Approach”, Seventh
Edition, Mc Graw-Hill International Edition, 2010.
2. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education Asia,
2011.
References:
1. Rajib Mall, “Fundamentals of Software Engineering”, Third Edition, PHI Learning
Private Limited, 2009.
2. Pankaj Jalote, “Software Engineering, A Precise Approach”, Wiley India, 2010.
3. Kelkar S.A., “Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2007.
4. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited,2007.
5. http://nptel.ac.in/.
OTL551 Space Time Wireless Communication LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the concept of multiple antenna propagation.
 To understand the concept of capacity of frequency flat deterministic MIMO channel.
 To understand the concept of transmitter and receiver diversity technique.
 To design the coding for frequency flat channel.
 To analyze the concept of micro multi user detection.
UNIT I MULTIPLE ANTENNA PROPAGATION AND ST CHANNEL CHARACTERIZATION 9

Wireless channel – Scattering model in macrocells – Channel as a ST random field – Scattering
functions, Polarization and field diverse channels – Antenna array topology – Degenerate
channels – reciprocity and its implications – Channel definitions – Physical scattering model –
Extended channel model – Channel measurements – sampled signal model – ST multiuser and
ST interference channels – ST channel estimation.
UNIT II CAPACITY OF MULTIPLE ANTENNA CHANNELS 9

Capacity of frequency flat deterministic MIMO channel: Channel unknown to the transmitter –
Channel known to the transmitter – capacity of random MIMO channels – Influence of ricean
fading – fading correlation – XPD and degeneracy on MIMO capacity – Capacity of frequency
selective MIMO channels.
UNIT III SPATIAL DIVERSITY 9

Diversity gain – Receive antenna diversity – Transmit antenna diversity – Diversity order and
channel variability – Diversity performance in extended channels – Combined space and path
diversity – Indirect transmit diversity – Diversity of a space-time – frequency selective fading
channel.
UNIT IV MULTIPLE ANTENNA CODING AND RECEIVERS 9

Coding and interleaving architecture – ST coding for frequency flat channels – ST coding for
frequency selective channels – Receivers–SISO–SIMO–MIMO–Iterative MIMO receivers –

Exploiting channel knowledge at the transmitter: linear pre-filtering – optimal pre-filtering for
maximum rate – optimal pre-filtering for error rate minimization – selection at the transmitter –
Exploiting imperfect channel knowledge
UNIT V ST OFDM, SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MIMO MULTIUSER DETECTION 9

SISO-OFDM modulation, MIMO-OFDM modulation – Signaling and receivers for MIMO– OFDM
– SISO–SS modulation – MIMO-SS modulation – Signaling and receivers for MIMO – S.MIMO –
MAC – MIMO – BC – Outage performance for MIMO-MU – MIMO - MU with OFDM – CDMA and
multiple antennas.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Design and analyze the channel characterization.
 Analyze the capacity of random MIMO channel.
 Design and analyze the order diversity and channel variability.
 Analyze the multiple antenna coding and receivers.
 Analyze the MIMO multi user detection
Text Books:
1. Sergio Verdu, “Multi User Detection” , Cambridge University Press, 2011.
2. A. Paulraj, Rohit Nabar, Dhananjay Gore, “Introduction to Space Time Wireless
Communication Systems”, Cambridge University Press , 2008 .
References:
1. Don Tarrieri, “ Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication systems” ,Springer, Third
edition, 2015
OTL553 Telecommunication Network Management LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the concept of network management standards.
 To design the common management information service element model.
 To understand the various concept of information modelling.
 To analyze the concept of SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 protocol.
 To analyze the concept of examples of network management.
UNIT I FOUNDATIONS 9
Network management standards–network management model– organization model–
information model abstract syntax notation 1 (ASN.1) – encoding structure– macros–functional
model. Network management application functional requirements: Configuration management–
fault management–performance management–Error correlation technology– security
management–accounting management– common management–report management– polity
based management–service level management–management service–community definitions–
capturing the requirements– simple and formal approaches–semi formal and formal notations.
UNIT II COMMON MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SERVICE ELEMENT 9

CMISE model–service definitions–errors–scooping and filtering features– synchronization–
functional units– association services– common management information protocol
specification.

UNIT III INFORMATION MODELING FOR TMN 9
Rationale for information modeling–management information model–object oriented modeling
paradigm– structure of management information–managed object class definition–management
information base.
UNIT IV SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL 9

SNMPv1: managed networks–SNMP models– organization model–information model–SNMPv2
communication model–functional model–major changes in SNMPv2–structure of management
information, MIB–SNMPv2 protocol– compatibility with SNMPv1– SNMPv3– architecture–
applications–MIB security, remote monitoring–SMI and MIB– RMQN1 and RMON2.
UNIT V NETWORK MANAGEMENT EXAMPLES 9

ATM integrated local management interface–ATM MIB–M1– M2–M3– M4– interfaces–ATM digital
exchange interface management–digita1 subscriber loop and asymmetric DSL technologies–
ADSL configuration management–performance management Network management tools:
Network statistics management–network management system–management platform case
studies: OPENVIEW–ALMAP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Design and analyze of fault management.
 Analyze the common management information protocol specifications.
 Design and analyze of management information model.
 Design the simple network management protocol.
 Design the various types of network management tools.
Text Books:
1. 1. Mani Subramanian, “Network Management: Principles and Practice” Pearson
Education, Second edition, 2010
2. Lakshmi G Raman, “Fundamentals of Telecommunications Network Management”,
Wiley, 1999
References:
1. Henry Haojin Wang, “Telecommunication Network Management”, Mc- Graw Hill ,1999
2. Salah Aidarous & Thomas Plevyak, “Telecommunication Network Management:
Technologies and Implementations” , Wiley,1997
OMD553 Telehealth Technology LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 Learn the key principles for telemedicine and health.
 Understand telemedical technology.
 Know telemedical standards, mobile telemedicine and it applications
UNIT I TELEMEDICINE AND HEALTH 9

History and Evolution of telemedicine, Organs of telemedicine, Global and Indian scenario,
Ethical and legal aspects of Telemedicine - Confidentiality, Social and legal issues, Safety and
regulatory issues, Advances in Telemedicine.

UNIT II TELEMEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 9
Principles of Multimedia - Text, Audio, Video, data, Data communications and networks, PSTN,
POTS, ANT, ISDN, Internet, Air/ wireless communications Communication infrastructure for
telemedicine – LAN and WAN technology. Satellite communication, Mobile communication.
UNIT III TELEMEDICAL STANDARDS 9

Data Security and Standards: Encryption, Cryptography, Mechanisms of encryption, phases of
Encryption. Protocols: TCP/IP, ISO-OSI, Standards to followed DICOM, HL7, H. 320 series
Video Conferencing, Security and confidentiality of medical records, Cyber laws related to
telemedicine
UNIT IV MOBILE TELEMEDICINE 9

Tele radiology: Image Acquisition system Display system, Tele pathology, Medical information
storage and management for telemedicine- patient information, medical history, test reports,
medical images, Hospital information system
UNIT V TELEMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Telemedicine – health education and self care. · Introduction to robotics surgery, Telesurgery.
Telecardiology, Teleoncology, Telemedicine in neurosciences, Business aspects - Project
planning and costing, Usage of telemedicine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Apply multimedia technologies in telemedicine.
 Explain Protocols behind encryption techniques for secure transmission of data.
 Apply telehealth in healthcare.
Text Books:
1. Norris, A.C. “Essentials of Telemedicine and Telecare”, Wiley, 2002
References:
1. Wootton, R., Craig, J., Patterson, V. (Eds.), “Introduction to Telemedicine. Royal Society
of Medicine” Press Ltd, Taylor & Francis 2006
2. O'Carroll, P.W., Yasnoff, W.A., Ward, E., Ripp, L.H., Martin, E.L. (Eds), “Public Health
Informatics and Information Systems”, Springer, 2003.
3. Ferrer-Roca, O., Sosa - Iudicissa, M. (Eds.), Handbook of Telemedicine. IOS Press
(Studies in Health Technology and Informatics, Volume 54, 2002.
4. Simpson, W. Video over IP. A practical guide to technology and applications. Focal Press
Elsevier, 2006.
5. Bemmel, J.H. van, Musen, M.A. (Eds.) Handbook of Medical Informatics. Heidelberg,
Germany: Springer, 1997
6. Mohan Bansal " Medical Informatics", Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004.
OTL554 Wavelets and its Applications LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the concept of Fourier transform and short time Fourier transform.
 To understand the concept of continuous time wavelet transform,
 To analyze the concept of interpolation and decimation.

 To understand the types of filter bank.
 To analyze the concept of image compression.
UNIT I FOURIER ANALYSIS 9

Fourier basis & Fourier Transform – failure of Fourier Transform – Need for Time-Frequency
Analysis – Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle – Short time Fourier transform (STFT) – short
comings of STFT– Need for Wavelets
UNIT II CWT AND MRA 9

Wavelet basis – Continuous time Wavelet Transform (CWT) – need for scaling function – Multi
Resolution Analysis – important wavelets: Haar– Mexican hat– Meyer– Shannon– Daubachies.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO MULTIRATE SYSTEMS 9

Decimation and Interpolation in Time domain - Decimation and Interpolation in Frequency
domain – Multi rate systems for a rational factor.
UNIT IV FILTER BANKS AND DWT 9

Two channel filter bank – Perfect Reconstruction (PR) condition – relationship between filter
banks and wavelet basis – DWT – Filter banks for Daubachies wavelet function.
Feature extraction using wavelet coefficients– Image compression– interference suppression–
Microcalification cluster detection– Edge detection–Faulty bearing signature identification.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Analyze the need for time frequency analysis..
 Design the concept of multi resolution analysis.
 Analyze the multirate system for rational factor.
 Analyze the relationship between the filter bank and wavelet.
 Analyze the application of wavelet.
Text Books:
1. 1.K.P.Soman , K.I. Ramachandran, N.G. Rasmi,”Insight Into Wavelets: From Theory to
Practice” PHI Learning Private Limited, Third Edition, 2010
References:
1. Sidney Burrus C, “ An Introduction to Wavelets “ Academic press, 2014
2. Stephane G Mallat, A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing: The sponse way” Academic
Press, Third edition, 2008.
OIM551 World Class Manufacturing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 Understanding of the concept and importance of strategy planning for manufacturing
industries
 To apply principles and techniques in the identifiable formulation and implementation
of manufacturing strategy for competitive in global context

UNIT I INDUSTRIAL DECLINE AND ASCENDANCY 9
Manufacturing excellence - US Manufacturers - French Manufacturers - Japan decade –
American decade - Global decade
UNIT II BUILDING STRENGTH THROUGH CUSTOMER – FOCUSED PRINCIPLES 9

Customer - Focused principles - General principles - Design - Operations - Human resources -
Quality and Process improvement - Promotion and Marketing
UNIT III VALUE AND VALUATION 9

Product Costing - Motivation to improve - Value of the enterprises QUALITY - The Organization:
Bulwark of stability and effectiveness - Employee stability – Quality Individuals Vs. Teams -
Team stability and cohesiveness - Project cohesiveness and stability
UNIT IV STRATEGIC LINKAGES 9

Product decisions and customer service - Multi-company planning - Internal manufacturing
planning - Soothing the demand turbulence
UNIT V IMPEDIMENTS 9
Bad plant design - Mismanagement of capacity - Production Lines - Assembly Lines – Whole
Plant Associates - Facilitators - Teamsmanship - Motivation and reward in the age of
continuous Improvement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Able to understand the concept and the importance of manufacturing strategy for
industrial enterprise competitiveness.
 Apply appropriate techniques in the analysis an devaluation of company's opportunities
for enhancing competitiveness in the local regional and global context.
 Identify formulation and implement strategies for manufacturing and therefore
enterprise competitiveness.
Text Books:
1. By Richard B. Chase, Nicholas J. Aquilano, F. Robert Jacobs – “Operations

Management for Competitive Advantage”, McGraw-Hill Irwin, ISBN 0072323159
2. Moore Ran, “Making Common Sense Common Practice: Models for Manufacturing
Excellence”, Elsevior Multiworth
3. Narayanan V. K., “Managing Technology & Innovation for Competitive Advantage”,
Pearson Education Inc.
4. Korgaonkar M. G., “Just In Time Manufacturing”, MacMillan Publishers India Ltd.,
5. Sahay B. S., Saxena K. B. C., Ashish Kumar, “World Class Manufacturing”, MacMillan
Publishers
OAI751 Agricultural Finance, Banking and Co-Operation LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To make the students aware about the agricultural Finance, Banking and Cooperation.
 To acquaint the students with the basic concepts, principles and functions of
management.
 To understand the process of finance banking and cooperation.

UNIT I AGRICULTURAL FINANCE - NATURE AND SCOPE 9
Agricultural Finance: Definition, Importance, Nature and Scope - Agricultural Credit: Meaning,
Definition, Need and Classification - Sources of credit - Role of institutional and non -
Institutional agencies: Advantages and Disadvantages - Rural indebtedness: consequences of
rural indebtedness - History and Development of rural credit in India.
UNIT II FARM FINANCIAL ANALYSIS 9

Principles of Credit - 5C‟s, 5R‟s and & 7P‟s of Credit - Project Cycle and Management -
Preparation of bankable projects / Farm credit proposals - Feasibility - Time value of money:
Compounding and Discounting - Appraisal of farm credit proposals - Undiscounted and
discounted measures - Repayment plans - Farm Financial Statements: Balance Sheet, Income
Statement and Cash Flow statement - Financial Ratio Analysis.
UNIT III FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 9

Institutional Lending Agencies - Commercial banks: Nationalization, Agricultural Development
Branches - Area Approach - Priority Sector Lending - Regional Rural Banks, Lead bank, Scale
of finance - Higher financial institutions: RBI, NABARD, AFC, ADB, World Bank and Deposit
Insurance and Credit Guarantee Corporation of India - Microfinance and its role in poverty
alleviation - Self-Help Groups - Non -Governmental Organizations - Rural credit policies
followed by State and Central Government - Subsidized farm credit, Differential Interest Rate
(DIR), Kisan Credit Card (KCC) Scheme - Relief Measures and Loan Waiver Scheme and Know
Your Customer (KYC).
UNIT IV CO-OPERATION 9
Co-operation: Philosophy and Principles - History of Indian Cooperative Credit Movement: Pre
and Post-Independence periods and Cooperation in different plan periods - Cooperative credit
institutions: Two tier and three tier structure, Functions: provision of short term and long term
credit, Strength and weakness of cooperative credit system, Policies for revitalizing cooperative
credit: Salient features of Vaithiyananthan Committee Report on revival of rural cooperative
credit institutions, Reorganisation of Cooperative credit structure in Andhra Pradesh and single
window system and successful cooperative credit systems in Gujarat, Maharashtra, Punjab etc,
- Special cooperatives: LAMPS and FSS: Objectives, role and functions - National Cooperative
Development Corporation (NCDC) and National Federation of State Cooperative Banks Ltd.,
(NAFSCOB) - Objectives and Functions.
UNIT V BANKING AND INSURANCE 9

Negotiable Instruments: Meaning, Importance and Types - Central Bank: RBI - functions -
credit control - objectives and methods: CRR, SLR and Repo rate - Credit rationing - Dear
money and cheap money - Financial inclusion and Exclusion: Credit widening and credit
deepening monetary policies. Credit gap: Factors influencing credit gap - Non - Banking
Financial Institutions (NBFI) - Assessment of crop losses, Determination of compensation -
Crop insurance: Schemes, Coverage, Advantages and Limitations in implementation -
Estimation of crop yields - Livestock, insurance schemes - Agricultural Insurance Company of
India Ltd (AIC): Objectives and functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course, the students will

 Be familiar with agricultural finance, Banking, cooperation and basic concepts,
principles and functions of management.

Text Books:
1. Muniraj, R., 1987, Farm Finance for Development, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi
2. Subba Reddy. S and P.Raghu Ram 2011, Agricultural Finance and Management,
Oxford & IBH, New Delhi.
3. Lee W.F., M.D. Boehlje A.G., Nelson and W.G. Murray, 1998, Agricultural Finance,
Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi.
4. Mammoria, C.B., and R.D. Saxena 1973, Cooperation in India, Kitab Mahal,
Allahabad.
OBM751 Basics of Human Anatomy and Physiology LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To learn the basic components of formation of systems
 To identify all the organelles of an animal cell and their function.
 To understand structure and functions of the various types of systems of human body.
 To demonstrate their knowledge of importance of anatomical features and physiology of
human systems
Level of Organization – Metabolism and Homeostasis – Plan of Body – Body Parts and Areas,
Planes and Sections. Elements in the Human Body – Inorganic Compounds and Organic
Compounds
UNIT II BASIC STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF ANIMAL CELL 9

Structure of Cell – Structure and Function of Cell Membrane and Sub organelles. Cellular
Transport Mechanism – Cell Division – Mitosis and Meiosis
UNIT III TISSUES, MEMBRANE AND SKELETAL SYSTEM 9

Epithelial tissue – Connective tissue – Muscle tissue – Nerve tissue – Membrane. Types of Bone
tissue - Classification of Bones – Functions of the Skeleton system – Skull, Vertebral Column.
Joint - Articulation
UNIT IV NERVOUS AND CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEMS 10

Nervous system: Types and Structure of Neuron – Mechanism of Nerve Impulse - Structure
and Parts of Brain. Sensory organ: Eye and Ear.Cardiovascular: Composition of Blood and
functions – Structure of Heart – Conduction system of Heart – Types of Blood vessel – Blood
Pressure.
UNIT V DIGESTIVE AND URINARY SYSTEMS 8

Digestive: Organs of Digestive system – Digestion and Absorption. Urinary: Structure of
Kidney and Nephron – Mechanisms of Urine formation – Regulation of Blood pressure by
Urinary System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At end of the course
 Students would be familiar with the requirements for formation of systems
 Students would be understand the basic structural and functional elements of human
body
 Students would have knowledge on Skeletal and muscular systems

 Students would be able to comprehend circulatory and nervous systems and their
components
 Students would study importance of digestive and urinary systems in Human body
Text Books:
1. Prabhjot Kaur. Text Book of Anatomy and Physiology. Lotus Publsihers. 2014
2. Elaine.N. Marieb , “Essential of Human Anatomy and Physiology”, Eight Edition,
Pearson Education, New Delhi 2007
3. Valerie C. Scanlon and Tina Sanders, “Essential of Human Anatomy and Physiology”,
Fifth Edition, F.A. Davis Company, Philadelphia 2007
References:
1. Frederic H. Martini, Judi L. Nath, Edwin F. Bartholomew, Fundamentals of Anatomy
and Physiology. Tenth Edition, Pearson Publishers, 2014
2. William F.Ganong, “Review of Medical Physiology”, 22nd Edition, Mc Graw Hill, New
Delhi. 2005
3. Eldra Pearl Solomon, “Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology”, Third Edition,
W.B. Saunders Company, 2008
4. Guyton & Hall, “Medical Physiology”, 13th Edition, Elsevier Saunders, 2015.
OGI751 Climate Change and Its Impact LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the basics of weather and climate
 To have an insight on Atmospheric dynamics and transport of heat
 To develop simple climate models and evaluate climate changes using models
UNIT I BASICS OF WEATHER AND CLIMATE: 9

Shallow film of Air– stratified & disturbed atmosphere – law – atmosphere Engine. Observation
of parameters: Temperature – Humidity – Wind - Pressure – precipitation-surface – networks.
Constitution of atmosphere: well stirred atmosphere – process around turbopause – in dry air –
ozone – carbon Dioxide – Sulphur Dioxide– Aerosol - water. Evolution of Atmosphere. State of
atmosphere: Air temperature – pressure – hydrostatic – Chemistry – Distribution – circulation
UNIT II ATMOSPHERIC DYNAMICS: 9

Atmosphere dynamics: law – isobaric heating and cooling – adiabatic lapse rates – equation of
motion - solving and forecasting. Forces – Relative and absolute acceleration – Earth‟s rotation
coriolis on sphere – full equation of motion – Geostrophy;- Thermal winds –departures – small-
scale motion. Radiation, convection and advections: sun & solar radiation – energy balance –
terrestrial radiation and the atmosphere – Green house effect- Global warming - Global budget
– radiative fluxes - heat transport. Atmosphere and ocean systems convecting & advecting heat.
Surface and boundary layer – smaller scale weather system – larger scale weather system.
UNIT III GLOBAL CLIMATE 9

Components and phenomena in the climate system: Time and space scales – interaction and
parameterization problem. Gradients of Radiative forcing and energy transports by atmosphere
and ocean – atmospheric circulation – latitude structure of the circulation - latitude – longitude
dependence of climate features. Ocean circulation: latitude – longitude dependence of climate
features – ocean vertical structure – ocean thermohaline circulation – land surface processes –
carbon cycle.

UNIT IV CLIMATE SYSTEM PROCESSES 9
Conservation of motion: Force – coriolis - pressure gradient- velocity equations – Application –
geotropic wind – pressure co-ordinates. Equation of State – atmosphere – ocean. Application:
thermal circulation – sea level rise. Temperature equation: Ocean – air – Application – decay of
sea surface temperature. Continuity equation: ocean – atmosphere. Application: coastal
upwelling – equatorial upwelling – conservation of warm water mass. Moisture and salinity
equation: conservation of mass – moisture. Source & sinks – latent heat. Moist processes –
saturation – convection – Wave processes in atmosphere and ocean.
UNIT V CLIMATE CHANGE MODELS 9

Constructing a climate model – climate system modeling – climate simulation and drift –
Evaluation of climate model simulation – regional (RCM) – global (GCM) – Global average
response to warming – climate change observed to date. .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to understand
 The concepts of weather and climate
 The principles of Atmospheric dynamics and transport of heat and air mass
 The develop simple climate models and to predict climate change
Text Books:
1. Fundamentals of weather and climate (2nd Edition) Robin Moilveen (2010), Oxford
University Press
2. Climate change and climate modeling, J. David Neelin (2011) Cambridge University
press.
OPY751 Clinical Trials LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To highlight the epidemiologic methods, study design, protocol preparation
 To gain knowledge in the basic bio-statistical techniques involved in clinical research.
 To describe the principles involved in ethical, legal and regulatory issues in clinical
trials.
UNIT I ROLE OF CLINICAL TRIALS IN NEW DRUG DEVELOPMENT 9

Drug Discovery, regulatory guidance and governance, pharmaceutical manufacturing,
nonclinical research, clinical trials, post-marketing surveillance, ethical conduct during clinical
trials.
UNIT II FUNDAMENTALS OF TRIAL DESIGN 9

Randomised clinical trials, uncontrolled trials. Protocol development, endpoints, patient
selection, source and control of bias, randomization, blinding, sample size and power.
UNIT III ALTERNATE TRIAL DESIGNS 9

Crossover design, factorial design, equivalence trials, bioequivalence trials, non-inferiority
trials, cluster randomized trials, multi-center trials.
UNIT IV BASICS OF STATISTICAL ANALYSIS 9

Types of data and normal distribution, significance tests and confidence intervals, comparison
of means, comparison of proportions, analysis of survival data, subgroup analysis, regression
analysis, missing data.

UNIT V REPORTING OF TRIALS 9
Overview of reporting, trial profile, presenting baseline data, use of tables, figures, critical
appraisal of report, meta-analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The student will be able to
 Explain key concepts in the design of clinical trials.
 Describe study designs used, identify key issues in data management for clinical trials.
 Describe the roles of regulatory affairs in clinical trials.
Text Books:
1. Fundamentals of Clinical Trials, Lawrence M. Friedman, Springer Science & Business
Media, 2010
2. Textbook of Clinical Trials, David Machin, Simon Day, Sylvan Green, John Wiley &
Sons, 2007
3. Clinical Trials: A Practical Approach, Stuart J. Pocock, John Wiley & Sons, 17-Jul-2013
References:
1. Clinical trials, A practical guide to design, analysis and reporting. Duolao Wang and
Ameet Bakhai. Remedica. 2006.
2. Introduction to statistics in pharmaceutical clinical trials. T.A. Durham and J Rick
Turner. Pharmaceutical Press.
3. Clinical Trials: Study Design, Endpoints and Biomarkers, Drug Safety, and FDA and
ICH Guidelines, Tom Brody, Academic Press, 2016.
OCS751 Data Structures and Algorithms LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the various algorithm design and analysis techniques
 To learn linear data structures – lists, stacks, and queues
 To learn different sorting and searching algorithms
 To understand Tree and Graph data structures
UNIT I ALGORITHM ANALYSIS, LIST ADT 11

Algorithms: Notation - analysis – running time calculations. Abstract Data Types (ADTs): List
ADT – array-based implementation – linked list implementation – singly linked lists-
applications of lists: Polynomial Manipulation. Implementation of List ADT using an array and
using a linked list in C.
UNIT II STACKS AND QUEUES 7

Stack ADT - Applications - Evaluating arithmetic expressions- Conversion of Infix to Postfix-
Recursion. Queue ADT – Priority Queue - applications of queues. Implementation of Stack ADT
and palindrome checking using C. Implementation of Queue operations using arrays in C.
UNIT III SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 10

Divide and conquer methodology - Searching: Linear Search - Binary Search. Sorting: Insertion
sort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap sort. Analysis of searching and sorting techniques.
Implementation of linear search, binary search, insertion sort, merge sort and quick sort
algorithms in C.

UNIT IV TREES 9
Tree ADT – tree traversals - Binary Tree ADT – expression trees – binary search tree ADT –
applications of trees. Heap – applications of heap. Implementation of Binary search tree and its
operations, tree traversal methods, finding height of the tree using C. Implementation of heap
and heap sorting using arrays in C.
UNIT V GRAPHS 8
Definition – Representation of Graph – Breadth-first traversal - Depth-first traversal – Dynamic
programming Technique – Warshall‟s and Floyd‟s algorithm – Greedy method - Dijkstra‟s
algorithm – applications of graphs. Implementation of graph, graph traversal methods, finding
shortest path using Dijkstra‟s algorithm in C
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
 Implement linear data structures and solve problems using them.
 Implement and apply trees and graphs to solve problems.
 Implement the various searching and sorting algorithms.
Text Books:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education,1997.
2. Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, “The C Programming Language”, 2nd
References:
1. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson Education,1983.
2. S.Sridhar, “Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, First Edition, Oxford University Press.
2014
3. Byron Gottfried, Jitender Chhabra, “Programming with C” (Schaum's Outlines Series),
Mcgraw Hill Higher Ed., III Edition, 2010
4. Yashvant Kanetkar, “Data Structures Through C”, BPB publications, II edition, 2003
OME751 Design of Experiments LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge on various types of experimental designs conduct of experiments
and data analysis techniques.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGNS 9

Hypothesis testing – single mean, two means, dependent/ correlated samples – confidence
intervals, Experimentation – need, Conventional test strategies, Analysis of variance, F-test,
terminology, basic principles of design, steps in experimentation – choice of sample size –
Normal and half normal probability plot – simple linear and multiple linear regression, testing
using Analysis of variance.
UNIT II SINGLE FACTOR EXPERIMENTS 9

Completely Randomized Design- effect of coding the observations- model adequacy checking-
estimation of model parameters, residuals analysis- treatment comparison methods-Duncan‟s
multiple range test, Newman-Keuel‟s test, Fisher‟s LSD test, Tukey‟s test- testing using
contrasts- Randomized Block Design – Latin Square Design- Graeco Latin Square Design –
Applications.

UNIT III FACTORIAL DESIGNS 9
Main and Interaction effects - Two and three factor full factorial designs- Fixed effects and
random effects model - Rule for sum of squares and Expected Mean Squares- 2K Design with
two and three factors- Yate‟s Algorithm- fitting regression model- Randomized Block Factorial
Design - Practical applications.
UNIT IV SPECIAL EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN 9

Blocking and Confounding in 2K Designs- blocking in replicated design- 2K Factorial Design in
two blocks- Complete and partial confounding- Confounding 2K Design in four blocks- Two
level Fractional Factorial Designs- one-half fraction of 2K Design, design resolution,
Construction of one-half fraction with highest design resolution, one-quarter fraction of 2K
Design.
UNIT V TAGUCHI METHODS 9

Design of experiments using Orthogonal Arrays, Data analysis from Orthogonal experiments-
Response Graph Method, ANOVA- attribute data analysis- Robust design- noise factors, Signal
to noise ratios, Inner/outer OA design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Able to apply experimental techniques to practical problems to improve quality of
processes / products by optimizing the process / product parameters.
Text Books:
1. Krishnaiah K, and Shahabudeen P, “Applied Design of Experiments and Taguchi
Methods”, PHI, India, 2011.
References:
1. Douglas C. Montgomery, “Design and Analysis of Experiments”, John Wiley & sons,
2005
2. Phillip J. Ross, “Taguchi Techniques for Quality Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, India,
2005.
OCH752 Energy Technology LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 Students will gain knowledge about different energy sources
UNITI ENERGY 8
Introduction to energy – Global energy scene – Indian energy scene - Units of energy,
conversion factors, general classification of energy, energy crisis, energy alternatives.
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and
nuclear power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion
processes, fluidized bed combustion.
UNITII NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water
heating, solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar
thermal power generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy,

types of windmills, types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power
generation, wind power in India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean
thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermalenergy.
UNITIV BIOMASS ENERGY 10

Biomass origin - Resources – Biomass estimation. Thermochemical conversion – Biological
conversion, Chemical conversion – Hydrolysis & hydrogenation, solvolysis, biocrude, biodiesel
power generation gasifier, biogas, integrated gasification.
UNITV ENERGYCONSERVATION 9
Energy conservation - Act; Energy management importance, duties and responsibilities; Energy
audit – Types methodology, reports, instruments. Benchmalcing and energy performance,
material and energy balance, thermal energy management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Understand conventional Energy sources, Non- conventional Energy sources, biomass
sources and develop design parameters for equipment to be used in Chemical process
industries. Understand energy conservation in process industries
Text Books:
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
4. Energy Management, Paul W.O Callaghan McGraw – Hill, 1993
References:
1. NejatVezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, NewYork.
2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York,2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New
Delhi,1981.
4. Handbook of Energy Audit by 7th edition Albert Thumann, P.E., C.E.M & WilliamJ
Younger C.E.M, Faiment Press2008
OCE751 Environmental and Social Impact Assessment LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To impart the knowledge and skills to identify, assess and mitigate the environmental
and social impacts of developmental projects
Impacts of Development on Environment – Rio Principles of Sustainable Development-
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) – Objectives – Historical development – EIA Types –
EIA in project cycle –EIA Notification and Legal Framework.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT 9

Screening and Scoping in EIA – Drafting of Terms of Reference, Baseline monitoring, Prediction
and Assessment of Impact on land, water, air, noise, flora and fauna - Matrices – Networks –
Checklist Methods - Mathematical models for Impact prediction.

UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9
Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on water, air and land, water, energy, flora and fauna –
Environmental Monitoring Plan – EIA Report Preparation – Public Hearing-Environmental
Clearance
UNIT IV SOCIO ECONOMIC ASSESSMENT 9

Baseline monitoring of Socio economic environment – Identification of Project Affected Personal
– Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan- Economic valuation of Environmental impacts – Cost
benefit Analysis-

EIA case studies pertaining to Infrastructure Projects – Roads and Bridges – Mass Rapid
Transport Systems - Airports - Dams and Irrigation projects - Power plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
The students completing the course will have ability to

 carry out scoping and screening of developmental projects for environmental and social
assessments
 explain different methodologies for environmental impact prediction and assessment
 plan environmental impact assessments and environmental management plans
 evaluate environmental impact assessment reports
Text Books:
1. Canter, R.L, “Environmental impact Assessment “, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Inc, New
Delhi, 1995.
2. Lohani, B., J.W. Evans, H. Ludwig, R.R. Everitt, Richard A. Carpenter, and S.L. Tu,
3. “Environmental Impact Assessment for Developing Countries in Asia”, Volume 1 –
Overview, Asian Development Bank, 1997.
4. Peter Morris, Riki Therivel “Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment”, Routledge
Publishers, 2009.
References:
1. Becker H. A., Frank Vanclay,“The International handbook of social impact assessment”
conceptual and methodological advances, Edward Elgar Publishing,2003.
2. Barry Sadler and Mary McCabe, “Environmental Impact Assessment Training Resource
Manual”, United Nations Environment Programme, 2002.
3. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I and II”, Blackwell
Science New York, 1998.
4. Ministry of Environment and Forests EIA Notification and Sectoral Guides, Government
of India, New Delhi, 2010.
OGI752 Fundamentals of Planetary Remote Sensing LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To provide an insight to the basics of planetary Remote Sensing
 To demonstrate how the Remote Sensing technique is applied to explore the surface
characteristics of the planets and it’s environ.

UNIT I PLANETARY SCIENCE 9
History and inventory of solar system – planet-definition –properties – Formation of solar
system. Planetary Atmospheres: composition - thermal structure – clouds – meteorology –
photo chemistry – Eddy Diffusion. Surfaces and Interiors: Mineralogy and Petrology – Planetary
interiors – surface morphology. Terrestrial planets and the Moon: The moon & Mercury –
surface – Atmosphere – Interior – Magnetic Field.
UNIT II SATELLITE ORBIT 9

Equation of 2 body motion: Energy, orbits and energy – Circular Orbits-EOS Terra-
Geosynchronous satellite orbit- orbital elements. Launching Satellites and space probes –
Retrograde orbits-Inter planetary Transfer – Hohmann Transfer – Gravity Assist-Cassini-
Messenger. Breaking into orbit or landing- Retro Rockets-Aerobraking- Parachutes- Impact.
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF EMR 9

Definition of Remote Sensing – Electro Magnetic Radiation: Electromagnetic Spectrum-
Development of EM theory – White Light – Excited hydrogen gas – Quantum physics –
Definition. EM Radiation: Properties – Radiant energy – Sun‟s luminosity calculation. Other
Energy: Black body radiation – Plank curve of black body. Properties of EMR: Kinetic energy –
Polarization, laws of Max Plank, Wien‟s and Stephen Boltzmann
UNIT IV RADIOMETRY AND SCATTEROMETRY 9

Radiometry – Radar Altimetry – Effect of surface roughness – Altimetry derived data –
Reflectivity – Radiometry and Derived emissivity – Incorporation of data set into image analysis
– Introduction to SAR – convolution – bidirectional reflectance distribution – Microwave
scatterometry - side looking RADAR , SAR – Interferometry.
UNITV PLANETARY APPLICATION 9

Planetary Imaging Spectroscopy- USGS Tetracoder and Expert system - Mars Global Surveyor
Mission (MGS) – Digital Elevation Model(DEM) of Mars – Mars Orbiter Camera (MOC) – Stereo
and photoclinometric techniques for DEM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
On completion of the course, the students have

 Exposure to fundamentals of planetary science or orbital mechanics
 The principles of observing the planets
 Knowledge of Remote Sensing methods for determining surface elevation and mapping
of planets.
References:
1. Fundamental Planetary Science : Physics, Chemistry and Habitability, Jack J. Lissauer,

Imke de Pater (2013) Cambridge University Press
2. Physical principles of Remote Sensing, Rees, W.G.(2013) 3rd Edn, Cambridge University
Press
3. Radar Remote Sensing of Planetary Surfaces, Bruce A Campbell (2011) Cambridge
University Press
4. Remote Sensing Application for Planetary Surfaces, Kumar Deepak (2014) Lambert
Publication.

OEN751 Green Building Design LTPC3003
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL IMPLICATIONS OF BUILDINGS 9

Energy use, carbon emissions, water use, waste disposal; Building materials: sources, methods
of production and environmental Implications. Embodied Energy in Building Materials:
Transportation Energy for Building Materials; Maintenance Energy for Buildings.
UNIT II IMPLICATIONS OF BUILDING TECHNOLOGIES EMBODIED ENERGY OF

BUILDINGS 9
Framed Construction, Masonry Construction. Resources for Building Materials, Alternative
concepts. Recycling of Industrial and Buildings Wastes. Biomass Resources for buildings.
UNIT III COMFORTS IN BUILDING 9

Thermal Comfort in Buildings- Issues; Heat Transfer Characteristic of Building Materials and
Building Techniques. Incidence of Solar Heat on Buildings-Implications of Geographical
Locations.
UNIT IV UTILITY OF SOLAR ENERGY IN BUILDINGS 9

Utility of Solar energy in buildings concepts of Solar Passive Cooling and Heating of Buildings.
Low Energy Cooling. Case studies of Solar Passive Cooled and Heated Buildings.
UNIT V GREEN COMPOSITES FOR BUILDINGS 9

Concepts of Green Composites. Water Utilisation in Buildings, Low Energy Approaches to
Water Management. Management of Solid Wastes. Management of Sullage Water and Sewage.
Urban Environment and Green Buildings. Green Cover and Built Environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Text Books:
1. K.S.Jagadish, B. U. Venkataramareddy and K. S. Nanjundarao. Alternative Building
Materials and Technologies. New Age International, 2007.
2. Low Energy Cooling For Sustainable Buildings. John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2009.
3. Sustainable Building Design Manual. Vol 1 and 2, Teri, New Delhi, 2004.
References:
1. Osman Attmann Green Architecture Advanced Technologies and Materials. McGraw
Hill, 2010.
2. Jerry Yudelson Green building Through Integrated Design. McGraw Hill, 2009.
3. Fundamentals of Integrated Design for Sustainable Building By Marian Keeler, Bill
Burke
OBM752 Hospital Management LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the fundamentals of hospital administration and management.
 To know the market related research process
 To explore various information management systems and relative supportive services.
 To learn the quality and safety aspects in hospital.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION 9

Distinction between Hospital and Industry, Challenges in Hospital Administration – Hospital
Planning- Equipment Planning – Functional Planning

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN HOSPITAL 9
Principles of HRM – Functions of HRM – Profile of HRD Manager –Human Resource Inventory –
Manpower Planning.
UNIT III RECRUITMENT AND TRAINING 9

Different Departments of Hospital, Recruitment, Selection, Training Guidelines – Methods of
Training – Evaluation of Training – Leadership grooming and Training, Promotion – Transfer.
UNIT IV SUPPORTIVE SERVICES 9

Medical Records Department – Central Sterilization and Supply Department – Pharmacy – Food
Services - Laundry Services.
UNIT V COMMUNICATION AND SAFETY ASPECTS IN HOSPITAL 9

Purposes – Planning of Communication, Modes of Communication – Telephone, ISDN, Public
Address and Piped Music – CCTV.Security – Loss Prevention – Fire Safety – Alarm System –
Safety Rules.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Explain the principles of Hospital administration.
 Identify the importance of Human resource management.
 List various marketing research techniques.
 Identify Information management systems and its uses.
 Understand safety procedures followed in hospitals
Text Books:
1. R.C.Goyal, “Hospital Administration and Human Resource Management”, PHI – Fourth
Edition, 2006.
2. G.D.Kunders, “Hospitals – Facilities Planning and Management – TMH, New Delhi –
Fifth Reprint 2007.
References:
1. Cesar A.Caceres and Albert Zara, “The Practice of Clinical Engineering, Academic Press,
New York, 1977.
2. Norman Metzger, “Handbook of Health Care Human Resources Management”, 2nd
edition Aspen Publication Inc. Rockville, Maryland, USA, 1990.
3. Peter Berman “Health Sector Reform in Developing Countries” - Harvard University
Press, 1995.
4. William A. Reinke “Health Planning For Effective Management” - Oxford University
Press.1988
5. Blane, David, Brunner, “Health and SOCIAL Organization: Towards a Health Policy for
the 21st Century”, Eric Calrendon Press 2002.
6. Arnold D. Kalcizony & Stephen M. Shortell, “Health Care Management”, 6th Edition
Cengage Learning, 2011.
OME754 Industrial Safety LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge on safety engineering fundamentals and safety management
practices.

Evolution of modern safety concepts – Fire prevention – Mechanical hazards – Boilers, Pressure
vessels, Electrical Exposure.
UNIT II CHEMICAL HAZARDS 9

Chemical exposure – Toxic materials – Ionizing Radiation and Non-ionizing Radiation -
Industrial Hygiene – Industrial Toxicology.
UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL 9

Industrial Health Hazards – Environmental Control – Industrial Noise - Noise measuring
instruments, Control of Noise, Vibration, - Personal Protection.
UNIT IV HAZARD ANALYSIS 9

System Safety Analysis –Techniques – Fault Tree Analysis (FTA), Failure Modes and Effects
Analysis (FMEA), HAZOP analysis and Risk Assessment
UNIT V SAFETY REGULATIONS 9

Explosions – Disaster management – catastrophe control, hazard control, Safety education and
training - Factories Act, Safety regulations Product safety – case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Students must be able to identify and prevent chemical, environmental mechanical, fire
hazard through analysis and apply proper safety techniques on safety engineering and
management.
Text Books:
1. John V.Grimaldi, “Safety Management”, AITB S Publishers, 2003.
References:
1. Safety Manual, “EDEL Engineering Consultancy”, 2000.
2. David L.Goetsch, “Occupational Safety and Health for Technologists”, 5th Edition,
Engineers and Managers, Pearson Education Ltd., 2005.
OCS752 Introduction to C Programming LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To develop C Programs using basic programming constructs
 To develop C programs using arrays and strings
 To develop applications in C using functions and structures
Structure of C program – Basics: Data Types – Constants –Variables - Keywords – Operators:
Precedence and Associativity - Expressions - Input/Output statements, Assignment statements
– Decision-making statements - Switch statement - Looping statements – Pre-processor
directives - Compilation process – Exercise Programs: Check whether the required amount can
be withdrawn based on the available amount – Menu-driven program to find the area of
different shapes – Find the sum of even numbers Text Book: Reema Thareja (Chapters 2,3)
UNIT II ARRAYS 9
Introduction to Arrays – One dimensional arrays: Declaration – Initialization - Accessing
elements – Operations: Traversal, Insertion, Deletion, Searching - Two dimensional arrays:

Declaration – Initialization - Accessing elements – Operations: Read – Print – Sum – Transpose
– Exercise Programs: Print the number of positive and negative values present in the array –
Sort the numbers using bubble sort - Find whether the given is matrix is diagonal or not. Text
Book: Reema Thareja (Chapters 5)
UNIT III STRINGS 9

Introduction to Strings - Reading and writing a string - String operations (without using built-
in string functions): Length – Compare – Concatenate – Copy – Reverse – Substring – Insertion
– Indexing – Deletion – Replacement – Array of strings – Introduction to Pointers – Pointer
operators – Pointer arithmetic - Exercise programs: To find the frequency of a character in a
string - To find the number of vowels, consonants and white spaces in a given text - Sorting the
names. Text Book: Reema Thareja (Chapters 6 & 7)
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS 9
Introduction to Functions – Types: User-defined and built-in functions - Function prototype -
Function definition - Function call - Parameter passing: Pass by value - Pass by reference -
Built-in functions (string functions) – Recursive functions – Exercise programs: Calculate the
total amount of power consumed by „n‟ devices (passing an array to a function) – Menu-driven
program to count the numbers which are divisible by 3, 5 and by both (passing an array to a
function) – Replace the punctuations from a given sentence by the space character (passing an
array to a function) Text Book: Reema Thareja (Chapters 4)
UNIT V STRUCTURES 9
Introduction to structures – Declaration – Initialization – Accessing the members – Nested
Structures – Array of Structures – Structures and functions – Passing an entire structure –
Exercise programs: Compute the age of a person using structure and functions (passing a
structure to a function) – Compute the number of days an employee came late to the office by
considering his arrival time for 30 days (Use array of structures and functions) Text Book:
Reema Thareja (Chapters 8)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

 Develop simple applications using basic constructs
 Develop applications using arrays and strings
 Develop applications using functions and structures
Text Books:
1. Reema Thareja, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016
References:
1. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition,

2. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C How to Program”, Seventh edition, Pearson
Publication
3. Juneja, B. L and Anita Seth, “Programming in C”, CENGAGE Learning India pvt. Ltd.,
2011
4. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2009

OBT753 Introduction of Cell Biology LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To provide knowledge on cell structure and its function.
UNIT I CELL STRUCTURE 9

Cell organization, structure of organelles, extra cellular matrix and cell junctions.
UNIT II CELL ORGANELLE AND FUNCTION 9

Nuclues, Mitochondria, Lysosomes, Endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi apparatus, vesicles,
centrosomes, cell membranes, ribosomes, cytosol, chloroplasts, flagella, cell wall.
UNIT III DIVISION 9

Cell cycle – mitosis, meiosis, cell cycle regulation and apoptosis.
UNIT IV MACROMOLECULES 9
DNA, RNA and Proteins – basic units, architectural hierarchy and organisation, functions.
UNIT V ENZYMES 9
Enzymes – Structure, Mechanism of action, Factors that affect enzyme activity, Common
enzymes used in industrial setup of plant and animal origin.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Text Books:
1. Lodish, Harvey etal., “Molecular Cell Biology”, 5 th Edition, W.H.Freeman, 2005.
2. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell : A Molecular Approach”, 4 th Edition, ASM
Press, 2007.
3. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Molecular Biology of the Cell”, 4 th Edition, Garland Science
(Taylors Francis), 2002.
References:
1. McDonald, F etal., “ Molecular Biology of Cancer” 2nd Edition, Taylor & Francis, 2004.
2. King, Roger J.B. “Cancer Biology” Addison Wesley Longman, 1996.
OMF751 Lean Six Sigma LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To gain insights about the importance of lean manufacturing and six sigma practices.
UNIT I LEAN & SIX SIGMA BACKGROUND AND FUNDAMENTALS 9

Historical Overview – Definition of quality – What is six sigma -TQM and Six sigma - lean
manufacturing and six sigma- six sigma and process tolerance – Six sigma and cultural
changes – six sigma capability – six sigma need assessments - implications of quality levels,
Cost of Poor Quality (COPQ), Cost of Doing Nothing – assessment questions
UNIT II THE SCOPE OF TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Tools for definition – IPO diagram, SIPOC diagram, Flow diagram, CTQ Tree, Project Charter –
Tools for measurement – Check sheets, Histograms, Run Charts, Scatter Diagrams, Cause and
effect diagram, Pareto charts, Control charts, Flow process charts, Process Capability

Measurement, Tools for analysis – Process Mapping, Regression analysis, RU/CS analysis,
SWOT, PESTLE, Five Whys, interrelationship diagram, overall equipment effectiveness, TRIZ
innovative problem solving – Tools for improvement – Affinity diagram, Normal group
technique, SMED, 5S, mistake proofing, Value stream Mapping, forced field analysis – Tools for
control – Gantt chart, Activity network diagram, Radar chart, PDCA cycle, Milestone tracker
diagram, Earned value management.
UNIT III SIX SIGMA METHODOLOGIES 9

Design For Six Sigma (DFSS),Design For Six Sigma Method - Failure Mode Effect Analysis
(FMEA), FMEA process - Risk Priority Number (RPN)- Six Sigma and Leadership, committed
leadership – Change Acceleration Process (CAP)- Developing communication plan – Stakeholder
UNIT IV SIX SIGMA IMPLEMENTATION AND CHALLENGES 9

Tools for implementation – Supplier Input Process Output Customer (SIPOC) – Quality
Function Deployment or House of Quality (QFD) – alternative approach –implementation –
leadership training, close communication system, project selection – project management and
team – champion training – customer quality index – challenges – program failure, CPQ vs six
sigma, structure the deployment of six sigma – cultural challenge – customer/internal metrics
UNIT V EVALUATION AND CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT METHODS 9

Evaluation strategy – the economics of six sigma quality, Return on six Sigma (ROSS), ROI,
poor project estimates – continuous improvement – lean manufacturing – value, customer
focus, Perfection, focus on waste, overproduction – waiting, inventory in process (IIP),
processing waste, transportation, motion, making defective products, underutilizing people –
Kaizen – 5S
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 The student would be able to relate the tools and techniques of lean sigma to increase
productivity
References:
1. Michael L.George, David Rownalds, Bill Kastle, What is Lean Six Sigma, McGraw – Hill
2003
2. Thomas Pyzdek, The Six Sigma Handbook, McGraw-Hill,2000
3. Fred Soleimannejed , Six Sigma, Basic Steps and Implementation, AuthorHouse, 2004
4. Forrest W. Breyfogle, III, James M. Cupello, Becki Meadows, Managing Six Sigma:A
Practical Guide to Understanding, Assessing, and Implementing the Strategy That
Yields Bottom-Line Success, John Wiley & Sons, 2000
5. James P. Womack, Daniel T.Jones, Lean Thinking, Free Press Business, 2003
OAN751 Low Cost Automation LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To give basic knowledge about automation
 To understand the basic hydraulics and pneumatics systems for automation
 To understand the assembly automation
UNIT I AUTOMATION OF ASSEMBLY LINES 9

Concept of automation - mechanization and automation - Concept of automation in industry -
mechanization and automation - classification, balancing of assembly line using available

algorithms - Transfer line-monitoring system (TLMS) using Line Status - Line efficiency - Buffer
stock Simulation in assembly line
UNIT II AUTOMATION USING HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 9

Design aspects of various elements of hydraulic systems such as pumps, valves, filters,
reservoirs, accumulators, actuators, intensifiers etc. - Selection of hydraulic fluid, practical
case studied on hydraulic circuit design and performance analysis - Servo valves, electro
hydraulic valves, proportional valves and their applications.
UNIT III AUTOMATION USING PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9

Pneumatic fundamentals - control elements, position and pressure sensing -logic circuits -
switching circuits - fringe conditions modules and these integration - sequential circuits -
cascade methods - mapping methods – step counter method - compound circuit design -
combination circuit design. Pneumatic equipments - selection of components - design
calculations -application - fault finding – hydro pneumatic circuits - use of microprocessors for
sequencing - PLC, Low cost automation - Robotic circuits.
UNIT IV AUTOMATION USING ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS 9

Introduction - various sensors – transducers - signal processing - servo systems - programming
of microprocessors using 8085 instruction - programmable logic controllers
UNIT V ASSEMBLY AUTOMATION 9

Types and configurations - Parts delivery at workstations - Various vibratory and non vibratory
devices for feeding - hopper feeders, rotary disc feeder, centrifugal and orientation - Product
design for automated assembly.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can able to do low cost automation
systems
 Students can do some assembly automation
Text Books:
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with applications”, Prentice Hall international, 2009.
2. Mikell P Groover, “Automation, Production System and Computer Integrated
3. Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall Publications, 2007.
References:
1. Kuo .B.C, “Automatic control systems”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Peter Rohner, “Industrial hydraulic control”, Wiley Edition, 1995.
3. Mujumdar.S.R, “Pneumatic System”, Tata McGraw Hill 2006.
OBT752 Microbiology LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce students to the principles of Microbiology, to emphasize the structure and

biochemical aspects of various microbes.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9

Classification and nomenclature of microorganisms, microscopic examination of
microorganisms: light, fluorescent, dark field, phase contrast, and electron microscopy.

UNIT II MICROBES- STRUCTURE AND REPRODUCTION 9
Structural organization and multiplication of bacteria, viruses (TMV, Hepatitis B), algae
(cyanophyta, rhodophyta) and fungi (Neurospora), life history of actinomycetes (Streptomyces),
yeast (Sacharomyces), mycoplasma (M. pneumoniae) and bacteriophages ( T4 phage, ʎ phage)
UNIT III MICROBIAL NUTRITION, GROWTH AND METABOLISM 9

Nutritional classification of microorganisms based on carbon, energy and electron
sourcesDefinition of growth, balanced and unbalanced growth, growth curve and different
methods to quantify bacterial growth:(counting chamber, viable count method, counting
without equipment,different media used for bacterial culture (defined, complex, selective,
differential, enriched) themathematics of growth-generation time, specific growth rate.
UNIT IV CONTROL OF MICROORGANISMS 9

Physical and chemical control of microorganisms Definition of sterilization, dry and moist heat,
pasteurization, tyndalization; radiation, ultrasonication, filtration. Disinfection sanitization,
antiseptics sterilants and fumigation. Mode of action and resistance to antibiotics; clinically
important microorganisms
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL MICROBIOLOGY 9

Microbes involved in preservation (Lactobacillus,bacteriocins), spoilage of food and food borne
pathogens (E.coli, S.aureus, Bacillus, Clostridium). Industrial use of microbes (production of
penicillin, alcohol, vitamin B-12); biogas; bioremediation(oil spillage leaching of ores by
microorganisms ,pollution control); biofertilizers, biopesticides. Biosensors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 To provide to the students the fundamentals of Microbiology, the scope of microbiology
and solve the problems in microbial infection and their control,
Text Books:
1. Pelczar, M.J. “Microbiology”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1993.
2. Prescot. Harley, Klein. “ Microbiology “: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2008
3. Ananthanarayanan, R. and C.K. Jayaram Paniker, “Textbook of Microbiology”,4th
Edition, Orient Longman, 1990.
OMV751 Marine Vehicles LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To provide the students a basic knowledge about various types of marine vehicles
 To provide the students basic theory behind the design and development of marine
vehicles
UNIT I MARINE VEHICLES 6

Types – general – by function – commercial marine vehicles- passenger ship, cargo ships, oil
and chemical tankers, cattle carriers, harbor crafts, off shore platform, container ships
UNIT II REEFERS AND GAS CARRIERS 9

Introduction – Types, design considerations, safety – operation and controls, precaution during
bunkering
UNIT III REMOTELY OPERABLE VEHICLE (ROV), UMS SHIPS 9

submersibles types – applications, AUV – Design and construction considerations –
components – sensors – Navigation -control strategies – applications

UNIT IV SUBMERSIBLES AND AUTONOMOUS UNDERWATER VEHICLE (AUV) 9
Physical and chemical control of microorganisms Definition of sterilization, dry and moist heat,
pasteurization, tyndalization; radiation, ultrasonication, filtration. Disinfection sanitization,
antiseptics sterilants and fumigation. Mode of action and resistance to antibiotics; clinically
important microorganisms
UNIT V MANNED AND UN MANNED SUBMERSIBLE 12

Introduction – Design and operational consideration – pressure hull exo-structure – ballasting
and trim – maneuvering and control – Life support and habitability – emergency devices and
equipment‟s – certification and classification, towed vehicles – gliders – crawler – Design and
construction
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Students will be able understand the types of marine vehicles
 Students should get a preliminary knowledge in marine vehicle design, construction
and its components
Text Books:
1. Jonathan M. Ross, human factors for naval marine vehicle design and operation
2. Sabiha A. Wadoo, Pushkin Kachroo, Autonomous underwater vehicles, modelling,
control design and Simulation, CRC press, 2011
3. R. Frank Busby, Manned Submersibles, Office of the oceanographer of the Navy, 1976
References:
1. Ferial L hawry, The ocean engineering handbook, CRC press,2000
2. Richard A Geyer, “Submersibles and their use in oceanography and ocean engineering”,
Elsevier, 1997
3. Robert D. Christ,Robert L. Wernli, Sr. “The ROV Manual A User Guide for Remotely
Operated Vehicles”, Elsevier, second edition, 2014
OAE752 Principles of Flight Mechanics LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To make the student understand the performance of airplanes under various flight
conditions like take off, cruise, landing, climbing, gliding, turning and other maneuvers.
UNIT I GENERAL CONCEPTS 9

International Standard atmosphere, IAS, EAS, TAS, Propeller theory- Froude momentum and
blade element theories, Propeller co-efficients, Use of propeller charts, Performance of fixed and
variable pitch propellers, High lift devices, Thrust augmentation
UNIT II DRAG OF BODIES 8

Streamlined and bluff body, Types of drag, Effect of Reynold‟s number on skin friction and
pressure drag, Drag reduction of airplanes, Drag polar, Effect of Mach number on drag polar.
Concept of sweep- effect of sweep on drag.
UNIT III STEADY LEVEL FLIGHT 10

General equation of motion of an airplane. Steady level flight, Thrust required and Power
required, Thrust available and Power available for propeller driven and jet powered aircraft,
Effect of altitude, maximum level flight speed, conditions for minimum drag and minimum

power required, Effect of drag divergence on maximum velocity, Range and Endurance of
Propeller and Jet aircrafts. Effect of wind on range and endurance.
UNIT IV GLIDING AND CLIMBING FLIGHT 9

Shallow and steep angles of climb, Rate of climb, Climb hodograph, Maximum Climb angle and
Maximum Rate of climb- Effect of design parameters for propeller jet and glider aircrafts,
Absolute and service ceiling, Cruise climb, Gliding flight, Glide hodograph
UNIT V ACCELERATED FLIGHT 9

Estimation of take-off and landing distances, Methods of reducing landing distance, level turn,
minimum turn radius, maximum turn rate, bank angle and load factor, Constraints on load
factor, SST and MSTR. Pull up and pull down maneuvers, V-n diagram.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Students will be able to
• Understand concepts of take-off, climb, cruise, turn, descent and landing performance.
• understand the performance characteristics of the different types of power plants
• Understand and predict the behavior of fixed wing aircraft undertaking a typical flight
profile
• Understand the factors that influence aircraft design and limit aircraft performance.
Text Books:
1. Anderson, Jr., J.D. Aircraft Performance and Design, McGraw-Hill International Edition,
1999
2. Houghton,E.L. and Carruthers, N.B. Aerodynamics for engineering students, Edward
Arnold Publishers, 1988.
References:
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. Clancy, L J., Aerodynamics, Shroff publishers (2006)
3. John J Bertin., Aerodynamics for Engineers, Prentice Hall; 6th edition, 2013.
4. Kuethe, A.M. and Chow, C.Y., Foundations of Aerodynamics, John Wiley & Sons; 5th
Edition, 1997.
OIE751 Robotics LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the functions of the basic components of a Robot.

 To study the use of various types of End of Effectors and Sensors
 To impart knowledge in Robot Kinematics and Programming
 To learn Robot safety issues and economics.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 6

Robot - Definition - Robot Anatomy - Co ordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and
Classification- Specifications-Pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load-
Robot Parts and their Functions-Need for Robots-Different Applications.

UNIT II ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9
Pneumatic Drives-Hydraulic Drives-Mechanical Drives-Electrical Drives-D.C. Servo Motors,
Stepper Motors, A.C. Servo Motors-Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of all these
Drives, End Effectors-Grippers-Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic- Grippers,
Magnetic Grippers, Vacuum Grippers; Two Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal
Grippers and External Grippers; Selection and Design Considerations.
UNIT III SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 12

Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the following types of sensors-
Position sensors - Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers, Optical Encoders, pneumatic
Position Sensors, Range Sensors Triangulations Principles, Structured, Lighting Approach,
Time of Flight, Range Finders, Laser Range Meters, Touch Sensors ,binary Sensors., Analog
Sensors, Wrist Sensors, Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors, Camera, Frame Grabber, Sensing
and Digitizing Image Data- Signal Conversion, Image Storage, Lighting Techniques, Image
Processing and Analysis-Data Reduction, Segmentation, Feature Extraction, Object
Recognition, Other Algorithms, Applications- Inspection, Identification, Visual Serving and
Navigation.
UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 13

Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Difference; Forward Kinematics and Reverse
Kinematics of manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom (in 2 Dimension), Four
Degrees of freedom (in 3 Dimension) Jacobians, Velocity and Forces-Manipulator Dynamics,
Trajectory Generator, Manipulator Mechanism Design-Derivations and problems. Lead through
Programming, Robot programming Languages-VAL Programming-Motion Commands, Sensor
Commands, End Effector commands and simple Programs.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 5

RGV, AGV; Implementation of Robots in Industries-Various Steps; Safety Considerations for
Robot Operations - Economic Analysis of Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can able to apply the basic engineering
knowledge for the design of robotics
Text Books:
1. Klafter R.D., Chmielewski T.A and Negin M., “Robotic Engineering - An Integrated
Approach”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Groover M.P., “Industrial Robotics -Technology Programming and Applications”,
McGraw Hill, 2001.
References:
1. Craig J.J., “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Deb S.R., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation” Tata McGraw Hill Book Co.,
1994.
3. Koren Y., “Robotics for Engineers", Mc Graw Hill Book Co., 1992.
4. Fu.K.S.,Gonzalz R.C. and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1987.
5. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.
6. Rajput R.K., “Robotics and Industrial Automation”, S.Chand and Company, 2008.
7. Surender Kumar, “Industrial Robots and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Oxford
and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1991.

OME752 Supply Chain Management LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To provide an insight on the fundamentals of supply chain networks, tools and
techniques.
Role of Logistics and Supply chain Management: Scope and Importance- Evolution of Supply
Chain - Decision Phases in Supply Chain - Competitive and Supply chain Strategies – Drivers
of Supply Chain Performance and Obstacles.
UNIT II SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK DESIGN 9

Role of Distribution in Supply Chain – Factors influencing Distribution network design –
Design options for Distribution Network Distribution Network in Practice-Role of network
Design in Supply Chain – Framework for network Decisions.
UNIT III LOGISTICS IN SUPPLY CHAIN 9

Role of transportation in supply chain – factors affecting transportations decision – Design
option for transportation network – Tailored transportation – Routing and scheduling in
transportation.
UNIT IV SOURCING AND COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN 9

Role of sourcing supply chain supplier selection assessment and contracts- Design
collaboration - sourcing planning and analysis - supply chain co-ordination - Bull whip effect –
Effect of lack of co-ordination in supply chain and obstacles – Building strategic partnerships
and trust within a supply chain.
UNIT V SUPPLY CHAIN AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 9

The role IT in supply chain- The supply chain IT frame work Customer Relationship
Management – Internal supply chain management – supplier relationship management – future
of IT in supply chain – E-Business in supply chain.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 The student would understand the framework and scope of supply chain networks and
functions.
Text Books:
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl and Kalra, “Supply Chain Management, Strategy, Planning,
and Operation”, Pearson Education, 2010.
References:
1. Jeremy F.Shapiro, “Modeling the Supply Chain”, Thomson Duxbury, 2002.
2. Srinivasan G.S, “Quantitative models in Operations and Supply Chain Management,
PHI, 2010
3. David J.Bloomberg, Stephen Lemay and Joe B.Hanna, “Logistics”, PHI 2002.
4. James B.Ayers, “Handbook of Supply Chain Management”, St.Lucle press, 2000.
OME753 Systems Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To introduce system engineering concepts to design the manufacturing system for
optimum utilization of source for effective functioning.

Definitions of Systems Engineering, Systems Engineering Knowledge, Life cycles, Life-cycle
phases, logical steps of systems engineering, Frame works for systems engineering.
UNIT II SYSTEMS ENGINEERING PROCESSES 9

Formulation of issues with a case study, Value system design, Functional analysis, Business
Process Reengineering, Quality function deployment, System synthesis, Approaches for
generation of alternatives.
UNIT III ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES- I 9

Cross-impact analysis, Structural modeling tools, System Dynamics models with case studies,
Economic models: present value analysis – NPV, Benefits and costs over time, ROI, IRR; Work
and Cost breakdown structure,
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES–II 9

Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, and Supportability models; Stochastic networks and
Markov models, Queuing network optimization, Time series and Regression models, Evaluation
of large scale models
UNIT V DECISION ASSESSMENT 9

Decision assessment types, Five types of decision assessment efforts, Utility theory, Group
decision making and Voting approaches, Social welfare function; Systems Engineering methods
for Systems Engineering Management,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 The Student must be able to apply systems engineering principles to make decision for
optimization.
 Hence an understanding of the systems engineering discipline and be able to use the
core principles and processes for designing effective system.
Text Books:
1. Andrew P. Sage, James E. Armstrong Jr. “Introduction to Systems Engineering”, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2000.
OTL751 Telecommunication System Modelling and Simulation LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To gain knowledge in modelling of different communication systems.
 To know the techniques involved in performance estimation of telecommunication
systems.
 To learn the use of random process concepts in telecommunication system simulation.
 To study the modelling methodologies of a telecommunication system.
 To study about the QAM digital radio link environment.
UNIT I SIMULATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES RANDOM PROCESS 9

Generation of random numbers and sequence – Gaussian and uniform random numbers
Correlated random sequences – Testing of random numbers generators – Stationary and
uncorrelated noise – Goodness of fit test.

UNIT II MODELING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9
Radio frequency and optical sources – Analog and Digital signals – Communication channel
and model – Free space channels – Multipath channel and discrete channel noise and
interference.
UNIT III ESTIMATION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURE FOR SIMULATION 9

Quality of estimator – Estimation of SNR – Probability density function and bit error rate –
Monte Carlo method – Importance sampling method – Extreme value theory.
UNIT IV SIMULATION AND MODELING METHODOLOGY 9

Simulation environment – Modeling considerations – Performance evaluation techniques –
Error source simulation – Validation.

Simulations of QAM digital radio link environment – Light wave communication link – Satellite
system.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Apply the constituents of a telecommunication systems.
 Analyze various modeling methodologies and simulation techniques.
 Estimate the performance measures of telecommunication systems.
 Apply system modeling in telecommunication.
 Demonstrate light wave communication and satellite communication systems .
Text Books:
1. Jeruchim MC Balaban P Sam K Shanmugam, “ Simulation of communication Systems:
Modeling, Methodology and Techniques”, Plenum press , New York,2002
2. Jerry banks & John S Carson, “ Discrete Event System Simulation”,Prentice Hall of
India,1996
References:
1. Averill M Law, “Simulation Modelling and Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Inc,2007 Geoffrey
Gorden, “System Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India,1992
2. Turin W, “Performance Analysis of Digital Communication Systems”, Computer Science
Press, New York,1990
OML751 Testing of Materials LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand the various destructive and non-destructive testing methods of materials
and its industrial applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MATERIALS TESTING 9

Overview of materials, Classification of material testing, Purpose of testing, Selection of
material, Development of testing, Testing organizations and its committee, Testing standards,
Result Analysis, Advantages of testing.
UNIT II MECHANICAL TESTING 9

Introduction to mechanical testing, Hardness test (Vickers, Brinell, Rockwell), Tensile test,
Impact test (Izod, Charpy) - Principles, Techniques, Methods, Advantages and Limitations,

Applications. Bend test, Shear test, Creep and Fatigue test - Principles, Techniques, Methods,
Advantages and Limitations, Applications.
UNIT III NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 9

Visual inspection, Liquid penetrant test, Magnetic particle test, Thermography test – Principles,
Techniques, Advantages and Limitations, Applications. Radiographic test, Eddy current test,
Ultrasonic test, Acoustic emission- Principles, Techniques, Methods, Advantages and
Limitations, Applications.
UNIT IV MATERIAL CHARACTERIZATION TESTING 9

Macroscopic and Microscopic observations, Optical and Electron microscopy (SEM and TEM) -
Principles, Types, Advantages and Limitations, Applications. Diffraction techniques,
Spectroscopic Techniques, Electrical and Magnetic Techniques- Principles, Types, Advantages
and Limitations, Applications.
UNIT V OTHER TESTING 9

Thermal Testing: Differential scanning calorimetry, Differential thermal analysis. Thermo-
mechanical and Dynamic mechanical analysis: Principles, Advantages, Applications. Chemical
Testing: X-Ray Fluorescence, Elemental Analysis by Inductively Coupled Plasma-Optical
Emission Spectroscopy and Plasma-Mass Spectrometry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Identify suitable testing technique to inspect industrial component
 Ability to use the different technique and know its applications and limitations
Text Books:
1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”, Narosa
Publishing House, 2009.
2. Cullity, B. D., “Elements of X-ray diffraction”, 3rd Edition, Addison-Wesley Company
Inc., New York, 2000.
3. P. Field Foster, “The Mechanical Testing of Metals and Alloys” 7th Edition, Cousens
Press, 2007.
References:
1. Metals Handbook: Mechanical testing, (Volume 8) ASM Handbook Committee, 9th
Edition, American Society for Metals, 1978.
2. ASM Metals Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American
Society of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA.
3. Brandon D.G., “Modern Techniques in Metallography”, Von Nostrand Inc. NJ, USA,
1986.
OIC751 Transducer Engineering LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To understand how physical quantities are measured and how they are converted to
electrical or other forms.
 To have an adequate knowledge in resistance, transducers.
 To develop the knowledge of inductance and capacitance transducers.
 To study the characteristics of Transducers.
 To impart knowledge on various types of transducers

UNIT I SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENTS AND CLASSIFICATION OF TRANSDUCERS 9
Units and standards – Calibration methods – Static calibration – Classification of errors :-
Limiting error and probable error – Error analysis :– Statistical methods – Odds and
uncertainty – Classification of transducers – Selection of transducers.
UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSDUCERS 9

Static characteristics: – Accuracy, precision, resolution, sensitivity, linearity, span and range -
Dynamic characteristics: – Mathematical model of transducer – Zero, I and II order transducers
- Response to impulse, step, ramp and sinusoidal inputs.
UNIT III VARIABLE RESISTANCE TRANSDUCERS 9

Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and applications of potentiometer,
strain gauge, resistance thermometer, Thermistor, hot-wire anemometer, piezoresistive sensor
and humidity sensor.
UNIT IV VARIABLE INDUCTANCE AND VARIABLE CAPACITANCE TRANSDUCERS 9

Induction potentiometer – Variable reluctance transducers – EI pick up – Principle of operation,
construction details, characteristics and applications of LVDT –Capacitive transducer and
types – Capacitor microphone – Frequency response.
UNIT V OTHER TRANSDUCERS 9

Piezoelectric transducer - Hall Effect transducer – Magneto elastic sensor- Digital transducers –
Smart sensors - Fibre optic sensors- Film sensors-Introduction to MEMS and Nano sensors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Ability to model and analyze transducers.
Text Books:
1. Neubert H.K.P., Instrument Transducers – An Introduction to their Performance and
Design, Oxford University Press, Cambridge, 2003.
2. Doebelin E.O. and Manik D.N., Measurement Systems – Applications and Design,
Special Indian Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
3. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. E.A.
References:
1. John P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, III Edition, Pearson Education,
2000.
2. Murthy, D.V.S., Transducers and Instrumentation, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
3. W.Bolton, Engineering Science, Elsevier Newnes, Fifth edition, 2006.
4. Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster, Sensors and Signal Conditioning, Wiley-
Interscience 2nd Edition, 1991.
5. Bela G.Liptak, Instrument Engineers' Handbook, Process Measurement and Analysis,
4th Edition, Vol. 1, ISA/CRC Press, 2003.
6. Ian Sinclair, Sensors and Transducers, 3rd Edition, Elsevier, 2012.
OCY751 Waste Water Treatment LTPC3003
Course Objectives:
 To make the student conversant with the water treatment methods including
adsorption and oxidation process.

 To provide basic understandings about the requirements of water, its preliminary
treatment.
UNIT I WATER QUALITY AND PRELIMINARY TREATMENT 9

Water Quality-physical- chemical and biological parameters of water- water quality
requirement - potable water standards -wastewater effluent standards -water quality indices.
Water purification systems in natural systems- physical processes-chemical processes and
biological processes- primary, secondary and tertiary treatment-Unit operations-unit processes.
Mixing, clarification - sedimentation; Types; aeration and gas transfer – coagulation and
flocculation, coagulation processes - stability of colloids - destabilization of colloids- transport
of colloidal particles, clariflocculation.
UNIT II INDUSTRIAL WATER TREATMENT 9

Filtration – size and shape characteristics of filtering media – sand filters hydraulics of filtration
– design considerations – radial, upflow, highrate and multimedia filters, pressure filter. Water
softening – lime soda, zeolite and demineralization processes – industrial water treatment for
boilers.
UNIT III CONVENTIONAL TREATMENT METHODS 9

Taste and odour control – adsorption – activated carbon treatment – removal of color – iron and
manganese removal – aeration, oxidation, ion exchange and other methods – effects of fluorides
– fluoridation and defluoridation –desalination - corrosion prevention and control – factors
influencing corrosion – Langelier index – corrosion control measures.
UNIT IV WASTEWATER TREATMENT 9

Wastewater treatment – pre and primary treatment – equalization neutralization – screening
and grid removal – sedimentation – oil separation gas stripping of volatile organics – biological
oxidation – lagoons and stabilization basins – aerated lagoons – activated sludge process –
trickling filtration – anaerobic decomposition.
UNIT V ADSORPTION AND OXIDATION PROCESSES 9

Chemical process – adsorption – theory of adsorption – ion exchange process – chemical
oxidation – advanced oxidation process – sludge handling and disposal – miscellaneous
treatment processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
 Will have knowledge about adsorption and oxidation process.
 Will gain idea about various methods available for water treatment.
 Will appreciate the necessity of water and acquire knowledge of preliminary treatment.
Text Books:
1. Metcalf and Eddy, “Wastewater Engineering”, 4th ed., McGraw Hill Higher Edu., 2002.
2. W. Wesley Eckenfelder, Jr., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, 2nd Edn., McGraw Hill
Inc., 1989.
References:
1. S.P. Mahajan, “Pollution control in process industries”, 27th Ed. Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., 2012.
2. M. Lancaster, “Green Chemistry: An Introductory Text”, 2nd edition, RSC publishing,
2010.
3. C.S. Rao, “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”, New Age International, 2007.

Syllabus 2017

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syllabus 2017

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syllabus 2017

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PSG INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND APPLIED RESEARCH

(Approved by AICTE, Affiliated to Anna University Chennai)

CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

To achieve excellence in education and research, and nurture engineers with

 To facilitate active learning and vocational training.

 To encourage and promote questioning spirit and 'can-do'

 To foster industry - institute collaboration.

 To ignite passion for creative work and selfless service towards a

 To provide intellectually stimulating environment, conducive for

To produce globally competent and socially responsible Electronics and Communication

 To prepare students to assimilate the theoretical concepts by providing experiential

 To promote innovative research in cutting edge technologies and indigenous

 To collaborate and establish Industry-Institute-Interactions and equip the students to

 To provide a learning ambience that imparts good communication skills, qualities of

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,

B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

S.NO. CONTENTS PAGE NUMBER

DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING / BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY

This Regulations is applicable to the students admitted to B.E/B.Tech. Programmes at all

1. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:

Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examinations of (10+2) Curriculum

Electronics and Communication Engineering 1

2.2 Lateral entry admission

(i) The candidates who possess the Diploma in Engineering / Technology

B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes under the Faculty of Civil Engineering, Faculty of

4.1 Categorization of Courses

i. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) courses include Technical English,

Electronics and Communication Engineering 2

4.2 Personality and Character Development

4.3 Number of courses per semester

4.4 Credit Assignment

Each course is assigned certain number of credits based on the following:

Contact period per week CREDITS

2 Laboratory Periods (also for EEC courses like /

Electronics and Communication Engineering 3

4.6 Industrial Visit

4.7 Value Added Courses

4.8 Online Courses

Electronics and Communication Engineering 4

4.10 Medium of Instruction

The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar

5 DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

5.1 A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E./ B .Tech. programme in 8

5.1.1 A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. Mechanical Engineering

Electronics and Communication Engineering 5

The courses that a student registers in a particular semester may include

6.2 Flexibility to Drop courses

7 ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF THE SEMESTER

Electronics and Communication Engineering 6

 Solving problems experienced by students in the class room and in the

Electronics and Communication Engineering 7

10 COURSE COMMITTEE FOR COMMON COURSES

Electronics and Communication Engineering 8

12 PROCEDURE FOR AWARDING MARKS FOR INTERNAL ASSESSMENT